complete arabic grammar 2nd ed

ةبالعربي ةكامل ةنظري ةثانوي

A COMPLETE

ARABIC GRAMMAR

FOR ENGLISH-SPEAKING LEARNERS

OF THE ARABIC LANGUAGE

SECOND EDITION

by

JACK KULES, PH.D.

Complete Arabic Grammar 2

Copyright 2014

ISBN

Printed in the United States oif America


Table of Contents

Page

I. Introduction 5

II. Arabic Alphabet 7

III. Roots 15

IV. Nouns 19

V. Adjectives 53

VI. Verbs 67

VII. Pronouns 127

VIII. Arabic Sentences 167

IX. Negation 203

X. Interrogative 231

XI. Survival Phrases 279

Appendix A – Glossary of Arabic Verbs 287

Arabic – English 289

English – Arabic 305

References 323


I. INTRODUCTION

Arabic is the most widespread of the living Semitic languages. Classified as South Central

Semitic, Arabic is related to Hebrew (spoken in Israel) and Amharic (spoke in Ethiopia) as well

as to the ancient Semitic languages. The earliest written inscriptions in Arabic were found on the

Arabian Peninsula and date from the early 4th

century AD. Many linguists consider Arabic to be

the most Semitic of the modern Semitic languages in terms of how completely it preserves the

features of Proto-Semitic – the common ancestor for all Semitic languages.

However, the preservation of those features of Proto-Semitic can mean, unfortunately, that

Arabic is not a very easy language to handle. The features include a set of sounds that can be hard

to pronounce by a non-native – fricatives, plosives and pharyngealized glottal stops (all the

Semitic guttural sounds produced far back in the mouth and throat). Old languages in general tend

to be very inflective – that is, a single word exhibits many changes in form to suit different tenses,

moods, genders, or numbers. This is another one of the preserved features of Proto-Semitic –

formal Arabic is very inflective and it has a large collection of declensions for different uses.

In fact, there are three spoken varieties of the Arabic language today. Classical or Koranic

Arabic is the form of Arabic which was used in the Koran (the Islamic holy book) as well as in

numerous literary texts from the 7th

to 9th centuries. This form of Arabic is difficult to understand

by ordinary Arabs today. However, it is still used for reading and studying the Koran and for

other religious purposes. It is still the language of religious preaching.

Modern Standard Arabic is a modern version used in formal speaking, most television and

radio, and practically all written matter – including books, newspapers, magazines, documents of

every kind, and reading primers for small children. It differs minimally in morphology from

Classical Arabic, but it has significant differences in syntax and lexicon – reflecting the influence

of the modern spoken dialects and Western languages.

Colloquial or dialectal Arabic differs to the many regional varieties derived from old Arabic

dialects – spoken across North Africa and the Middle East – which constitute the everyday

spoken language. These dialects are not normally written, although a certain amount of literature

– particularly plays and poetry – exists in many of them. They are often used to varying degrees

in informal spoken media, such as soap operas and talk shows. Literary Arabic or formal Arabic

is the official language of all Arab countries and is the only form of Arabic taught in schools at all

stages.

Modern dialects differ from standard Arabic and from one another in pronunciation,

vocabulary and grammar. They are less complex and less inflective than classical Arabic, and

they are usually labeled according to major geographic areas – such as North African, Levantine,

Egyptian, and Gulf. Within these broad classifications the daily speech of urban, rural and

nomadic speakers is distinctively different.

The sociolinguistic situation of Arabic in modern times provides a prime example of the

linguistic phenomenon of diglossia – the normal use of two separate varieties of the same

language, usually in different social situations. In the case of Arabic, educated Arabs of any

nationality can be assumed to speak both their local dialect and their school-taught literary Arabic

– to an equal or lesser degree.


This text will attempt to cover the fundamentals of formal Arabic – both the classical and

modern standard varieties. Those are the written form forms that are universally understood.


II. ARABIC ALPHABET

Semitic languages are written from right to left. Ancient Mesopotamians wrote on stones with

chisels, and since most transcirbers were right-handed it was easier and more natural to them to

write from right to left. The Arabic script – which is derived from Aramaic – is based on 18

distinct shapes. Using a combination of dots above and below eight of these shapes, the full

complement of 28 characters can be fully spelled out.

In the table below, the first column to the right shows the Arabic letters. The second column

shows their names in Arabic. The third column shows the Romanized version of the Arabic

letters, which will be used in this text when writing Arabic words in Roman letters. The last

column shows how the Arabic letters are pronounced. Some letters (the gutturals) can be hard to

pronounce by non-natives, so they should be tried to be pronounced in the closest possible way to

the original sounds.

Arabic Phonetization

Phonetization Romanized Name Letter

a as in ram aa ‘alef ا

b as in bat b baa’ ب

t as in tap t taa’ ت

th as in thumb th thaa’ ث

j as in jar j jeem ج

h as in harsh H Haa’ ح

ch as in Scottish loch kh khaa’ خ

d as in dark d daal د

th as in this th thaal’ ذ

r as in run r raa’ ر

z as in zoo z zayn ز

s as in sad s seen س

sh as in she sh sheen ش

emphatic s as in salt S Saad ص

emphatic d as in dart D Daad ض

emphatic t as in tore T Taa’ ط

emphatic th as in those Z Zaa’ ظ

emphatic a as in ago “ ‘ayn ع

guttural g as in Ghana gh ghayn غ

f as in fan f faa’ ف

emphatic q as in Qatar q qaaf ق


Phonetization Romanized Name Letter

k as in kite k kaaf ك

l as in leg l laam ل

m as in man m meem م

n as in nose n noon ن

h as in hat h haa’ ه

w as in wool w waaw و

y as in yes y yaa’ ي

The 28 Arabic letters are all consonants; however, there are six vowels in Arabic – three short

vowels and three long ones. Only the three long vowels are written using the alphabet. The three

short vowels have special marks which denote them. Therefore, the long vowels are letters or

consonants, but the short vowels are not letters.

The three long vowels are written using the three following letters: و ,ي ,ا. Because of this,

these letters are called “weak letters” – which will be discussed more fully in the section on

vowels.

The letter Daad ض is characteristic of Arabic and does not exist in any other language. This is

why Arabs called their language lughat aD-DaaD (ةعل ضضلا) “the language of Daad.”

Pronunciation of Consonants

In Arabic, as in any language, proper pronunciation is best learned by imitating a native

speaker. What follows is meant to give only a general idea of how the letters sound. By carefully

following the guidelines here, one can arrive at a good enough first approximation to serve until

one is able to listen to Arabic speakers. Except for the ones discussed below, the consonants are

pronounced pretty much as they are in English (see the Arabic Phonetization chart).

Consonant ‘alef hamza ء

The letter ‘alef has two forms – a form that denotes a long vowel ا, and one that denotes a

consonant ء. The consonant form ء is called hamza. Phonetically, the hamza is a “glottal stop.” It

sounds like a little “catch” in the voice. Although there is no letter representing this sound in

English, the sound actually does exist. It is the catch that occurs between vowels in the

exclamation “uh-oh” – as though you are in trouble – or the separation of syllables, the second of

which begins with a vowel – as in the sequence “an aim” as opposed to “a name,” or in “grade A”

as opposed to “gray day.” Notice that little catch in the voice at the beginning of each syllable. If

done properly and forcefully, that little catch in the voice between the two syllables is a perfect

hamza. In Arabic the glottal stop is a full-fledged consonant and can appear in the strangest

places – at the end of a word, for example.


Emphatic Consonants

Four Arabic letters ظ , ط , ض , ص are known as “emphatic consonants.” Although there is no

exact equivalent of them in English, they are not all that difficult to pronounce – it just takes a bit

of practice. The best way to do it is to start with their “unemphatic” equivalents. For example,

pronounce ص S as س s. Now try to make the same sound, but as if your mouth was full of cotton

wool so that you have to say s with your tongue drawn back. Make the sound more forcefully and

shorter in duration than a normal s. The back of your tongue should be raised up toward the soft

palate and the sound produced should have a sort of “dark” quality. This the letter Saad ص s.

There is a similar relationshiop between the following pairs—Daad ض D and daad د d; Taa’ ط T

and taa’ ت t; Thaa’ ظ Z and thaa’ ذ th. If one listens to native speakers of Arabic, one thing they

will notice is that these “emphatic consonants” give a very distinctive sound to the language.

khaa’ خ kh. The letter khaa’ is a voiceless velar fricative. It sounds like the ch in the Scottish

loch or like the ch in the German nacht – but it is slightly more guttural than its Scottish or

German counterparts. Do not pronounce it as an h or a k; it is better to exaggerate rather than

underemphasize the guttural aspect.

gayn’ غ gh. This is the sound made when gargling a g.

qaaf’ ق q. This sound usually gives Western speakers a hard time. It sounds a bit like k but it

is pronounced very far back in the throat. When saying the letter k, one touches the roof of the

mouth with more or less the middle of the tongue. When saying a qaaf, touch the very back of the

tongue to the soft palate in the back of the mouth. Most Westerners trying to learn Arabic have a

lot of trouble doing this and pronounce qaaf ق as if it were a kaaf ك. Arabs tend to be fairly

tolerant of this mistake and there are not very many words in which the difference between qaaf

and kaaf determines a different meaning. Still, it’s worth making the effort.

‘ayn’ ع “. This is a unique sound that only exists in Semitic languages. It is usually very hard

for Westerners to make. Unfortunately, it is a very common letter, so it must be mastered.

However, learners of Arabic can make this sound pretty well after practicing for some time. The

best way to learn it is to listen to Arabs and to practice continually. This letter is a pharyngeal

voiced fricative – the sound is made by constricting the muscles of the larynx so that the flow of

air through the throat is partially choked off. The best way to pronounce this letter is to gag – feel

the throat muscles constrict the passage of air in just the right way. The sound is voiced – the

vocal cords vibrate when making it. It sounds like the bleating of a lamb, but smoother. With

enough practice, one should be able to produce the sound without choking.

Haa’ ح H. The last of the emphatic consonants, this letter sounds much like a very emphatic

h. Imagine having swallowed a spoonful of the hottest chilis imaginable – that “haaa” sound that

results should be a good approximation of Haa’. Strictly speaking, Haa’ ح is an unvoiced version

of ‘ayn ع. In other words, it is made just like the ‘ayn—except that when you say ‘ayn your voal

cords vibrate, but when you say Haa’ they don’t.

Don’t worry too much if qaaf ق , ‘ayn ع and Haa’ ح don’t come right away. Quite a few

learned Westerners have struggled for decades with them. As a first approximation, pronounce

qaaf ق like kaaf ك, ‘ayn ع like hamza ء, and Haa’ ح like haa’ ه. However, this should be only a

temporary measure – more or less equivalent to the Arab who say “blease” instead of “please”

(there is no letter p in Arabic).


Words

In most languages, putting letters together next to each other simply creates a word. However,

in Arabic putting letters as they are in a row does not create a word. This is not a word— ب ح ر.

Ancient Arabs – or more precisely Arameans – saw that it made more sense to join the letters of

each work together. So, the previous “word” would look like رحب or رحب = ب + ح + ر, which

means “sea.”

To write and read Arabic one has to – in addition to knowing the letters – to know how each

letter is joined when it is at the beginning, middle or end of the word. Example:

was joined – و which means “day.” Notice here that one of the letters – waaw موي = ي + و + م

from the right but not from the left; this happens. Other examples: باتك = ك + ت + ا + ب which

means ”book” and ءاشع = ع + ش + ا + أ which means “supper.”

Table of Joining Figures

Figures of Joined Letters Letter

End Middle Beginning

see below ا

ب ب ب ب

ت

ت

ت

ة ت

ث ث ث ث

ج ج ج ج

ح ح ح ح

خ خ خ خ

د د د د

ذ ذ ذ ذ

ر ر ر ر

ز ز ز ز

س س س س

ش ش ش ش

ص ص ص ص

ض ض ض ض

ط ط ط ط

ظ ظ ظ ظ

ع ع ع ع

غ غ غ غ


Figures of Joined Letters Letter

End Middle Beginning

ف ف ف ف

ق ق ق ق

ك ك ك ك

ل ل ل ل

م م م م

ن ن ن ن

ه ه ه ه

و و و و

ي ي ي ي

ء أ أ أ

إ ؤ ؤ

أ ئ ئ

Special Figures

أ = أ + ا

أل or أل = ل + أ

أل or إل = ل + إ

أل or ال = ل + ا

Vowels

The 28 Arabic letters are all consonants; nonetheless, Arabic has six vowels – there are three

short vowels and three long vowels. Short vowels appear only in pronunciation – they do not

have letters that represent them in writing. In this text, the short vowels are Romanized as a, i and

u. Short vowels are sometimes denoted with special marks that appear above or below the

preceding letter. These marks are fatHa ( ) “a”, kasra ( ) “i “ and Dumma ( ) “u”. These

marks are rarely seen in real life, so don’t count much on them.

The three long vowels will be Romanized as aa, y and w. Long vowels are denoted in writing

with the letters ‘alef (ا) “aa”, yaa’ (ي) “y“and waaw (و) “w”. These are already known as the

consonants equivalents. Therefore, these letters can denote both the consonants and the long

vowels – this is why they are called the “weak letters.”


Name of Vowel Romanization Vowel

short a or fatHa as in “accept,” “ascend” a

long A or ‘alef as in “man,” “can” aa ا

short i or kasra as in “sit,” “hit” i

long i or yaa’ as in “feel,” “deal” y ي

short u or Dumma as in “put,” “foot” u

long u or waaw as in “rule,” “roof” w و

no vowel sound following

the letter is sukuun as in “stay,” “drag” ---

The three weak letters are joined when they denote long vowels, the same as when they

denote consonants. There is no way to determine between the two possibilities by just looking at

the word if one does not know which one is which. However, the exception is the weak ‘alef ا –

which it should be noted is missing the hamza ء. The hamza is always a consonant. If the ‘alef is

not a hamza, then it must be a long vowel – except when it occurs as the first letter in the word. In

that case, the ‘alef is a hamza (consonant), but it is a special type of hamza that is pronounced

only when it is the first sound that comes out of the mouth – such as when one begins speaking by

pronouncing that hamza. This hamza is called the “connecting hamza.” The other outspoken

hamza at the beginning of a word is called the “disconnecting hamza,” which is always

pronounced.

A single ‘alef ا can never denote a long vowel when it is the first letter of a word – this one

will always be a hamza ء. This is why the table of joining figures did not have a figure for long

vowel ‘alef at the beginning of the word. The hamza is not a “weak letter” – the weak ‘alef is

only that ‘alef which is not the first letter of a word and which doesn’t carry the sign of hamza.

The yaa’ ي and waaw ي have no such differentiating mark The yaa’ and waaw are always called

“weak letter” – whether they are consonants or long vowels.

Short vowels in Arabic are called “moves,” and long vowels are called “extensions.” A letter

that is followed by a “move” is called a “moving letter” and a letter that is not followed by any

vowel is called a “still letter.” The mark for stillness is sukuun . The three letters that indicate

long vowels (extended letters) are always still – never followed by any short vowel (move). The

letter that precedes any extended letter (long vowel) must be followed by theshort vowel that

corresponds to the long vowel.

Long Vowel Corresponding Short Vowel

aa ا a

y ي i

w و u

Thus, the extended letter is always a stll letter and is always preceded by the corresponding

short vowel – this is the definition of long vowel. Any weak letter that is still and preceded by the

corresponding short vowel must be a long vowel – or an extended letter. In this textl, a weak


letter in Arabic script which does not carry any “move” can be assumed to be a long vowel –

“still” and preceded by a corresponding “move.”

Here is the Romanization scheme for the hamza with the vowels:

Romanization of Letter ‘alef ا

‘a with a short a أ

‘u with a short i إ

‘i with a short u أ

‘aa with a long a آ

‘y with a long i يإ

‘w with a long u وأ

‘ with no vowel

Finally, there are some special transformations that involve the hamza.

‘a + ‘ = ‘a’ = aa أ + أ = أأ = آ

‘i + ‘ = ‘i’ = y إي = ئأ = إ + أ

‘u + ‘ = ‘u’ = w ؤآ = أ + أ = ؤأ

These transformations are meant to facilitate pronunciation.

Reading Out

Formal Arabic does not have combined vowels or diphthongs – when two letters of the long

vowel letters appear next to each other in a word this means that one of them is not denoting a

vowel there. Therefore, one shouldn’t combine vowels together like ai in “main” or oa in “loan”

– pronounce each sound separately as if reading out in Latin.

Pronunciation Example

‘aw وأ

‘ay يأ

When the taa’ ت t comes at the end of a word in this figure ة or ة it sounds –a rather than –t.

This kind of taa’ is called feminine taa’ or tied taa’ – taa’ marbuwTa. This will be covered in

more detail later. When extended ‘alef ا “aa” is the last letter in a word, it will often not get full

pronunciation, as it will have shorter duration than usual – often it will be pronounced closer to a

short a than a long aa. This is why it is called “shortened ‘alef” or ‘alef maqSuwra ى when it is

the last letter of a word. The other long vowels (y and w) will also not be fully pronounced when

they are at the end of words, and they will often be pronounced closer to the short vowels (i, u),

too.


The combination aa’ -اء is an extended ‘alef “aa.” Followed by a consonant hamza ء that is

still ’, a still hamza is one that has zero duration and does not leave the throat. A still hamza can

never occur as the first letter in an Arabic word. The hamza in the combination -اء is often

neglected in modern spoken dialects – it may be pronounced as aa, but this does not work for all

words. Examples are maa’ ءام “water,” samaa’ ءامس “sky” and masaa’ ءاسم “evening.”

Doubled Letters

One last thing remains about Arabic writing which is the mark shaddah which means

“stress.” It indicates double consonants with no vowel in between – the first consonant is “still.”

For example, م = م + م is mm; ةمأ is ‘umma or “nation;” ةطق is qiTTa or “cat.”

Accent and Stress

Accent is just as important in Arabic as in English. In English, it is usually impossible to tell

which syllable of a word should be stressed, and English is especially complicated in this – since

the stress can fall on virtually any syllable – whereas in most languages there are restrictions on

where accents are allowed to fall. The best way of getting a sense of the stress patterns of any

language, of course, is to listen to native speakers and to build up an intuitive sense of rhythm for

the language. This is as true for Arabic as for any other language. But there are some clear

guidelines about stress for Arabic.

The first thing to note is that Arabic syllables are divided into two kinds – long and short. A

short syllable is simply a single consonant followed by a single short vowel. The word kataba

“read”, for instance is composed of three short syllables ka-ta-ba. Any syllable that is not short is

considered long. There are various ways a syllable can be long – a consonant plus a long vowel, a

consonant plus a diphthong, and consonant sollowed by a short vowel followed by another

consonant. For instance, kitaab باتك “book” has two syllables, one short ki- and one long –taab;

maktaba ةبتكم “library” has three syllables, one long mak-, the second short –ta- and the third

short –ba; or maktuwb بوتكم “letter”, two long syllables mak- and –tuwb.

The basic rule of Arabic stress is this – the accent falls on the long syllable nearest to the end

of the word. If the last syllable is long, then that syllable is stressed kitaab باتك with the accent on

the last syllable. If the second-to-last syllable of a word is long and the last is short, then the

second-to-last syllable is stressed ‘abuwhu هوبأ “his father” with the accent on the second-to-last

syllable –buw-. If there is no long syllable in the word – like kataba بتك – then the accent is on the

third-to-last syllable, ka-. This will be the case with the great majority of past tense verbs, since

these usually take the form of three consonants separated by short vowels (kataba بتك “write,”

darasa سرد “study,” taraka كرت “leave,” and so on) – all accented on the first syllable.

The accent is not allowed to fall any further back than the third syllable from the end. So, if

one has a word of four (or more) short syllables, the stress has to fall on the third syllable from

the end katabahu هبتك “he wrote it” has four short syllables and the stress will therefore fall on the

third syllable back –ta-. One thing should be noted: in Arabic every syllable – long or short –

should be clearly and disctinctly pronounced, given its due weight. Syllables do not disappear or

get slurred just because they are unstressed.


III. ROOTS

In Indo-European languages, such as English, the infinitive is uaually the basic form of the

verb from which the rest of the forms are derived. For example, the inifivitive “to talk” is the

source of many derived words – talking (present participle), talked (past participle), talk (present

simple), talked (past simple), and talk (noun). The main stem of the infinitive stays preserved,

while the inflection works by affixing parts to the stem – most of the time. Unfortunately in

Semitic languages things are a little bit more complex than that. In Arabic the basic source of all

the forms of a verb is called the “root” of the verb. The root is not a real word – rather it is usually

a set of three consonants that can be found in all the words that are related to it. Most roots are

composed of three consonants and very few are four or five consonants. The root can be easily

obtained from the 3rd

person singular masculine simple past form (the perfective) of the verb.

Look at these roots.

Meaning of Verb Root 3rd

Pers. Sing. Masc. Simple

Past Verb

(he) did f “ l ف ع ل fa”ala لعف

(he) wrote k t b ك ت ب kataba بتك

(he) studied d r s د ر س darasa سرد

(he) drew (a picture) r s m ر س م rasama مسر

(he) ate ‘ k l أ ك ل ‘akala لكأ

(he) became bigger k b r ك ب ر kabura ربك

(he) knew “ l m ع ل م “alima ملع

(he) rolled (something) d H r j د ح ر ج daHraja د رح ج

Notice that the root is not a word – it is just a set of consonants. The consonants of the root

are separated by different vowels in different words. They can also be separated by other extra

consonants that do not belong to the root. The root is used to make all the forms of a verb. It is

used to make nouns as well. Each root pertains to a certain meaning – such as kataba بتك pertains

to ”writing.” The following is an example.

Meaning Words Derived from the Root ك - ت - ب

Verbs

wrote kataba بتك

was written kutiba بتك

wrote itself ‘inkataba بتكنإ

made to write / had to write ‘aktaba بتكإ

made to write kattaba بتك

exchanged writing with kaataba بتاك

exchanged writing with takaataba بتاكت

underwrote ‘iktataba بتتكإ


Meaning Words Derived from the Root ك - ت - ب

Nouns

written / letter maktwub بوتكم

book / dispatch kitaab باتك

writer kaatib بتاك

writing kitaabat ةباتك

desk / office maktab بتكم

library / bookstore maktabat ةبتكم

phalanx katyibat ةبيتك

Basically all these words were created by taking the root kataba ك ت ب and adding letters or

vowels to it. This is how Semitic languages work. Almost all Arabic words are structured on

roots.

Words in Arabic grammar belong to three categories:

Noun مسإ

‘ism includes pronouns, adjectives and most adverbs

Verb لعف

fa”ala there are three verb structures in Arabic

Letter (particle) فرح

Harafa words that do not have roots

Small words that do not have known roots are not even qualified enough to carry the title of a

“word” in Arabic grammar. Most of these “letters” are prepositions. The three letters of the root

(or rarely four) are called the “original letters” of the word. The varying letters that appear

between the root letters are called the “additional letters.” The letters that can serve as additional

letters are ten— ‘alef hamza أ, ‘alef ا, taa’ ت, seen س, laam ل, meem م, noon ن, haa’ ه, waaw و,

and yaa’ ي. These letters are rounded up in the word sa’altmuwnyihaa اهينومتلأس “you asked me

for/about it.” There are standard patterns for adding those additional letters to the root. These

patterns are called ‘awuzaan نازوأ “measures” or ‘abnya ةينبأ “structures.” For example:

‘infa”ala - did itself لعفنإ fa”ala = did لعف

‘inkasara = broke itself إرسكن kasara = broke رسك

‘inSabba = poured itself بصنإ Sabba = poured بص

This structure ‘infa”ala has a specific sense that is different from the basic structure fa”ala.

Both are structures of active simple past (perfective) verbs. However, there is a difference

between the two that is reminiscent of the Latin or French difference between faire (do) and se

faire (be done). The ‘infa”ala structure is called a “reflexive” structure because it denotes a self-

directed action. These two structures will be standardized:


(he/it) did fa”ala لعف

(he/it) did it himself/itself ‘infa”ala لعفنإ


IV. NOUNS

A noun in Arabic is a large concept that includes pronouns, adjectives, infinitives (verbal

nouns), and most of the adverbs. All nouns have two characteristics – gender and number. Every

noun in Arabic is either masculine or feminine – there are no neuter nouns in Arabic. Nouns are

four categories in Arabic:

True masculine: words that refer to male humans or male animals

Figurative masculine: masculine words that refer to objects

True feminine: words that refer to female humans or female animals

Figurative feminine: feminine weords that refer to objects

Unfortunatley there is no general rule to find out if a noun is masculine or feminine by just

looking at it. Although masculine nouns have no defining charcatertics, fortunately most – but not

all – of the feminine nouns can be easily identified by spotting feminine markers at their ends.

Feminine Markers

There are three feminine markers:

Feminine taa’ = ة

Extended ‘alef = ءا

Shortened ‘alef = ا / ى

1. Feminine taa’ ة

This important marker appears at the end of most feminine noun words. Nonetheless, it also

appears at the end of a few masculine proper names. If one sees a word that ends in this marker, it

will almost always be a feminine word.

male teacher mu”allim مملع

female teacher mu”allima(t) ةملعم

make cat QiTT طق

female cat QiTTa(t) ةطق

man rajul لجر

woman ‘imra’a ةارمأ

male child Tifl لفط

female child Tifla(t) ةلفط

male American (adj.) ‘amryikiyy يكيرمأ

female American (adj.) ‘amryikiyya(t) ةيكيرمأ

female proper name faaTima(t) ةمطاف

female proper name “aa’yisha(t) ةشيأع

tree (f.) shajara(t) ةرجش


hour (f,) saa”a(t) ةعاس

book (m.) kitaab باتك

pen (m.) qalam ملق

male proper name ‘usamma(t) ةماسأ

The feminine taa’ marbuTa ة can be pronounced both –a and –at. It will be pronounced –at

only if one keeps “speaking” after saying it. If one halts their voice right after pronouncing that

taa’, then one must turn it into –a or –ah. In other words, the t of –at cannot be the last thing you

pronounce. This is kind of similar to the rule of “Arabs don’t stop on the move.” It is also similar

to the French “liaison.” This marker is called”feminization taa’” or “tied taa’.”

2. Extended ‘alef ءا

This feminine marker is a long vowel ‘alef ا that is followed by a consonant ‘alef or hamza ء.

Nouns that end with this combination are called “extended nouns.” The final hamza ء is often

dropped in modern spoken dialects.

Being a “marker” means that the feminine ءا will be composed of additional letters and not

any original letters – that is, letters that belong to the root of the word. In order for these two

letters to be additional and thus a marker, the ‘alef ا must be the fourth letter or beyond in the

word – that is, the word has five letters or more. If the ‘alef ا were the third letter, then one of the

two letters of ءا (that is the hamza ء) would have to be an original letter because true words must

have a minimum of three original letters.

This does not mean that if the ’alef ا were the fourth letter or beyond, the ءا would always be

an additional feminine marker. Adjectives would usually be feminine, whereas infinitives or

verbal nouns would usually be masculine, and the ءا at their ends would not be additional – would

not be a feminine marker – even though it is the fourth letter or beyond.

a. Five Letters or More, Singular, Adjectives

Extended ‘alef as a Feminine Marker

gorgeous (adj.) Hasnaa’ ءانسح

blonde (adj.) shaqraa’ ءارقش

red (adj.) ‘ahamra حأرم

yellow (adj.) ‘aSafra رفصأ

desert ‘aXaHra رحصأ

green beans (sing.) FaaSuwlya’ ءايلوصاف

The last two exmples are simple nouns and not adjectives; however, the first one of them is in

fact an adjective that is customarily used as a noun – because adjectives in Arabic are also nouns.

Another way to look at both of them is that since they are not verbal nouns they are probably

feminine.


b. Five Letters or More, Singular, Verbal Nouns

Extended ‘alef NOT a Feminine Marker

Finding the way (m. verbal noun) ‘ihtida دتهإ

Beginning (m. verbal noun) ‘ibtida دتبإ

Seeking highness (m. verbal noun) li’asti” عتسإل

c. Less Than Five Letters

If the ءا were not a feminine marker – that is, in words with less then five letters – the word

will usually be masculine--especially verbal nouns. Very few of such words will be feminine.

Note that only singular nouns are being referred to here.

Extended ‘alef NOT a Feminine Marker

water maa’ ءام

air huwaa’ ءاوه

medication duwaa’ دءاو

heaven samaa’ ءامس

calling (verbal noun) nidaa’ ءادن

calling upon, praying (verbal noun) Du”aa’ ءاعد

afflicting, affliction (verbal noun) balaa’ ءالب

Although verbal nouns ending with ءا are masculine, it is common to see them used as female

proper names – rarely are they used as masculine proper names. The bottom line is ءا is common

in female names.

female proper name sanaa’ ءانس

female proper name Du”aa’ ءاعد

female proper name hanaa’ ءانه

male proper name Diyaa’ ءايض

Gender of Singular Nouns Ending with Extended ‘alef

Five letters or more

Adjective: feminine

Verbal noun: masculine

Others: usually feminine

Less than five letters Masculine

Proper names Often used for females

Irregular plurals According to the rules of plural

(usually feminine)


3. Shortened ‘alef ءا

The marker is simply a long vowel ‘alef ا aa. Nouns that end with this ‘alef are called

shortened nouns. This marker is the least specific to feminine words. Just like the extended ‘alef

marker, the long vowel ‘alef ا or ى can be a feminine marker only when the ‘alef ى / ا is the fourth

letter or beyond in the word – that is, the word has four letters or more. If the ‘alef ى / ا were third

letter then it would be an original letter of the word and could not be a feminine marker. If the

‘alef ى / ا were an original letter and not a feminine marker, the word would usually be masculine

– with very few exceptions.

Shortened ‘alef NOT a Feminine Marker

young man fataa ىتف

range madaa ىدم

approving, approval riDaa ىضر

stick, cane “aSaa ىصع

millstone raHaa ىحر

When the ‘alef ى / ا is fourth letter or beyond, the ‘alef ى / ا will be a feminine marker in

some – but not all – nouns. A rough rule is that derived nouns are masculine while the rest are

feminine. Derived nouns in Arabic include infinitives (verbal nouns), passive particles and nouns

of time and place.

Shortened ‘alef NOT a Feminine Marker

given (passive participle) mu”Taa ىطعم

purified (passive participle) munaqqaa ىقنم

chosen (passive participle) muSTafaa ىفطصم

(night) club (place noun) malhaa ىهلم

winter resort (place noun) mashtaa ىتشم

Adjectives of the comparative structure ‘af”al لعفأ are both masculine and feminine at the

same time – except when they are not being comparative adjectives, where they will be masculine

only.

Shortened ‘alef in ‘af”al لعفأ Adjectives

higher (m./f.) ‘a”laa ىلعأ

nearer (m./f.) ‘adnaa ىندأ

stronger (m./f.) ‘aquwaa ىوفأ

blind (m.) ‘a”maa ىمعأ

The rest of the shortened nouns with four letters or more will usually be feminine – especially

adjectives of the feminine superlative structure fu”laa ىلعف.


Shortened ‘alef as a Feminine Marker

female proper name layilaa ىليل

female proper name lubnaa ىنبل

female proper name majwaa ىوجن

highest (superlative adj.) “alayaa ايلع

smallest (superlative adj.) Sughraa ىرعص

pregnant (superlative adj.) Hublaa ىلبح

snake (adj.) ‘af”aa ىعفأ

music muwsyiqaa ىقيسوم

America ‘amriykaa اكيرمأ

Gender of Singular Nouns Ending with Shortened ‘alef

Four letters or more

Passive participle, place/time noun: masculine

‘af”al structure: masculine/feminine

Others: feminine

Less than four letters Masculine

Proper names Used for both males and females

Irregular plurals According to the rules of plural

(usually feminine)

Feminine Without Markers

Although the feminine markers will be of great use in identifying feminine nouns, there will

still be few feminine nouns that do not have any of these markers. Those nouns that refer to

female persons that do not have feminine markers are covered here.

mother ‘umm مأ

daughter bint تنب

sister ‘ukht تخأ

wife in classiscal Arabic zawuj جوز

bride “aruws سورع


Some nouns that refer to female animals.

female scorpion (also m.) “aqrab ترقع

female spider ‘ankabuwt توبكنع

female horse (also m.) faras سرف

female donkey ‘ataan ناتأ

All country names are feminine except for some Arab countries that were named after

geographical feaures – such as mountains, seas, rivers, etc. Those masculine country names are

Iraq, Jordan, Lebanon, Sudan, Kuwait, and Morocco.

Egypt (f.) miSr رصم

Palestine (f.) filisTiyn نيطسف

India (f.) al-hind دنهلا

China (f.) aS-Siyn نيصلا

Iraq (m.) al-“iraaq قارعلا

Jordan (m.) al-‘urdun ندرألا

For names of body parts that don’t have feminine markers, a general rule is that all the parts

of which there are more than one are feminine – the rest are masculine. In a more comprehensive

approach:

In the head, all the parts are masculine except the eyes, ears and teeth

In the trunk, all the parts are masculine

In the limbs, all the parts are feminine except the elbow and the forearm

All the internal parts are masculine except the liver

This is, of course, for parts that do not have feminine markers in their names.

eye (f.) ‘aiyn نيع

hand (f.) yiad دي

foot (f.) qadam مدق

liver (f.) kabid دبك

head (m.) raa’s رأس

back (m.) Zahr هظر

The following list contains nearly all the singular, feminine nouns that do not possess

feminine markers and which were not mentioned above.

sun (f.) shams سمش

fire (f.) naar ران


residence (f.) daar راد

route, way (m.) Tariyq قيرط

market (m.) suwq قوس

wine (f.) khamr رمخ

well (f.) bi’r رئب

war (f.) Harb برح

axe (f.) fa’s سأف

knife (m.) sikkiyn نيكس

pot (m.) qidr ردق

cup (f.) ka’s قأك

wind (f.) riyH حير

soul, spirit (f.) ruwH حور

soul, being (f.) nafs سفن

state (m.) Haal لاح

hell (m.) jahannam منهج

ship, ark (f.) fulk كلف

Number

Nouns in Arabic are either singular, dual or plural.

1. Dual Nouns

A dual noun is a noun that refers to two things or persons.

Dual Endings

-aan(i) Subject نا-

-ayin(i) Object ني-

For most words one needs just to attach these endings to the noun.

Stem Word: mu”allim = teacher ملعم

one male teacher mu”allim ملعم

one female teacher mu”allima(t) ةملعم

two male teachers (subject) mu”allimaan(i) ناملعم

two male teachers (object) mu”allimayin(i) نيملعم


two females teachers (subject) mu”allimataan(i) ناتملعم

two female teachers (object) mu”allimatayin(i) نيتملعم

One can see how the feminine taa’ marbuwTa ة- ought to be pronounced –at in the dual –

since it is no longer at the end of the word there is no possibility that one stops speaking right

after it. The dual ending shows obvious inflection with different grammatical cases – one should

pay attention to this.


Nominative (Subject)

The two teachers (m.) are here. mu”allimaan(i) ناملعم

The two teachers (f.) are here mu”allimtann(i)) ناتملعم

Accusative (Direct Object)

I saw the two teachers (m.). mu”allimayin(i) نيملعم

I saw the two teachers (f.). mu”allimatayin(i) نيتملعم

Ablative (Indirect Object)

I gave it to the two teachers (m.). mu”allimayin(i) نيملعم

I gave it to the two teachers (f.). mu”allimatayin(i) نيتملعم

2. Shortened Nouns

Shortened nouns are nouns that end with a shortened ‘alef ا / ى. The shortened ‘alef must be

changed to either waaw و or yaa’ ي when attaching the dual ending. The newly placed letter will

still be preceded by a short vowel a as was the ‘alef.

Original Form

(not used)

Shortened Form

اصع aSaa = stick (f.)‘ وصع

ىتف fataa = boy (m.) يتف

ىهفم maqhaa = café (m.) يهفم

ىفشتسم mustashfaa = hospital (m.) يفشتسم

The Dual

Object Case Subject Case

“aSawuayin(i) نيوصع “aSawuaan(i) ناوصع

fatayiayin(i) نييتف fatayiaan(i) نايتف

mustashfaeayin(i) نييفشتسم mustashfaeaan(i) نايفشتسم

maqhayiayin(i) نييهفم maqhayiaan(i) نايهفم


3. Extended Nouns

Extended nouns are nouns that end with a long vowel ‘alef ا aa that is followed by a

consonant ‘alef hamza ء. There are two cases when attaching the dual ending to extended nouns:

a. Case 1: Extended Nouns with Five Letters or More

In extended nouns with five letters or more, the hamza ء will be a fifth letter or more. When

the hamza ء is the fifth letter or more, there is a chance that it will be an additional letter – that is,

the aa’ ءا is a feminine marker. When the aa’ ءا is an additional or a feminine marker, the hamza

.when attaching the dual ending و must be turned unto waaw ء

Extended Nouns (Feminine)

desert SaHraa’ ءارحص

desert (literary) baiydaa’ ءاديب

brunette (adj.) samraa’ ءارمس

green (adj.) khaDraa’ ءارضخ

The Dual


SaHraawuayin(i) نيوارحص SaHraawuaan(i) ناوارحص

baiydaawuayin(i) نيواديب baiydaawuaan(i) ناواديب

samraawuayin(i) نيوارمس samraawuaan(i) ناوارمس

khaDraawuayin(i) نيوارضخ khaDraawuaan(i) ناوارضخ

If the hamza ء was not an additional letter – the word was not feminine – then the dual ending

would be attached normally and without any changes.

Extended Nouns (Masculine)

constructing, construction ‘inshaa’ ءاشنإ

beginning ‘ibtidaa’ ءادتبإ

satiety of water ‘irtiwaa’ ءاوترإ

The Dual


‘inshaa’ayin(i) نيءاشنإ ‘inshaa’aan(i) ناءاشنإ

‘ibtidaa’ayin(i) نيءادتبإ ‘ibtidaa’aan(i) ناءادتبإ

‘irtiwaa’ayin(i) نيءاوترإ ‘irtiwaa’aan(i) ناءاوترإ


b. Case 2: Extended Nouns with Four Letters or Fewer

In extended nouns with four letters or fewer the hamza ء will be the fourth letter or less.

When the hamza ء is the fourth letter or less, there is no chance that it will be an additional letter.

Therefore, the aa’ ءا will never be a feminine marker in nouns with fewer than five letters – this

does not mean that there are no feminine extended nouns with fewer than five letters. Since there

are no feminine markers here, the hamza ء will remain intact and one would just attach the dual

ending.

Extended Nouns

building binaa’ ءانب

heaven (f.) samaa’ ءامس

shoe (m.) Hidhaa’ ءادح

medication (m.) dawaa’ ءاود

The Dual


binaa’ayin(i) نيءانب binaa’aan(i) ناءانب

samaa’ayin(i) نيءامس samaa’aan(i) ناءامس

Hidhaa’ayin(i) نيءادح Hidhaa’aan(i) ناءادح

It is possible also in the last case to change the hamza ء back to its origin if it was an original

letter – but since this is not always the easy way to know and the variation is not obligatory, it is

better to heep the hamza ء without change.

Defective Nouns

Defective nouns are nouns that end with a long vowel –y ي- which belongs to the root.

Defective nouns take the dual ending just as regular nouns.

Annexed Duals

There are five dual nouns in Arabic of which there are no singulars. These are called the

“annexed duals.”


Annexed Duals

Meaning Object Case Subject Case

Two (m.) ‘thnayin(i) نينثإ ‘thnaan(i) نانثإ

Two (f.) ‘ithnatayin(i) نيتنثإ ‘ithnataan(i) ناتنثإ

Two (f.) thintayin(i) نيتنث thintaan(i) ناتنث

Both of (m.) kilaiy يلك kilaa الك

Both of (f.) kiltaiy يتلك kiltaa اتلك

The last two words lack their final noons because they are only used in genitive

constructions. Dual nouns in genitive constructions must loose the noon at their ends (which will

be covered later).

Plural Nouns

Plural nouns are nouns that refer to more than two things or persons. There are three types of

plural nouns in Arabic.

Masculine plural

Feminine plural

Irregular plural

Masculine plural nouns have masculine singular nouns only. Feminine plural nouns and

irregular plural nouns can have both masculine and feminine singular nouns. The gender of an

irregular plural noun will not necessarily match that of its singular. An important thing to know is

that for many nouns in Arabic the same irregular noun may have multiple plural words of more

than one type.

1. Masculine Plural

Masculine plural is used for nouns that refer to definite male persons.

Masculine Plural Endings

-wun(a) Subject نو-

-yin(a) Object ني-

For most words one needs just to attach these endings to the noun.



more than two male teachers (subject) mu”allimuwn(a) نوملعم

more than two male teachers (object) mu”allimyin(a) نيملعم


This ending cannot be added to a feminine noun. The choice between the two different

endings of the masculine plural depends on the grammatical case.


Nominative (Subject)

The teachers (m.) are here. mu”allimuwn(a) نوملعم

Accusative (Direct Object)

I saw the teachers (m.). mu”allimyin(a) نيملعم

Ablative (Indirect Object)

I gave it to the teachers (m.). mu”allimyin(a) نيملعم

Shortened Nouns

Shortened nouns are nouns that end with a shortened ‘alef ى or ا. When attaching the

masculine plural ending to a shortened noun, the shortened ‘alef ى or ا will be deleted and the

stem of the noun will end with a short vowel a instead of the long aa.

riDaa اضر

riDaawun(a) نواضر

riDawun(a) نوضر

Since we know that a long vowel cannot be so if it is not preoceded by the corresponding

short vowel, it is understandable why the w of the declension becomes a consonant waaw و. The

reason behind the deletion of the shortened ‘alef is that in Arabic it is forbidden that two still

consonants – “still” means not followed by a short vowel – follow each other without separation.

This is a general rule and an important one in Arabic.

Shortened Noun (m.)

higher (adj.) ‘a”laa ىلعأ

chosen (adj.) mujtabaa ىبتجم

proper name = chosen (adj.) muSTafaa ىفطصم

.

The Masculine Plural

Subject Case

‘a”lawun(a) نولعأ

mujtabawun(a) نولبتجم

muSTafawun(a) نولفطصم


The same is true for the object declension.

riDaa اضر

riDaayin(a) نياضر

riDayin(a) نيضر


Object Case

‘a”layin(a) نيلعأ

mujtabayin(a) نيبتجم

muSTafayin(a) نيلفطصم

Extended Nouns


consonant ‘alef hamza ء. When attaching the masculine plural ending to extended nouns, the

hamza ء will remain inact because feminine nouns do not take this ending – except for some rare

male proper names that have the feminine marker.

Extended Noun (m.)

builder bannaa’ ءانب

runner “addaa’ ءادع

.



binnaa’yin(a) * نيئانب binnaa’uwn(a) نوٴۇانب

“adda’yin(a) * نيئادع “adda’uwn(a) نوٴۇادع

* These figures – ئ and ٴۇ – are just alternative joining figures for the ‘alef hamza أ.

Defective Nouns

Defective nouns are nouns that end with a long vowel –y ي which belongs to the root. When

attaching the masculine plural ending to defective nouns, the y ي must be deleted.

Defective Nouns (m.)

judge qaaDiy يضاق

sponsor raa”iy يعار

attorney muHamiy يماحم

.




qaaDiyn(a) نيضاق qaaDuwn(a) نوضاق

raa”iyn(a) عارني raa”uwn(a) نوعار

muHamiyn(a) نيماحم muHamuwn(a) نوماحم

Annexed Masculine Plurals

Annexed masculine pluirals are either masculine plurals to which there are no singulars or

masculine plurals whose singulars do not refer to definite male persons – which is the condition

of a true masculine plural. There are several of these in classical Arabic.



sons banuwn(a) نونب ‘ibn نيإ

years sinuwn(a) نونس sana(t) ةنس

households ‘hluwn(a) نولهأ ‘ahl لهأ

worlds “aalamuwn(a) نوملاع “aalam ملاع

earths ‘arDuwn(a) نوضرأ ’arD ضرأ

households “illiyyuwn(a) نويلع --- ---

worlds mi’uwn(a) نوئم mi’a(t) ةئم

earths ‘uluw ولوأ --- ---


Object Case

baniyn(a) نينب

siniyn(a) نينس

‘ahliynn(a) نيلهأ

‘a”layin(a) نيملاع

‘arDiyn(a) نيضرأ

‘lliyyn(a) نييلع

mi’iyn(a) نيئم

‘uliy يلوأ


The last word ‘uluw ولوأ lacks the final noon – this is because it is only used in genitive

constructions. Maculine plural nouns in genitive constructions must loose the noon at their ends

(again, this will be covered later).

Probably the most important annexed masculine nouns are the “decade words.”


“Decade Words”


twenty “ishriyn(a) نيرشع “ishruwn(a) نيرشع

thirty thalaathiyn(a) نيثالث thalaathuwn(a) نوثالث

forty ‘arba”iyn(a) نيعبرأ ‘arba”uwn(a) نوعبرأ


fifty khamsiyn(a) خنيسم khamsuwn(a) نوسمخ

sixty sittiyn(a) نيتس sittuwn(a) نوتس

seventy sab”ayi(a) نيعبس sab”awu(a) نوعبس

eighty thamaaniyn(a) نينامث thamaanuwn(a) نونامث

ninety tis”iyn(a) نيعست tis”uwn(a) نوعست

2. Feminine Plural

Feminine plural is used for:

Nouns and adjectives that refer to definite female persons

Nouns and adjectives that end with feminine markers

Arbitrary for some nouns and adjectives that refer to feminine and masculine

Objects – especially to verbal nouns or infinitives

This ending can be attached to everything except nouns and adjectives that refer to male

persons and which do not end with a feminine marker – -aat تا. When adding the feminine plural

ending to a word that ends with a feminine taa’ marbuwTa ة, the ة- must be deleted.



one female teacher mu”allima(t) ةملعم

more than two female teachers mu”allimaat تاملعم

one advertising, advertisement (m.) ‘i”laan نالعإ

more than two advertisements (f.) ‘i”laanaat تانالعإ


Shortened Nouns

Shortened nouns are nouns that end with a shortened ‘alef ى or ا. The shortened ‘alef must be

changed to either waaw و or yaa’ ي when attaching the feminine plural ending. This ‘alef ا will be

changed to waaw و and this ‘alef ى will be changed to yaa’ ي. The newly placed letter will still be

preceded by a short vowel a as was the ‘alef.

Shortened Nouns

female proper name shadhaa اذش

female proper name hudaa ىده

reminiscence (f.) dhikraa ىركذ

hospital (m.) mustashfaa ىفشتسم

.

The Feminine Plural

shadhawuaat تاوذش

hudayaat تايده

dhikrayat تايركذ

mustashfayaat تايفشتسم

Extended Nouns


consonant ‘alef hamza ء. There are two cases when attaching the feminine plural ending to

extended nouns.

a. Case 1: Extended Nouns with Five Letters or More

In extended nouns with five letters or more, the hamza ء will be a fifth letter or more. When

the hamza ء is the fifth letter or more, there is a chance that it will be an additional letter – that is,

the aa’ ءا is a feminine marker. When the aa’ ءا is an additional or a feminine marker, the hamza

.when attaching the feminine plural ending و must be turned unto waaw ء

Extended Nouns (Feminine)

female proper noun najaa’ ءالجن

desert SaHraa’ ءارحص

blonde (adj.) ssaqraa’ ءارقش

green (adj.) khaDraa’ ءارضخ

The Feminine Plural

najaawuaat تاوالجن

SaHraawuaat تاورحص


ssaqraawuaat تاورقش

khaDraawuaat تاورضخ

If the hamza ء was not an additional letter – the aa’ تاو were not a feminine marker – then the

feminine plural ending would be attached normally and without any changes.

Extended Nouns (Masculine)

constructing, construction ‘inshaa’ ءاشنإ

dictating ‘imlaa’ ءالمإ

gifting ‘ihdaa’ ءادهإ

The Feminine Plural

‘inshaa’aat تاءاشنإ

‘imlaa’aat تاءالمإ

‘ihdaa’aat تاءادهإ

b. Case 2: Extended Nouns with Four Letters or Fewer

In extended nouns with four letters or fewer the hamza ء will be the fourth letter or less.

When the hamza ء is the fourth letter or less, there is no chance that it will be an additional letter.

Therefore, the aa’ ءا will never be a feminine marker in nouns with fewer than five letters—this

does not mean that there are no feminine extended nouns with fewer than five letters. Since there

are no feminine markers here, the hamza ء will remain intact and one would just attach the dual

ending.

Extended Nouns

female proper name wafaa’ ءافو

heaven (f.) samaa’ ءامس

calling (m.) nidaa’ ءادن

The Feminine Plural

wafaa’aat تاءافو

samaa’aat تاءامس

nidaa’aat تاءادن

Defective Nouns

Defective nouns are nouns that end with a long vowel –y ي- which belongs to the root.

Defective nouns take the feminine plural ending just as regular nouns.


3. Irregular Plural

Turning a singular noun into a masculine or feminine plural is done by adding suffixes while

the main stem of the noun is preserved. Irregular plurals work in another way. Suffixes are not

added and the main stem of the noun will not be preserved. Instead, the root letters are applied

into a new, different pattern or structure to form the plural. Therefore, the name of this plural in

Arabic is the “breaking plural,” because it involves breaking the stem of the singular noun.

Plural Noun Singular Noun

rijaal لاجر

rajul لجر

men (m.) man (m.)

tujjaar راجت

taajir رجات

merchants (m.) merchant (m.)

Haruwb بورح

Harb برح

wars (f.) war (f.)

‘ashjaar اجشأر

shajara(t) ةرجش

trees (f.) tree (f.)

‘ayiaam مايأ

yiwum موي

days (f.) day (f.)

Haqaa’iq قئاقح

Haqiyqa(t) ةقيقح

facts (f.) fact (f.)

In ancient times, Semitic people used only two ways for pluralizing nouns – the masculine

plural suffix and the feminine plural suffix. All Semites used only these two ways for pluralizing

every noun – or at least most of the nouns – whether they were referring to persons, animals or

objects. However, Semitic peoples slowly started to develop a tendency towards “breaking” the

nouns to pluralize them instead of suffixing them in the usually way. This phenomenon had not

yet been very extensive when Akkadians – or Mesopotamians – started writing their language.

There were few nouns in the Akkadian language – which is the oldest Semitic language – that

were pluralized by “breaking” the noun instead of suffixing it. Even Hebrew shows minimal

appearance of this phenomenon in comparison to Arabic.

It appears that Arabs enjoyed this kind of pluralization so much that they kept doing it until –

by the time of Muhammad and classical Arabic – the masculine plural declension was no longer

used for nouns referring to objects or animals. Rather, this declension became used only for

nouns referring to male persons. However, there were few remnants in classical Arabic of nouns

referring to masculine objects which were pluralized by suffixing the masculine plural ending to

them. Such words that were used in the Koran included “aalamuwn(a) نوملاع plural of “aalam

year.” These words are called in Arabic“ ةنس plural of sana(t) نوس world” and sinuwn(a)“ ملاع

grammar the “annexed masculine plurals” because they go against the rule of keeping the

masculine plural declension only for male persons. However, since the time of the Koran it has

only gotten worse. The tendency has been to keep going on in this course, and more and more

words are now irregularly pluralized in modern standard Arabic.


Many of the nouns referring to male persons – and which were regularly pluralized in

classical Arabic – are now irregularly pluralized. In classical Arabic, the breaking plural was

generally used for simple nouns but not for adjectives – now it is used for both without any

differentiation. It is important to know that nouns can be irregularly pluralized by more than one

way – that is by using more than one structure or pattern. Moreover, many nouns can be regularly

and irregularly pluralized at the same time.

Plural Singular

رهش رهشأ روهش

shuhuwr ‘ashhur shahr

months (f.) months (f.) month (m.)

لتاق نولتاق ةلتق

qatala(t) qaatiluwn(a) qaatil

killers (m.) killers (m.) killer (m.)

Note that irregular plural words are always feminine, regardless of their singulars – unless

they were referring to male persons. Irregular nouns can assume many structures; however, not all

the structures are equally important. Some of the structures are used much more than others.In

lLearning Arabic, one eventually gets used to the irregular plural strauctures and it becomes

easier to handle.

I. Fewness Structures

These structures are supposed to be used for plurals that refer to no more than ten units – but

this is not mandatory.

‘af”ul لعفأ

‘af”ila(t) ةلعفأ

‘af”aal لاعفأ

fi”la(t) ةلعف

In order to be able to use these structures one will need to know the root of the irregular noun.

The truth is that there are no real solid rules for when to use each of these structures; however,

there are some general guidelines that can be used.


‘af”ul لعفأ – This structure is generally used for the singular nouns that are of the following

structures:

1—fa”l لعف

Plural Singular

‘anhur رهنأ

nahr رهن

rivers (f.) river (m.)

‘abHur رحبأ

baHr رحب

seas (f.) sea (m.)

‘ashhur أرهش

shahr رهش

months (f.) month (m.)

‘awjuh هجوأ

wajh هجو

faces, aspects (f.) face, aspect (m.)

However, there are many irregularities to this rule

Plural Singular

quluwb بولق

qalb بلق

hearts (f.) heart (m.)

Huruwb بورح

Harb برح

wars (f.) war (m.)

shuhuwr روهش

shahr رهش

months (f.) month (m.)

wujuwh هوجو

wajh هجو

faces, aspects (f.) face, aspect (m.)

‘anhaar راهنأ

nahr رهن

rivers (f.) river (m.)

biHaar راحب

baHr رحب

seas (f.) sea (m.)

kilaab بالك

kalb بلك

dogs (f.) dog (m.)

Most of the fa”l لعف nouns that have weak middle letters in their trilateral roots don’t

follow this rule.

Most of the fa”l لعف nouns that have waaw و as the first letter of their trilateral

roots don’t follow this rule.


1—f”aal لاعف / f”iyl ليعف / f”uwl لوعف – Figurative feminine quadrilateral nouns that have a

long vowel as third letter will be pluralized as ‘af”ul لعفأ.

Plural Singular

‘adhru” عردأ

dhiraa” عارد

arms (f.) arm (m.)

‘aiymun نميأ

yiamiyn نيمي

right hands (f.) right hand (m.)

‘af”ila(t) ةلعفأ – This structure is generally used for the following singular nouns.

1—f”aal لاعف / f”iyl ليعف / f”uwl لوعف

Plural Singular

‘aT”ima(t) ةمعطأ

Ta”aam ماعط

foods (f.) food (m.)

‘a”mida(t) ةدمعأ

“amuwd دومع

poles (f.) pole, pillar (m.)

There are irregularities.

2—fa”aal لاعف / fi”aal لاعف – Provided that the second and the third root letters are the same,

any noun of these structures will be pluralized as ‘af”ila(t) ةلعفأ.

Plural Singular

‘abniya(t) نبأةي

binaa’ أنب

buildings (f.) building (m.)

‘arghifa(t) ةفرغأ

raghiyf فيغر

loafs (f.) loaf (m.)

There are irregularities.

‘af”aal لاعفأ – This structure is generally used for all the trilateral nouns that do not take the

first structure of ‘af”ul لعفأ. This includes:

fa”l لعف nouns that have a weak middle letter in their trilateral roots.

fa”l لعف nouns that have waaw و as the first letter of their trilateral roots don’t follow

this rule.

Every trilateral noun that is not of the structure fa”l لعف.


Plural Singular

‘abuwaab باوبأ

baab باب

doors (f.) door (m.)

‘awuqaat تاقوأ

waqt تقو

times (f.) time (m.)

‘ajdaad دادجأ

jadd دج

grandfathers (f.) grandfather (m.)

‘aqlaam مالقأ

qalam ملق

pens (f.) pen (m.)

‘akbaad دابكأ

kabid دبك

livers (f.) liver (f.)

‘a”Daad داضعأ

“aDud دضع

upper arms (f.) upper arm (m.)

‘asmaa’ ءامسأ

‘ism مسإ

names (f.) name (m.)

‘a”naab بانعأ *

“inab بنع *

grapes (f.) grapes (m.)

‘aabaaT طابأ

‘ibiT طبإ

armpits (f.) armpit (m.)

‘aqfaal افقأل

qufl لفق

locks (f.) lock (m.)

‘arTaab باطرأ *

ruTab بطر *

unripe dates (f.) unripe dates (m.)

‘aHlaam مالحأ

Hulum ملح

dreams (f.) dream (m.)

* Both the singular and plural nouns refer to plural fruits.

fi”la(t) ةلعف – This is a rare structure that is used with few nouns.

Plural Singular

fitiya(t) ةيتف

fataa ىتف

boys (m.) boy (m.)

Sibiya(t) ةيبص

Sabiyy يبص

boys (m.) boy (m.)


II. Plentyful Structures

These structures are used for plurals without regard of their numbers. They also enjoy a large

deal of irregularity in usage – just like the previous ones.

fu”l لعف

fu”ul لعف

fu”al لعف

fi”al لعف

fu”ala(t) ةلعف

fa”ala(t) ةلعف

fi”ala(t) ةلعف

fu””al لعف

fa”laa ىلعف

fu””aal لاعف

fi”aal لاعف

fu”uwl لوعف

fi”laan نالعف

fu”laan نالعف

fu”alaa’ ءالعف

‘af”ilaa’ ءالعفأ

fawuaa”il لعاوف

fa”aa’il لئاعف

fa”aaliy يلاعف

fa”aalaa ىلاعف

fa”aaliyy يلاعف

fa”aalil للاعف

mafaa”il لعافم

yiafaa”il لعافي

fiyaa”il لعايف

‘afaa”il ألعاف

‘afaa”iyl لعافأ

yiafaa”iyl ليعافي

fa”aaliyl ليلاعف

fayiaa”iyl ليعايف

mafaa”iyl ليعافم

tafaa”iyl ليعافت


More information about these structures will be covered later.

Gender of Plural Nouns

Masculine Plurals – Nouns that end with a masculine plural ending are always

masculine words.

Feminine Plurals – Nouns that end with a feminine plural ending are always feminine

words.

Irregular Plurals – The gender of an irregular noun will not always match the

gender of its singular

Classically, all irregular plurals were considered and treated as singular feminine nouns—no

matter what the gender of the referents were. For example, one would say “this men” or “this

dishes” instead of “these men” or “these dishes” if “men” and “dishes” were irregular plurals.

Also one would say “the men does what she promises” instead of “the men do what they

promise.” However, irregular plurals of nouns referring to persons (like men and women) had

another possibility – such plurals could be treated as regular plural nouns alongside the general

rule of treating them as singular feminines.

In the modern language, irregular plurals referring to persons are usually treated as regular

plural nouns in terms of grammar – except for case declension where they will declined as

singulars. This will be covered in more detail later.

Grammatical Treatment of Irregular Plurals

Reference Gender Number

to persons matches the gender of the referents plural

to persons (classical) feminine singular

to objects or animals feminine singular

Note: In regard to case inflection, irregular plurals are always treated as singulars.

Examples on the gender of irregular plurals.

Plural Singular

rijaal لاجر

rajul لجر

men (m.) man (m.)

banaat تانب

bint تنب

girls, daughters (f.) girl, daughter (f.)

‘awuraaq قاروأ

wuaraqa(t) ةقرو

papers (m.) paper (f.)

‘aqlaam مالقأ

qalam ملق

pens (f.) pen (m.)


Type of Plural Use Gender of the

Plural Word

Masculine Plural For nouns that refer to definite male persons Masculine

Feminine Plural

For nouns that refer to female persons

For nouns that end with feminine markers

For some nouns that refer to feminine or masculine

objects

Feminine

Irregular Plural

For nouns that refer to persons Masculine /

Feminine

For nouns that refer to masculine or feminine

objects

Feminine

The Definite Article

In English the indefinite articles are “a” and “an” and the definite article is “the.” In Arabic,

there is no indefinite article like in English; there is instead a declension that indicates

“indefiniteness” – this is called “nunation.” In order to comprehend this declension, one needs to

first understand about case inflection. There is one definite article that does not change in

whatever case. This article is al- لا “the.”

Nouns in the Definite State

the male teacher al-mu”allim ملعملا

the female teacher al-mu”allima(t) ةملعملا

the two male teachers al-mu”allimaan(i) ناملعملا

the two female teachers al-mu”allimatann(i) ناتملعملا

the male teachers al-mu”allimwun(a) نوملعملا

the female teachers al-mu”allimaat تاملعملا

The al- لأ will always be joined to the noun after it and they will form a cingle word that is in

the definite state.

Pronounciation of the Definite Article

The definite article al- لأ is comprised of two letters, the first one of which is a consonant

hamza ء ‘. However, this hamza is of the type that is called the “hamza of connection.”

Connection hamza is pronounced only when it is the first sound that comes out of the mouth –

such as when one begins speaking by pronouncing that hamza. The other type of hamza at the

beginning of a word is the “hamza of disconnection” – that hamza is always pronounced.

Differentiating between the two types is easy when one can see the word, depending on the

presence or absence of this sign ء over or under the ا such as أ or إ.


Solar and Lunar laam ل

The following rule is a special one for the second letter of the definite article – the laam ل.

This rule will apply only to the laam of the definite article but not to any other laam – or laam

alef. This specific laam can also be omitted in speech – depending on the letter that follows it.

The laam which will be omitted is called the “solar laam;” the laam which will not be omitted is

called the “lunar laam.”

The solar laam is the laam of any al- لأ that is followed by one of the following letters – taa’

and noon ,ل laam ,ظ ’Zaa ,ط ’Taa ,ض Daad ,ص Saad ,ش sheen ,س seen ,ذ thaal ,د daal ,ث’thaa ,ت

,ا that is followed by one of the following letters – ‘alef لأ -The lunar laam is the laam of any al .ن

baa’ ب, jeem ت, Haa’ ث, khaa’ خ, ‘ayn ع, ghayn غ, faa’ ف, qaaf’ ق, kaaf’ ك, laam ل, meem م, haa’

The solar laam will be omitted in speech and replaced by a shaddah .ي ’and yaa ,و waaw ,ه

“double letter” on the following letter – that is, the following letter will be doubled.

Solar al- لا

the sun (f.) al-shams = ash-shams سمشلا

the man (m.) al-rajul = ar-rajul لجرلا

the night (m.) al-layil = al-layil ليللا

It should be noted that the shaddah (doubling of the letter or heavy stress) never appears on

the first letter of any word unless it was preceded by a solar al- لأ – solar laam. The lunar laam

will be left without any change in pronunciation.

Lunar al- لا

the moon (m.) al-qamar رمقلا

the woman (mf al-mar’a(t) ةارملا

the evening (m.) al-masaa’ ءاسما

Solar al- لا Lunar al- لا

Before

taa’ ت, thaa’ث, daal د, thaal ذ, seen س,

sheen ش, Saad ص, Daad ض, Taa’ ط, Zaa’

ن and noon ,ل laam ,ظ

Before

‘alef ا, baa’ ب, jeem ت, Haa’ ث, khaa’ خ,

‘ayn ع, ghayn غ, faa’ ف, qaaf’ ق, kaaf’

and ,و waaw ,ه ’haa ,م meem ,ل laam ,ك

yaa’ ي

The laam is changed to the following letter

al-s… = as-s…

The laam is kept intact

al-m… = al-m…


Special Writing Conditions for al- لأ

The connecting hamza is not omitted in writing, except in the following two cases:

1. la- + al- ال + لا. When the emphatic particle la ال – certainly, indeed – precedes a word

beginning with the definite article al- لا, the hamza of the al- will be deleted in writing

as well as in pronunciation.

رمقلال = ل + رمقلا

la- + al-qamar = la-l-qamar

certainly + the moon = certainly the moon

سمشلال = ل + سمشلا

la- + al-shams = la-sh-shams

certainly + sun = certainly the sun

2. li- + al- ل + لا. When the preposition li ل – for, to, in order to – precedes a word

beginning with the definite article al- لا, the hamza of the al- will be deleted in writing

as well as in pronunciation.

رمقلال = ل + رمقلا

li- + al-qamar = li-l-qamar

for/to + the moon = for/to the moon

سمشلال = ل + سمشلا

li- + al-shams = li-sh-shams

for/to + sun = for/to the sun

Definite Nouns in Arabic

The definite nouns in Arabic are:

Proper nouns – names of people, place, etc.

Pronouns and demonstratives

Nouns preceded by the definite article al- لا

Nouns forming the first part of a genitive construction

Nouns in the vocative case

All of these things will be covered later.


Case Inflection

Unlike the other living Semitic languages, such as Hebrew, formal Arabic is a language that

exhibits vigorous case and mood inflection. Case inflection means that a noun – which includes in

Arabic adjectives – has multiple declensions or endings for different grammatical cases. For

example, the noun al-wualad دلولا “the child” is not written completely this way – one has to

complete the noun by adding the appropriate case-ending for the grammatical case. There are

three grammatical cases in Arabic, so this word can have three different case-endings.

Case Declension of a Regular Singular Noun

Case Noun

Nominative al-wualad(u) دلولا

Accusative al-wualad(a) دلولا

Genitive al-wualad(i) دلولا

These designations of the cases are the ones traditionally used to refer to the three Arabic/

Semitic cases. However, these designations do not adequately express the mupltiple usages of

each case. The accusative case, for example, is used for about ten cases other than the actual

accusative – the direct object case.

Names of Arabic/Semitic Grammatical Cases

Western Name Arabic Name

Nominative al-raf”(u) عفرلا

= the rising

Accusative an-naSb(u) بصنلا

= the erecting

Genitive al-jarr(u) رجلا

= the dragging

Case-Inflected and Non-Case-Inflected Words

Not every Arabic word goes under case or model inflection – case inflection is for nouns

)including adjectives), and mood-inflected is for verbs. There are Arabic words that do not show

any changes with regard to grammatical case or model. Each Arabic word belongs to either one

of two categories:

Built words – words that do not exhibit case of mood inflection

Arabized words – words that do exhibit case or mood inflection

The built words are generally the pronouns, the perfective (past) and imperative verbs, and all

the participles.


Case inflection is called in Arabic ‘i”raab بارعإ “Arabization.” This speaks of the mentality

of ancient Arabs who held eloquence in their language very precious. However, most regular

speakers of Arabic are – and were – not very talented in Arabizing their speech. This is why case

inflection is no longer present in the modern spoken dialects of Arabic. It is still taught at schools,

but there are really not many regular speakers who are good enough at it.

For most words the case- and mood-inflected endings will be nothing but different short

vowels. Some words, however, show variations in letters – like the case inflection of the dual and

masculine plural endings already mentioned. Thus, most of the case- and mood-inflected endings

do not appear in writing because short vowels are not usually written.

Case inflection in Arabic is difficult and it is important for a beginning learner to spend much

time on it. In this text, the case-inflected parts of words will be called the “case-signs.” This

designation is inspired from the Arabic one and it is better than case-endings because the cse-

inflected parts are not always the “endings” of words.

Arabs Don’t Stop on What Is Moving

Remember, in Arabic letters that are followed by short vowels are called “moving letters;”

letters that are not followed by short vowels are called “still letters.” Some words end with still

letters, others end with moving letters. While speaking proper Arabic, one cannot finish talking

by pronouncing the last letter as a moving letter – that is, one must ignore the final short vowel (if

there were one), thus making the final letter “still.” This is the old saying: “Arabs do not stop on a

moving.” For example, jaa’ al-wualad ‘ilaa al-madrasat al-yiwum ءاج دلولا ىلإ ةسردملا مويلا “The

boy came to school today.”

Actual Pronunciation Romanized Version Arabic Words

jaa’ jaa’(a) ءاج

jaa’a l-wualad jaa’(a) (a)l-wualad(u) ءاج دلولا

jaa’a l-waladu ‘ilaa l-madrasa jaa’(a) (a) l-walad(u) ‘ilaa

(a)l-madrasa(ti) ءاج دلولا ىلإ ةسردملا

jaa’a l-waladu ‘ilaa l-

madrasati l-yiwum

jaa’(a) (a) l-walad(u) ‘ilaa

(a)l-madrasa(ti) (a)l-yiwum(a) ءاج دلولا ىلإ ةسردملا مويلا

The short vowels between brackets are not pronounced unless they are followed by other

sounds – this keeps the last letters as still letters. Long vowels, however, must be pronounced –

this is because long vowels are letters. The feminine taa’ marbuwTa ة has its own comparable

rule. If one stops on the taa’ marbuwTa, it will become –a or –ah rather than –at. If one continues

speaking after it, one should fully pronounce it. Although the rule for ة- is not obligatory, it is so

widely observed that almost nobody today stops on a fully pronouned –at.


Nunation

Nunation (or tanuwyin نيونتلا) is the adding of a letter noon ن to the end of a noun. The main

purpose of nunation is to confer the sense of “indefiniteness” on the noun or to make the noun in

the “indefinite state.” Nunation used to appear in writing as a letter noon ن at the end of singular

nouns, but grammarians decided long ago that it was better not to write it to avoid confusion.

They agreed instead to indicate it by doubling the mark of the case-sign – or the “move” (the

short vowel) – on the last letter.

Definite State the male cate al-qiTT(u) طقلا

Indefinite State a male cate qiTT(un) طق

Definite State the female cate al-qiTTat(u) ةطقلا

Indefinite State a female cate qiTTa(tun) ةطق

Example of different cases.

Case-Sign Case Noun

Estimated Short u ar-raf”(u) wualad(un) دلو

Apparent Short a an-naSb(u) wualada(n) ادلو

Estimated Short i al-jarr(u) wualad(in) دلو

“Estimated” means to Arabic grammarians “assumed” or “supposed.”

The –an version of nunation will be followed by an extended ‘alef ا in writing. When

stopping on this particular nunation, it will be pronounced –aa instead of totally disappearing

from pronunciation like the other two types of nunation. The –un and –in nunations will not be

pronounced at all when one stops at them – similar to the rule of not stopping on a moving letter.

Most speakers of formal Arabic today do not change –an to –aa when they stop at it – rather it is

usually kept a pronounced –an. It might be said that this rule is a classical Arabic rule that is not a

rule anymore in modern standard Arabic.

The –an nunation after a feminine taa’ marbuwTah ة will not be followed by an extended

‘alef ا in writing, but the pronunciation rules are the same.

a school (f.) madrasata(n) ةسردم

a young woman (f.) fataata(n) ةاتف

A marked difference from English about the indefinite marker is that all nouns in Arabic can

take it – whether singular, dual or plural. Dual and plural masculine nouns have inherenet

nunation in their structures. The nunation for these two types of words stands out with three

characteristics:

It is written down as a letter noon ن at the end of the word.

It is always pronounced – whether one stops on it or not.

It does not disappear with the presence of the definite article.


Indefinite State two children (m) wualadaan(i) نادلو

Definite State the two children (m) al-wualadaan(i) نادلولا

Indfinite State teachers (m.) mu”allimuwn(a) نوملعم

Definite State the teachers (m) al-mu”allimuwn(a) نوملعملا

Nunation for feminine and irregular plural nouns is just like that of singular nouns.

Definite State teachers (f.) mu”allimaat(un) تاملعم

Indefinite State the teachers (f.) al-mu”allimaat(u) تاملعملا

Definite State children (m) ‘awulaad(un) دالوأ

Indefinite State the children (m.) al-‘awulaad(u) دالوألا

Nunation does not always indicate indefiniteness. Nunation is used with people’s proper

names and those are always definite nouns. This is just one of the peculiarities of Arabic.

Muhammad muHammad(un) دمحم

Ali “aliy(un) يلع

However, proper names do not take the definite article al- -لا – except if it was part of the

name itself. Proper names of places, rivers, etc., can sometimes take nunation but not always –

because nunation is not used for proper names of foreign origin that have more than three letters.

Nouns that are the first part of a genitive construction – or in other words, nouns that are in

the construct state – are always definite nouns and do not take nunation. The only definite

singular nouns that take nunation are usually people’s first names.

Shortened Nouns

Shortened nouns are nouns that end with a shortened ‘alef ا / ى. These nouns will always take

the –an nunation – and in all cases. When adding the nunation to a shortened noun it will be

placed on the letter preceding the final shortened ‘alef, not on the ‘alef itself.

fataa ىتف a lad (m.)

Case-Sign Case Noun

Estimated Short u ar-raf”(u) fataa(n) ىتف

Apparent Short a an-naSb(u) fataa(n) ىتف

Estimated Short i al-jarr(u) fataa(n) ىتف


Extended Nouns

Extended nouns are nouns that end with a long vowel ‘alef ا -aa that is followed by a

consonant ‘alef hamza ء. Extended nouns will take nunation just like regular nouns—except that

when one adds nunation one would not add an extended a’lef after it in writing. However, the

pronunciation rules remain the same as those of the regular singular nouns.

ma’ ءام a water (m.)

Case-Sign Case Noun

Estimated Short u ar-raf”(u) maa’(un) ءام

Apparent Short a an-naSb(u) maa’a(n) ءام

Estimated Short i al-jarr(u) maa’(in) ءام

There is no distinction in Arabic when it comes to countable and uncountable singular

nouns – they are all singular nouns.

Defective Nouns

Defective nouns are nouns that end with a long vowel –y ي which belongs to the root. When

adding nunation to a defective noun, the final –y must be deleted in both writing and

pronunciation – except in the accusative case. The added nunation will always be –in (except in

the accusative).

qaaD ضاق a judge (m.)

Case-Sign Case Noun

Estimated Short u ar-raf”(u) qaaD(in) ضاق

Apparent Short a an-naSb(u) qaaDiya(n) ضاق

Estimated Short i al-jarr(u) qaaD(in) ضاق

Case-Endings of Nouns in the Indefinite State

Noun Nominative Accusative Genitive

RE

GU

LA

R

Singular -un -an -in

Dual -aan -ayn -ayn

Masculine Plural -wn -yn -yn

Feminine Plural -un -in -in

Irregular Plural -un -an -in

IRR

EG

UL

AR

Shortened -n -n -n

Extended -un -an -in

Defective -in -an -in


When to Use Nunation

Nunation must be added to every indefinite noun. The only definite nouns that will take

nunation are first names of people and some rare names of places, rivers, etc. The definite nouns

in Arabic are:

Proper names – names of people, places, etc.

Pronouns and demonstratives

Nouns preceded by the definite article al- لا

Nouns forming the first part of a genitive construction

Nouns in the vocative case

The noon ن of the dual and mascular plural nouns will always be there, except in one

condition – when the noun is the first part of a genitive construction. In this case the noon ن will

be deleted just like any nunation.

There is a category of irregular nouns that is called the “forbidden to nunation.” These nouns

will not take nunation – even if they were indefinite. Most names of places, rivers, etc., are

forbidden to nunation. Any proper name of non-Arabic origin that have more than three letters is

forbidden to nunation. Proper names of unknown Arabic origins include most of the names of

towns and geographical features – even in Arabia itself. This is why nunation happens only with

first names of people but not with other proper nouns, in general – because most of those are

forbidden to nunation. Of course, first names have to be of known Arabic origin in order to be

nunated.


V. ADJECTIVES

Adjectives in Arabic follow the nouns or pronouns they modify in gender, number,

grammatical case, and the state of definiteness. They always come after the words they modify.

Adjectives in Arabic belong to the “noun” category and there are several types of nouns that can

serve as adjectives. These will be covered later.

This is a list of adjectives matching the modified word.

mu”allim(un) ملعم

a teacher (m.)

jayyid(un) ديج

a good (sing., m. adj.)

mu”allim(un) jayyid(un) ملعم ديج

a good teacher (m)

mu”allima(tun) jayyida(tun) ةملعم ةديج

a good teacher (f.)

al-mu”allim(u) (a)l-jayyid(u) ملعملا ديجلا

the good teacher (m.)

al-mu”allima(tu) (a)l-jayyida(tu) ةملعملا ةديجلا

the good teacher (f.)

mu”allimaan(i) jayyidaan(i) ناملعم ناديج

two good teachers (m.)

al-mu”allimaan(i) al-jayyidaan(i) ناملعملا ناديجلا

the two good teachers (m.)

mu”allimataan(i) jayyidataan(i) ناتملعم ناتديج

two good teachers (f.)

al-mu”allimataan(i) al-jayyidataan(i) ناتملعملا ناتديجلا

the two good teachers (f.)

mu”allimuwn(a) jayyiduwn(a) نوملعم نوديج

good teachers (m.)

al-mu”allimuwn(a) al-jayyiduwn(a) نوملعملا نوديجلا

the good teachers (m.)

mu”allimaat(un) jayyidaat(un) تاملعم تاديج

good teachers (f.)

al-mu”allimaat(u) al-jayyidaat(u) تاملعملا تاديجلا

The good teachers (f.)


Adjectives in general behave regularly. They are always feminized by adding one of the three

feminine markers to them; and they are always pluralized by adding one of the regular plural

endings to them – masculine or feminine. However, there are exceptions to this.

Feminine Adjectives

Feminine adjectives always have one of the three feminine markers attached. However, there

are a few structures that will not carry any such markers.

Case One: Adjectives that can be used only in reference to females but not males – such as

“pregnant” – do not usually have the feminine taa’ marbuwTah ة attached, even though they

modify true feminine nouns and that have a taa’ marbuwTah ة.

Meaning Literal Translation Phrase

a pregnant wife zawuja(tun) Haamil(un)

ةجوز لماحa wife a pregnant

a divorced woman ‘imra’a(tun) Taaliq(un)

ةارمإ قلاطa woman a divorced

Here the noun had a feminine marker but the modifying adjective did not. Other adjectives of this

kind include:

Female-Only Adjectives

a spinster “aanis(un) سناع

a barren “aaghir(un) رقاع

a nursing murDi”(un) عضرم

a menstruating Haa’iD(un) ضيإح

Taamith(un) ثماط

a virgin bikr(un) ركب

batuwl(un) لوتب

a widowed or a divorced thayyib(un) بيث

a rebellious (wife) naashiz(un) زشان

a large-breasted naahid(un) دهان

kaa”ib(un) بعاك

an aged menopausal qaa”id(un) دعاق

a prolific or lush wualuwd(un) دولو

a milch (cow) Haluwb(un) بولح


All of these adjectives lack the feminine taa’ marbuwTah ة. The other feminine markers – the

extended ‘alef ى and the shortened ‘alef أ – cannot be removed from an adjective in this case as

simply as the feminine taa’ marbuwTah, or the adjective will become a senseless word. If a

feminine adjective of this kind ends with either one of the two feminine markers other than the

feminine taa’ marbuwTah, it will be kept there because there will not usually be a masculine

form of that adjective – one without feminine markers – and one cannot just remove the marker

because that would be mutilation of the word.

a virgin “adraa’(u) ءاردع

a pregnant Hublaa ىلبح

Note: Nouns ending with feminine extended ‘alef or feminine shortened ’alef are

forbidden to nunation.

Case Two: Adjectives will not have any feminine markers when they assume one of the

following structures.

Example Type of Structure Structure

ghawur(un) لوعف active-participle-like fa”uwl(un) رويغ

a jealous …

qatiyl(un) ليعف passive participle fa”iyl(un) ليتق

a killed …

mi”Taa’(un) لاعف emphatic mif”aal(un) ءاطعم

a very giving …

Mi”Tiyr(un) ليعفم emphatic mifa”iyl(un) ريطعم

a very using of perfume …

“adl(un) لعف verbal noun fa”l(un) لدع

a just, fair …

Those five structures don’t take feminine endings when they modify feminine nouns. However,

case two is not always followed in the modern language.

Meaning Literal Tranlation Phrase

a jealous man rajul(un) ghayiwur(un)

لجر رويغa man a jealous

a jealous woman ‘imra’a(tun) ghayiwur(un)

ةأرمإ رويغa woman a jealous

a jealous woman

(Modern Arabic)

‘imra’a(tun) ghayiwura(tun) ةأرمإ ةرويغ

a woman a jealous

Another thing about the structures of case two is that they do not take regular plural endinds – as

will be covered later.


Plural Adjectives

In perfect Classical Arabic irregular plurals were not supposed to be used in adjectives.

Adjectives had to be pluralized only by adding the regular plural endings – masculine or

feminine. However, there are certain adjective structures in Arabic that ca not have the regular

plural endings when their nouns have it. Instead, they are pluraized irregularly. All of the

structures mentioned that don’t carry feminine markers cannot accept masculine plural endings as

well. However, the structure fa”uwl(un) لوعف is often pluralized regularly against the rule. Here

are the other structures that do not take regular plural endings.

‘af”al(u) لعفأ – Adjectives following this structure are of several kinds and they differ from

each other by the structure of the feminine form of the adjective. The kind that cannot take

regular plural endings is the one whose feminine form is af”aala’(u) ءالاعفأ. This kind belongs to

a category called in Arabic “active-participative-like adjectives.” It usually refers to a color or to

bodily characteristic (Form IX) – such as blond, burnette, blind, mute, deaf, lame, etc. Note: This

kind is forbidden to nunation, which means that it will not be nunated in addition to having an

irregular case-sign in the genitive case (-a instead of -i).

a red (s., m.) ‘aHmar(u) رمحأ

a red (s., f.) Hamaraa’(u) ءارمح

red (p., m./f.) Humr(un) رمح

a blond (s., m.) ‘ashqar(u) رقشأ

a blonde (s., f.) shaqraa’(u) ءارقش

blond (p., m./f.) shuqr(un) رقش

a blind (s., m.) ‘a”maa(u) ىمعأ

a blinde (s., f.) “amiyaa’(u) ءايمع

blind (p., m./f.) “umiy(un) يمع

However, it is rather common for the feminine form of this structure to be pluralized

regularly. The following three plural adjectives, for example, are common.

red (p., f.) Hamraawuaat(un) تاوارمح

blonde (p., f.) shabraawuaat(un) تاوارقش

blind (p., f.) “amiyaawuaat(un) تاوايمع

fa”laan(u) نالعف – Similarly to the previous one, adjectives following this structure are of two

kinds that differ by the structure of their feminine forms. The kind that cannot take the regular

plural ending is the one whose feminine structure is fa”laa العف – his kind is also forbidden to

nunation. The other kind has the feminine form fa”laana(tun) ةنالعف and is rarer. There are 13

fa’laan adjectives in Arabic that are feminized as fa”laana(tun) ةنالعف instead of fa”laa العف – those

are not forbidden to nunation.


a thirsty (s., m.) “aTshaan(u) ناشطع

a thirsty (s., f.) “aTshaa ىشطع

a thirsty (p., m./f.) “iTaash(un) شاطع

Comparative Structure

‘af”al(u) لعفأ adjectives that refer to colors and to bodily characteristics were discussed

previously. This same structure is also the comparative structure in Arabic. However, when it is

being a comparative structure it will have a different feminine form from the one mentioned

previously. The feminine of the comparative ‘af”al(u) is fu”alaa العف. Nevertheless, fu”alaa is not

a comparative structure but is a superlative structure – even though it is the feminine of

comparative ‘af”al(u). The comparative structure in Arabic is only one – ‘af”al(u) – and it is

used for both masculine and feminine and singular and plural nouns. This will be covered in more

detail later. The important point here is that comparative adjectives in Arabic do not follow their

nouns either in gender or in number.

Plural Masculine Adjective Singular Masculine Adjective

‘afDal(u) = a better لضفأ ‘afDal(u) = a better لضفأ

‘akbar(u) = a bigger ربكأ ‘akbar(u) = a bigger ربكأ

Plural Feminine Adjective Singular Feminine Adjective

‘afDal(u) = a better لضفأ ‘afDal(u) = a better لضفأ

‘akbar(u) = a better ربكأ ‘akbar(u) = a better ربكأ

Note: All ‘af”al(u) لعفأ structures are forbidden to nunation except for ones whose feminine

form is ‘af”ala(tun) ةلعفأ. Those are rare and are not comparatives – such as ‘armal(u) لمرأ “a

widow” and ‘arbagh(u) غبرا “a pleasant.”

Meaning Literal Translation Phrase

a better assistant (m.) musaa”id(un) ‘afDal(u) دعاسم لضفأ

a better assistant (f.) musaa”ida(tun) ‘afDal(u) ةدعاسم لضفأ

two better assistants (m.) musaa”idaan(i) ‘afDal(u) نادعاسم لضفأ

two better assistants (f.) musaa”idataan(i) ‘afDal(u) ناتدعاسم لضفأ

better assistants (m.) musaa”iduwnd(a) ‘afDal(u) نودعاسم لضفأ

better assistants (f.) musaa”idaa(tun) ‘afDal(u) تادعاسم لضفأ


Adjective Irregularities in Arabic

Structure Plural Matching of Noun Nunation

Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem Irreg Gender Number

Adjectives that can refer only to

females (such as “pregnant”) No Yes

Yes No Yes Yes

fa”uwl(un) Yes Yes

active-participle-like

fa”iyl(un)

No No passive participle

mif”aal(un)

Emphatic

mif”iyl(un)

No No

Yes

No Yes Yes Emphatic

fa”l(un)

verbal noun

‘af”al(u) fa”laa’(u) No Yes Yes Yes

No active-participle-like

‘af”al(u) fa”laa Yes Yes

Masc Fem Masc Fem

comparative superlative No Yes No Yes

Structure Plural Matching of Noun Nunation

Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem Gender Number

‘af”al(un) ‘af”atal(tun) Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes active-participle-like

fa”laan(u) fa”laa No No No


fa”laan(un) fa”laana(tun) Yes Yes Yes


Other Irregular Plural Adjectives

Other than the exceptions mentioned previously, irregular plural structures were not suppoed

to be used to form adjectives in proper Classical Arabic. However, this has always been widely

ignored and irregular plural adjectives are used in many other kinds of adjectives. There is one

main case – other than the ones mentioned previously – in which it is considered acceptable to

use an irregular plural adjective. That case is if the irregular plural adjective were of the following

structure.


Plural Singular

mafaa”iyl(u) ليعافم maf”uwl(un) لوعفم

The singular of this structure is a passive participle noun; the plural is forbidden to nunation.

When possible, this structure can be used instead of regular plurals – but it is not better than them.

Meaning Plural Singular

a famed (famous) روهشم ريهاشم

mashiyhiyr(u) mashhuwr(un)

an imprisoned نوجسم نيجاسم

masaajiyn(u) masjuwn(un)

Adjectives Modifying Irregular Plural Nouns

As mentioned previously, the gender of an irregular plural noun will not always match the

gender of its singular word.

Grammatical Treatment of Irregular Plurals

Reference Gender Number

to persons matches the gender of the referents plural

to persons (classical) feminine singular

to objects or animals feminine singular

It was also mentioned that irregular plurals that refer to objects or animals are always treated

as if they were singular words. Knowing these facts it should be clear how the adjectives were

used in the following examples.

Singular

a mountain (m.) jabal(un) لبج

a lofty (m.) shaahiq(un) قهاش

a lofty mountain jabal(un) shaahiq(un) لبج قهاش

Plural

mountains (f.) jibaal(un) لابج

a lofty (s., f.) shaahiqa(tun) ةقهاش

lofty mountains jibaal(un) shaahiqa(tun) لابج ةقهاش

More examples are constructed as follows.


Singular Adjectives Singular Nouns

fathth(un) ذف

rajul(un) لجر

a unique (m.) a man (m.)

Hakiym(un) ميكح

mawuaqif(un) فقوم

a wise (m.) a stance (m.)

TaaHin(un) نحاط

ma”raka(tun) ةكرعم

a crushing (m.) a battle (f.)

‘afthaath(un) ذاذقأ

rijaal(un) لاجر

unique (m.) men (m.)

Suitable Adjectives Plural Nouns

Hakiyma(tun) ةميكح

mawuaaqif(u) فقاوم

wise (s., f) stances (f.)

TaaHina(tun) ةنحاط

ma”aarik(u) كراعم

crushing (s., f.) battles (f.)

Meaning Phrase

unique men rijaal(un) ‘afthaath(un) لاجر ذاذقأ

wise stances mawuaaqif(u) Hakiyma(tun) فقاوم ةميكح

crushing battles ma”aarik(u) TaaHina(tun) مكراع ةنحاط

Note: فقاوم and كراعم are both “forbidden to nunation” structures.

Multiple Adjectives

Adjectives that modify a single noun can be multiple.

لجر ليوط ليحن

rajul(un) Tawuuyil(un) naHiyl(un)

= a man a tall a thin

translation: a thin tall man

ناتاتف ناتبيط ناتليمج يكذنات

fataataan(i) Tayyibataan(i) jamiylataan(i) thakiyyataan(i)

= two young girls good beautiful smart

translation: two good, smart, beautiful young girls

It is also possible to use coordinators between the different adjectives, but they must be

placed between all the adjectives – not only before the last one.


ناتاتف ناتبيط ناتليمج ناتيكذ

fataataan(i) Tayyibataan(i) wa-jamiylataan(i) wa-thakiyyataan(i)

= two young girls good beautiful smart

translation: two good, smart, beautiful young girls

Adjectives as Nouns

Again, adjectives in Arabic are nouns. This is not only an issue of how we categorize them –

adjectives can function as real nouns in Arabic sentences.

اذه يكذ

haathaa thakiyy(un)

= this (is) a clever (s., m.)

translation: this is a clever man

This sentence is not complete in English because it lacks a noun; but in Arabic it is a full

perfect sentence. This is because an adjective in Arabic has a normal nature in and of itself, and it

will not necessarily require another noun to complete its meaning.

هذه ةيكذ

haazih(i) thakiyya(tun)

= this (is) a clever (s., f.)

translation: this is a clever woman

ءاينعا اومدق ىلإ ةدلبلا

‘aghniyaa’(un) qadimwu ‘ilaa (a)l-balda(ti)

= rich (p., m.) came to the town

translation: rich people came to town

In an English sentence there is “the door of the house” – another way to say the same thing is

“the house’s door” or “the house-door.” This is the genitive construction, which expresses a

relationship of possession between two parts of the construction. In formal Arabic, there is not a

possessive preposition like “of” or any other possessive articles. The only way to say that

sentence is by virtue of the “construct state” of nouns and the genitive case.

Meaning Phrase

door of a house baab(u) manzil(in)

باب نملزdoor a house

the door of the house baab(u) (a)l- manzil(i)

باب لزنملاdoor the house


window of a house naafitha(tu) manzil(in)

ةذفان لزنمwindow a house

the wondow of the house naafitha(tu) (a)l-manzil(i)

ةذفان لزنملاwindow the house

Every one of these phrases is a genitive construction. Two things can be noted about these

constructions:

The first noun in each construction has neither a definite article nor an

indefinite declension

The seconds nouns are in the genitive case instead of the regular nominative

case

These two notes are the components of any genitive construction in Arabic. The fact that the

first noun does not have a definite article attached (that is, was not in the definite case) nor does it

have an indefeinite declension attached (that is, was not in the indefinite case) leaves a new state

for nouns in Arabic. This is what is called the “construct state” of nouns – or the state of

“addition” in Arabic terminology.

The construct state exists in many Semitic languages. Whereas this state can mean

considerable changes to the noun structure in languages such as Hebrew and Syriac, in Arabic

there is not really that much change – just no definite article before nor nunation at the end of

nouns. The nunation must be removed even from the dual and masculine plural endings if the

noun has either of them.

Meaning of the Construct State

When a noun is in the construct state, it will have neither a definite nor an indefinite marker.

However, it will always be a definite noun—even if there were no definite article attached. Think

of it as if there were a hidden definite article before the noun. The definiteness of the construct

state is so strict that even the final noon ن of the dual and the masculine plural endings will be

removed in this state—and this is the only case in Arabic where this happens to those two. The

second point is that changing a noun to the construct state will always impant a hidden possessive

“of” after the noun. This is the main point of the construct state anyway. So a noun in construct

will be like this—(the noun (of).

States of Nouns in the Nominative Case

SIN

GU

LA

R

Indefinite State Definite State Construct State

ملعم ملعملا ملعم

mu”allimun al-mu’allimu mu”allimu

a teacher (m.) the teacher (m.) (the) teacher (of) (m.)

ةملعم ةملعملا ةملعم

mu”allimatun al-mu’allimatu mu”allimatu

a teacher (f.) the teacher (f.) (the) teacher (of) (f.)



DU

AL

املعم ناملعملا ناملعم

mu”allimaani al-mu’allimaani mu”allimaa

two teachers (m.) the two teachers (m.) (the) two teachers (of) (m.)

اتملعم ناتملعملا ناتملعم

mu”allimataani al-mu’allimataani mu”allimataa

two teachers (f.) the two teachers (f.) (the) two teachers (of) (f.)

PL

UR

AL

اوملعم نوملعملا نوملعم

mu”allimuwna al-mu’allimuwna mu”allimuw

the teachers (m.) the the teachers (m.) (the) teachers (of) (m.)

تاملعم تاملعملا تاملعم

mu”allimaatun al-mu’allimaaatu mu”allimaatu

the teachers (f.) the teachers (f.) (the) teachers (of) (f.)

States of Nouns in the Accusative Case

SIN

GU

LA

R


ملعم ملعملا املعم

mu”allimayni al-mu’allimayni mu”allimay



mu”allimatan al-mu’allimata mu”allimata


DU

AL

يملعم نيملعملا نيملعم



يتملعم نيتملعملا نيتملعم

mu”allimatayni al-mu’allimatayni mu”allimatay



PL

UR

AL


mu”allimiyna al-mu’allimiyna mu”allimiy




mu”allimaatin al-mu’allimaaati mu”allimaati


States of Nouns in the Genitive Case

SIN

GU

LA

R


ملعم ملعملا ملعم

mu”allimin al-mu’allimi mu”allimi



mu”allimatin al-mu’allimati mu”allimati


DU

AL




يتملعم نيتملعملا نيتملعم

mu”allimatayni al-mu’allimatayni mu”allimatay


PL

UR

AL


mu”allimiyna al-mu’allimiyna mu”allimiy



mu”allimaatin al-mu’allimaaati mu”allimaati


The Second Part of the Genitive Construction

The part of the sentence before the hidden “of” is the first part of the genitive construction. It

can be a noun in the construct state or it can be a phrase – such as “the first two pages of the

book.” The first part of the genitive construction is called in Arabic “the added;” the second part

of the construction is the part after “of” and is called in Arabic “the added to.” The second part of

the genitive construction must always be in the genitive case. The second part of the construction

will not be in the construct state nor will it have anything to do with it – it will either be in the

definite or the indefinite state, just as usual.


two teachers (m.)

(first part)

mu”allimaan(i) ناملعم

a class

(second part)

Saff(un) فص

the two teachers of a class (m.) mu”allimaan Saff(in) املعم فص

two teachers (f.)

(first part)

mu”allimataan(i) ناتملعم

a class

(second part)

Saff(un) فص

the two teachers of a class (f.) mu”allimataa Saaf(in) اتملعم فص

the teachers

(first part)

al-mu”allimaan(a) نوملعملا

the class

(second part)

aS-Saff(u) فصلا

the teachers of the class mu”allimuw (a)S-Saff(i) اوملعم فصلا

The ‘alef ا after the waaw و in اوملعم is silent.

More examples in which the first part is in other cases.

(I saw) the two teachers of the class

(m.)

mu”allimay (a)S-Saff(i) يملعم فصلا

(I saw) the two teachers of the class

(f.)

mu”allimatay (a)S-Saff(i) يتملعم فصلا

(I saw) the teachers oif the class (m.) mu”allimiy (a)S-Saff(i) لعميم فصلا

Examples on proper nouns.

Meaning Literal Translation Gentive Construction

Ali’s book kitaab(u) “aliyy(in)

باتك يلع(the) book (of) Ali

Airport of Damascus maTaar(u) dimashq(a)

راطم قشمد(the) airport (of) Damascus

Damashq (Damascus) قشمد is a “forbidden to nunation” word, so it has an irregular case sign

in the genitive case (-a) in addition to never taking nunation. Proper names are always definite

and don’t take al- لا before them. However, as mentioned before, first names of people and some

other proper nouns take nunation – even though they are definite.


Possessive Pronouns

Possessive pronouns such as “my” and “your” do not exist in Arabic – nor do ones such as

“mine” and “yours.” To say in Arabic that something is yours, one would use the genitive

construction described previously and say “(the) thing (of) me.” To say “your book and his book”

one would say “(the) book (of) you and (the) book (of) him.” This will be explained more fully

later.

“A” Thing of a Thing

A final issue about the genitive construction is how the following sentence is translated into

Arabic – “a door of a house.” It is impossible in Arabic for the first part of a gentive construction

to be indefinite. Thus, this kind of sentence is usually translated as follows into Atrabic.

باب لزنم

baab(u) manzil(in)

(the) door (of) a house

There is not really that much difference between the two. However, if one was insisting on

having the first part indefinite, there is one trick that could be used – to use a preposition other

than the hidden “of” of the genitive construction. Usually that would be the particle li- -ل “for/to.”

باب لزنمل

baab(un) li-manzil(in)

a door (of) a house

This is not a genitive construction. The word li- -ل is in the ablative case – which is the same

in Arabic as the gentive case.


VI. VERBS

Am / Is / Are Sentences

Every sentence in English requires a verb. One has to use at least one verb to make any

complete, meaningful sentence in English. In Arabic and Semitic languages it is also the same –

but for one exception. If in an English sentence one has the present tense that contains the verb

“to be,” the Arabic equivalent will not contain a “be” verb. In fact, it will not contain any verb at

all. Thus, there can be full sentences in Arabic that do not have any verbs. The verbless sentences

will be those like “Ahmed is here,” “they are in the room” and “where am I?” That is, sentences

containing “to be” verbs in the present tense.

ءامسلا ةيفاص

as-samaa’(u) Saafiya(tun)

= the sky (is) a clear (sky)

translation: the sky is clear

نوملعملا انه

al-mu”allimuyn(a) hunaa

= the teachers (are) here

translation: the teachers are hear

دمحم دعتسم

muHammad(un) musta”idd(un)

= Muhammad (is) a ready (man)

translation: Muhammad is ready

ىليل ةديعس

laylaa sa”iyda(tun)

= Layla (is) a happy (woman)

translation: Layla is happy

تنأ صخش بيط

‘ant(a) shakhS(un) Tayyib(un)

= you (are) a person a kind

translation: you are a kind person

Remember that an adjective has to follow its noun in everything – including the state of

definiteness.

نيأ مه

‘ayn(a) hum

= where (are) they

translation: where are they?


All these sentences belong to the category that is called in Arabic “nominal sentences”; those

are the sentences which begin with a noun word. The part of the sentence that is before the hidden

“be” – that is, the subject – is called “the start.”; the part after the “be” is the predicate.

Multiple Predicates

One “starter” can have multiple predicates.

اذاه وه فيرشلا ليبنلا ميركلا

haathaa huw(a) (a)sh-shareef(u) (a)n-nabiyl(u) (a)l-kariym(u)

= this he (is) the honest the nobel the generous

translation: this is an honest, noble, generous man

huw(a) وه “he” is a redundant pronoun. Employing subject pronouns before the predicate in this

manner will be covered in the pronoun section.

“Coordinators” may be used between the different predicates.

اذاه وه فيرشلا و ليبنلا و ميركلا

haathaa huw(a) (a)sh-shareef(u) wa-(a)n-nabiyl(u) wa-(a)l-kariym(u)

= this he (is) the honest and the nobel and the generous

translation: this is a very honest, noble, generous man

The coordinators must be placed between the predicates – not only before the last one. Note

that the verb “to be” will show up in the past and future tenses; it will be just like English in these

tenses. Thus we have covered the only case of verbless sentences in Arabic.

Tenses

Past (perfective)

Present (imperfective)

Future (imperfective)

The major two verb structures in Arabic are the perfective and the imperfective. The present

and future tenses will both use the same structure – the imperfective – while for the past tense the

perfective structure is used. Arabic verbs also can have four different moods. Three of these – the

indicative, the subjunctive and the jussive – share on structure. The differences between them are

only in the different declensions that can be added to the same structure. The fourth mood – the

imperative – has its own distinct “built” structure.


Past Tense

Past tense in English has at least four different aspects.

Simple Past He did

Perfect Past He had done

Progrssive Past He was doing

Perfect Progressive Past He had been doing

In Arabic, the perfective verb, which is used the express the simple past, is always used to

express the perfect aspect – whether in the past, present or future tenses. The progressive aspect,

on the other hand, is always expressed by employing the imperfective verb – even in the past

tense. However, the perfect progressive aspect is not really present in Arabic.

Most verbs in Arabic have roots that consist of three letters. Some verbs have roots of four

letters, but there are no verbs that have more than four letters to their roots. Without the

employment of additional letters, three-letter roots can be structured in three different ways to

give different perfective verbs. With the additional letters there is a total of 12 possible, different

structures for the perfective verbs. Four-letter roots are structured in six different structures to

give different perfective verbs.

Structures of Arabic Verbs

(3rd

Person Masc. Sing. Perfective)

Example Structure – (He) Did

Triliteral Root

No Additional

Letters

jalas(s) لعف fa”al(a) سلج

sat

Hasib(a) لعف fa”il(a) بسح

thought

Saghur(a) لعف fa”ul(a) رغص

became smaller

Triliteral Root

One Additional

Letter

‘akram(a) لعفأ af”al(a)‘ مركأ

dignified

“allam(a) لعف fa””al(a) ملع

taught

qaatal(a) لعاف faa”al(a) لتاق

fought



Triliteral Root

No Additional

Letters

jalas(s) لعف fa”al(a) سلج

sat

Hasib(a) لعف fa”il(a) بسح

thought

Saghur(a) لعف fa”ul(a) رغص

became smaller

Triliteral Root

One Additional

Letter

‘akram(a) لعفأ af”al(a)‘ مركأ

dignified

“allam(a) لعف fa””al(a) ملع

taught

qaatal(a) لعاف faa”al(a) لتاق

fought

Triliteral Root

Two Additional

Letters

‘inHaaz(a) لعفنإ infa”al(a)‘ زاحنإ

took aside

‘rtabak(a) لعتفإ ifta”al(a)‘ كبترإ

became disconcerted

‘iHmarr(a) لعفإ if”all(a)‘ رمحإ

reddened

ta’akhkhar(a) لعفت tafa””al(a) رخات

was late

tasaa’al(a) لعافت tafaa”al(a) لءاست

Wondered



Triliteral Root

Two Additional

Letters

‘inHaaz(a) لعفنإ infa”al(a)‘ زاحنإ

took aside

‘rtabak(a) لعتفإ ifta”al(a)‘ كبترإ

became disconcerted

‘iHmarr(a) لعفإ if”all(a)‘ رمحإ

reddened

ta’akhkhar(a) لعفت tafa””al(a) رخات

was late

tasaa’al(a) لعافت tafaa”al(a) لءاست

Wondered

Triliteral Root

Three Additional

Letters

‘ista”mal(a) لعفتسإ istaf”al(a)‘ لمعتسإ

used

‘ikhshawshan(a) لعوعفإ if”aw”al(a)‘ نشوشخإ

roughened

‘ijlawwath(a) لوعفإ if”awwal(a)‘ ذولجإ

hurried (for camles)

‘iHmaarr(a) لافإ if”aall(a)‘ رامحإ

reddened so much

‘iq”ansas(a) للنعفإ if”anlal(a)‘ سسنعقإ

became hunchbacked

‘islanqaa(a) ىلنعفإ if”anlaa(a)‘ ىقنلسإ

lied down



Quadriliteral

Root

No Additional

Letters

ba”thar(a) للعف fa”lal(a) رثعب

scattered

Hawqal(a) لعوف faw”al(a) لقوح

became independent

rahwal(a) لوعف fa”wal(a) لوهر

Hurried

bayTar(a) لعيف fay”al(a) رطيب

treated (an animal)

sharfaf(a) ليعف fa”yal(a) فيرش

cut

salqaa(a) عفىل fa”laa(a) ىقلس

lied down

qalnas(a) لنعف fa”nal(a) سنلق

put a cap (on someone)

Quadriliteral

Root

One Additional

Letter

tadaHraj(a) للعفت tafa”lal(a) جرحدت

rolled

tashanTan(a) لعيفت tafay”al(a) نطيشت

behaved badly

tasalqaa(a) ىلعفت tafa”laa(a) ىقلست

lied down

taqalnas(a) لنعفت tafa”nal(a) سنلقت

wore a cap

tajawtab(a) لعوفت tafaw”al(a) بتوجت

wore socks

tamaskan(a) لعفمت tamaf”al(a) نكسمت

acted pitiful

tajalbab(a) للعفت tafa”lal(a) ببلجت

wore a djellaba

Quadriliteral

Root

Two Additional

Letters

‘iHranjam(a) للنعفإ if”anlal(a)‘ مجنرحإ

congregated (for camels)

‘iTma’ann(a) للعفإ if”alall(a)‘ نأمطإ

became unworried


All perfective verbs are “built” verbs. That is, they have only one possible mood and the ends

of the verbs never change. The third person, masculine, singular perfective – which is the source

of all other verbs – always ends in a short vowel -a fatHa at their end. The third person,

masculine, singular perfective verb will be conjugated to obtain other forms. The following is the

conjugation scheme for the structure fa”al(a) لعف. The conjugation technique is the same for all

the perfective structures.

Root ف ع ل / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) did fa”alt(u) تلعف

(you) did (m.) fa”alt(a) تلعف

(you) did (f.) fa”alti تلعف

(he) did fa”al(a) لعف

(she) did fa”alat تلعف

DU

AL

(you) did fa”altumaa امتلعف

(they) did (m.) fa”alaa العف

(they) did (f.) fa”alataa اتلعف

PL

UR

AL

(we) did (dual/pural) fa”alnaa انلعف

(you) did (m.) fa”altum متلعف

(you) did (f.) fa”altunn(a) نتلعف

(they) did (m.) fa”altwu * اولعف

(they) did (f.) fa”aln(a) نلعف

* The ‘alef ا in -wu او- is silent.

So the idea is that one has to attach an ending to the third person, masculine, singular

perfective of the verb – which depends on the subject. One has to delete the final short vowel

before attaching the ending. Those endings contain paricles that are considered subject pronouns

in Arabic grammar – these are called “attached subject pronouns” to differentiate them from the

“separate subject pronouns.” The verbs that don’t take attached subject pronouns are the third

person singulars. The ending of the third person, feminine, singular perfective is called “still

feminine taa’” and it is not a subject pronoun.

fa”al(a) لعف : “araf(a) فرع “knew” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) knew “araft(u) تفرع

(you) knew (m.) “araft(a) تفرع

(you) knew (f.) “arafti تفرع

(he) knew “araf(a) فرع

(she) knew “arafat تفرع

DU

AL

(you) knew “araftumaa امتفرع

(they) knew (m.) “arafaa افرع

(they) knew (f.) “arafataa اتفرع


PL

UR

AL

(we) knew (dual/pural) “arafnaa انفرع

(you) knew (m.) “araftum متفرع

(you) knew (f.) “araftunn(a) نتفرع

(they) knew (m.) “araftwu اوفرع

(they) knew (f.) “arafn(a) نفرع

Next are examples for all the perfective structures.

Conjugated Example Structure

We sat لعف سلج انسلج

jalasnaa jalas(a)

I thought لعف بسح تبسح

Hasibt(u) Hasib(a)

She / it became smaller لعف رغص ترغص

Saghurat Saghur(a)

They dignified (m.) لعفأ مركأ اومركأ

‘akramwu ‘akram(a)

You taught (dual) لعف ملع امتملع

“allamtumaa ‘allam(a)

They fought (dual, m.) لعاف لتاق التاق

qaatalaa qaatal(a)

She / it exploded لعفنإ رجفنإ ترجفنإ

‘infajarat ‘infajar(a)

They became disconcerted (f.) لعتفإ كبترإ نكبترإ

‘irtabakn(a) ‘irtabak(a)

You reddened up (m.) لعفإ رمحإ تررمحإ

‘iHmarart(a) ‘iHmarr(a)

They were late (dual, f.) لعفت رخات اترخات

ta’akhkharataa ta’akhkhar(a)

You wondered (m.) لعافت لءاست متلءاست

tasaa’altum tasaa’al(a)

We used لمعتسإ انلمعتسإ

لعفتسإ

‘ista”malnaa ‘ista”mal(a)


Conjugated Example Structure

You scattered (f.) رثعب ترثعب

للعف

ba”tharti ba”thar(a)

They rolled (dual, m.) جرحدت اجرحدت

للعفت

tadaHrajaa tadaHraj(a)

You behaved badly (m.) نطيشت تنطيشت

لعيفت

tashayTant(a) tashayTan(a)

They acted pitiful (m.) نكسمت اونكسمت

لعفمت

tamaskanwu tamaskan(a)

I became unworried نامطإ تننامطإ

للعفإ

‘iTma’nant(u) ‘Tma’ann(a)

Doubled Verbs

Doubled verbs are verbs that have identical second and third root letters. The shaddah of

doubled verbs must be “untied” with certain declensions. Untying happens by inserting a short

vowel a (fatHa) between the two identical letters under the shaddah.

marr(a) رم “passed”

marr(a) رم

marrt(u) ترم

marart(u) تررم

The reason behind this change is to prevent two still letters from directly following each other –

the two raa’s ر. This is an important law in the Arabic language.

fa”al(a) لعف : “araf(a) رم “passed” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) passed marart(u) تررم

(you) passed (m.) marart(a) تررم

(you) passed (f.) mararti تررم

(he) passed marr(a) رم

(she) passed marrat رمت

DU

AL

(you) passed marartumaa امتررم

(they) passed (m.) marraa ارم

(they) passed (f.) marrataa اترم


PL

UR

AL

(we) passed (dual/pural) mararnaa انررم

(you) passed (m.) marartum متررم

(you) passed (f.) marartunn(a) نتررم

(they) passed (m.) marrwu اورم

(they) passed (f.) mararn(a) نررم

The untying does not need to take place with the third person declensions – except with the plural

feminine third person declension, which is untied as well.

mithaal لاثم Verbs

mithaal verbs are verbs whose first original letter is a weak letter. mithaal verbs conjugate in

the past tense just like regular verbs.

Hollow Verbs

Hollow verbs are verbs that have a weak letter as the second original letter. For hollow verbs

whose weak letter is ‘alef ا (the fake ‘alef), the a’lef must be deleted when adding any declension

other than the third person declensions – not counting the third person feminine plural declension,

to which the rule still applies.

qaal(a) لاق “said”

qaalt(a) تلاق

qaalt(u) تلاق

qult(u) تلق

The reason behind this change is to prevent two still letters from directly following each other

– the ‘alef ا and the laam ل. This is the important rule of “stills don’t meet.” The deleted ‘alef was

replaced bythe short vowel u (Dumma) – determining this vowel is a problem in the verbs without

additional letters because there is no useful rule to depend on other than familiarizing oneself

with these verbs. However, if one was going to guess, the short vowel would often be the one that

corresponds to the middle letter of the root, as u (Dumma) corresponds to waaw و and i (kasra)

corresponds to yaa’ ي – but this rule does not always work right.

fa”al(a) لعف : qaal(a) لاق “said” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) said qult(u) تلق

(you) said (m.) qult(a) تلق

(you) said (f.) qulti تلق

(he) said qaal(a) لاق

(she) said qaalat تلاق


DU

AL

(you) said qultumaa امتلق

(they) said (m.) qaalaa الاق

(they) said (f.) qaalataa اتلاق

PL

UR

AL

(we) said (dual/pural) qulnaa انلق

(you) said (m.) qultum متلق

(you) said (f.) qultunn(a) نتلق

(they) said (m.) qaalwu اولاق

(they) said (f.) quln(a) نلق

Hollow verbs with more than three letters – verbs with additional letters – always take the

short vowel a (fatHa) instead of the extended ‘alef ى.

‘araad(a) دارأ “wanted”

‘araad(a) دارأ

‘araadt(u) تدارأ

‘aradt(u) تدرأ

‘af”al(a) لعفأ : ‘araad(a) دارأ “wanted” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) wanted ‘aradt(u) تدرأ

(you) wanted (m.) ‘aradt(a) تدرأ

(you) wanted (f.) ‘aradti تدرأ

(he) wanted ‘araad(a) دارأ

(she) wanted ‘araadat تدارأ

DU

AL

(you) wanted ‘aradtumaa امتدرأ

(they) wanted (m.) ‘araadaa ادارأ

(they) wanted (f.) ‘araadataa اتدارأ

PL

UR

AL

(we) wanted (dual/pural) ‘aradnaa اندرأ

(you) wanted (m.) ‘aradtum متدرأ

(you) wanted (f.) ‘aradtunn(a) نتدرأ

(they) wanted (m.) ‘araadwu اودارأ

(they) wanted (f.) ‘aradn(a) ندرأ


Defective Verbs

Defective verbs are verbs whose last original letter is a weak letter. Conjugating these verbs

correctly can be a bit tricky. When conjugating defective verbs without additional letters, the last

‘alef ا always must be changed back to the original weak letter. Fortunately, this is easy because

the figure of the last ‘alef ا tells its origin.

namaa امن “grew”

namaa امن

namaat(u) تامن

namawt(u) تومن

The last “revived” weak letter was preceded by a short a (fatHa). This short vowel will be a

for verbs which end with ‘alef ا or ى. For the other verbs it will often be u (Dumma) for verbs that

end in waaw و and i (kasra) for verbs that end in yaa’ ي. What is important here is that the extant

short vowel before the last weak letter will be preserved.

nasiy(a) يسن “forgot”

nasiy(a) يسن

nasiyu اويسن

naswu اوسن

naswu * اوسن

* Remember that a still weak letter preceded by a

corresponding short vowel must be a long vowel.

fa”al(a) لعف : namaa امن “grew” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) grew namawt(u) تومن

(you) grew (m.) namawt(a) تومن

(you) grew (f.) namawti تومن

(he) grew namaa امن

(she) grew namat تمن

DU

AL

(you) grew namawtumaa امتومن

(they) grew (m.) namawaa اومن

(they) grew (f.) namataa اتمن

PL

UR

AL

(we) grew (dual/pural) namawnaa انومن

(you) grew (m.) namwtum نمتوم

(you) grew (f.) namawtunn(a) نتومن

(they) grew (m.) namaw اومن

(they) grew (f.) namawn(a) نومن


fa”al(a) لعف : nasyi(a) يسن “forgot” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) forgot nasyit(u) تيسن

(you) forgot (m.) nasyit(a) تيسن

(you) forgot (f.) nasyiti تيسن

(he) forgot nasyi(a) يسن

(she) forgot nasat تيسن

DU

AL

(you) forgot nasyitumaa امتيسن

(they) forgot (m.) nasyiaa * ايسن

(they) forgot (f.) nasataa اتسن

PL

UR

AL

(we) forgot (dual/pural) nasyinaa تنيسن

(you) forgot (m.) nasyitum متيسن

(you) forgot (f.) nasyitunn(a) نتيسن

(they) forgot (m.) nasuw اوسن

(they) forgot (f.) nasyin(a) نيسن

* The y here was not still but rather followed by a long vowel. Therefore, it cannot be a long vowel.

Finally, it should be noted that for defective verbs with additional letters – verbs with more

than three letters – and which end in extended ‘alef’s ا, the origin of those extended a’lef’s is

always yaa’ ي. Those ‘alef’s always look like ى instead of ا – which should be a reminder.

Root Defective Verbs with Additional Letters

“ T y ع ط ي ‘ataa” “gave” ىطعأ

n h y ن ه ي ‘intahaa “finished” ىهتنإ

w l y و ل ي ‘istawlaa “captured” ىلوتسإ

Defective verbs with additional letters are common. Conjugating them is not different from others

with additional letters.

‘anfa”al(a) لعفنإ : ‘intahaa ىهتنإ “finished” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) finished ‘intahayt(u) تيسن

(you) finished (m.) ‘intahayt(a) تيسن

(you) finished (f.) ‘intahaytii تيسن

(he) finished ‘intahaa يسن

(she) finished ‘intahat تيسن

DU

AL

(you) finished ‘intahaytumaa امتيسن

(they) finished (m.) ‘intahayaa ايسن

(they) finished (f.) ‘intahataa اتسن


PL

UR

AL

(we) finished (dual/pural) ‘intahaynaa تنيسن

(you) finished (m.) ‘intahaytum متيسن

(you) finished (f.) ‘intahaytunn(a) نتيسن

(they) finished (m.) “intahaw اوسن

(they) finished (f.) ‘intahayn(a) نيسن

Enfolding Verbs

Enfolding verbs embrace the definitions of both mithaal and defective verbs. They have two

weak letters – one at the beginning and the other at the end of the root. These verbs get the

dealing of both mithaal and defective verbs. Since mithaal verbs conjugate regularly in the past

tense, conjugating the enfolding verbs is very much like conjugating defective verbs.

fa”al(a) لعف : wafaa ىفو “fulfilled” / Perfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) fulfilled wafayt(u) تيفو

(you) fulfilled (m.) wafayt(a) تيفو

(you) fulfilled (f.) wafayti تيفو

(he) fulfilled wafaa ىفو

(she) fulfilled wafat تفو

DU

AL

(you) fulfilled wafaytumaa امتيفو

(they) fulfilled (m.) wafayaa ايفو

(they) fulfilled (f.) wafataa اتفو

PL

UR

AL

(we) fulfilled (dual/pural) wafaynaa انيفو

(you) fulfilled (m.) wafaytum متيفو

(you) fulfilled (f.) wafaytunn(a) نتيفو

(they) fulfilled (m.) wafuw واوف

(they) fulfilled (f.) wafayn(a) نيفو

Meanings of Verb Structures

Adding additional letters to a trilateral verb confers a new meaning on the verb. Each verb

structure has its specific meaning. However, in real life it may not always be easy to identify the

general meaning of a structure with the beginning of a specific verb that belongs to that structure.


Example Meaning Structure

رسك

broke

did

(transitive or intransitive) fa”al(a) لعف

ملع

knew

did

(transitive or intransitive) fa”il(a) لعف

ربك

became (was) big(ger)

became (was) something

(intransitive) fa”ul(a) لعف

ملعأ

made known, informed

made do

(causitive) ‘af”al(a) لعفأ

ملع

made known, taught

made do

(causitive)

fa””al(a)

رسك لعف

broke

did intensely

(intensive)

لتاق

sought to kill, fought

sought to do

(conative)

faa”al(a)

لعاف

فعاض

doubled (augumentive)

رواح

exchanged talking with,

conversed

exchanged doing with

(reciprocative)

رسكنإ

broke itself, broke

did himself

(reflexive) ‘infa”al(a) لعفنأ

عمتجإ

gathered himself, met

did himself

(reflexive) ‘ifta”al(a) لعتفإ

رمحإ

became red, reddened

became “color”

(denotes color)

‘if”all(a)

روعإ لعفإ

became blind

became “defect”

(denotes bodily defect)

رسكت

broke himself intensely,

broke

did himself intensely

(intensive reflexive)

tafa”al(a)

لعفت

عجشت

pretended to be brave, was

encouraged

Pretended to be

(afectation)


Example Meaning Structure

نواعت

exchanged aiding with,

cooperated

exchanged doing with

(reciprocative)

tafaa”al(a)

لعافت

ضرامت

pretended to be ill

pretended to be

(pretension)

ملستسإ

asked for safety,

surrendered

asked for

(request)

‘istaf”al(a)

لعفتسإ

تلجرتسإ

(she) became a man,

virilized

became something

(transformation)

جرحد

rolled

did

(transitive or intransitive) fa”lal(a) للعف

ببلجت

wore a djellaba (reflexive) tafa”lal(a) للعفت

نطيشت

made himself devil,

misbehaved

(reflexive) tafay”al(a) لعيفت

نكسمت

made himself pitiful (reflexive) tamaf”al(a) لعفمت

نأمطإ

made himself reassured,

was reassured

(reflexive) ‘if”alall(a) للعفإ

It should be noted that all of these structures are active verbs – although the reflexive

structures can overlap in meaning with the passive. Each one of these structures has a passive

voice version, which will be covered later.

Tenses for the Perfectve Verb

The perfective structure is used to express different tenses in the following manner. Note that

in Arabic there are only three tenses – past, present and future. However, the following is just a

way to translate different Indo-European tenses to Arabic.

1. Simple Past

لعف

fa”al(a)

= (he) did

translation: he did


2. Anterior Past

ناك لعف

kaan(a) fa”al(a)

= (he) was did

translation: ~ he had done

When the perfective verb is preceded by kaan(a) ناك “was,” the formulation will mean

something very close to “he had done.”

3. Anterior Future

نوكيس لعف

sayakwun(u) fa”al(a)

= (he) will be did

translation: ~ he will have done

When the perfective verb is preceded by sayakwun نوكيس “will be” or sawfa yakwun فوس نوكي

“will be,” the formulation will mean something very close to “he will have done.”

4. Perfect Present

دق لعف

qad fa”al(a)

= (he) has done

translation: he has done

The particle qad دق does not mean “have” or “has” but it does achieve a similar purpose when

it proceeds a perfective verb. It is common to add la- ل- to qad for emphasis. This is more

common in Modern Standard Arabic.

دقل لعف

la-qad fa”al(a)

= (he) indeed has done

translation: he has done

The particle qad is also often used as an emphatic particle.

دق حجن دجملا يف هلمع

qad najaH(a) (a)l-mujidd(u) fyi “amalih(i)

= (he) has succeeded the diligent in work (of) him

translation: the diligent succeeds at his work


The perfective verb is used here as a subjunctive verb, which is common in classical Arabic.

This is similar to the English “if I were there…”

5. Perfect Past

ناك دق لعف

kaan(a) qad fa”al(a)

= (he) was has done

translation: he had done

Remember that qad دق does not really mean “has” but is does its job. When qad is preceded

by the verb kaan(a) ناك “was,” the formulation will mean something like “he had done.” In this

case – the past perfect – it is not possible to add the emphatic la- ل- to qad.

6. Perfect Future

نوكيس دق لعف

sayakwun(u) qad fa”al(a)

= (he) will be has done

translation: he will have done

When qad دق is proceded by sayakwun نوكيس “will be” or sawfa yakwun فوس نوكي “will be,” the

formulation will mean “he will have done..” In this case, too, it is not possible to add the

emphatic la- ل- to qad. The particle qad can also precede the imperfective verb structure – but in

that case it will have a totally different function. It will confer a sense of uncertainty on the verb,

as will be seen. A final note about the usage of the perfective is that this verb can often be used as

a subjunctive verb – not only for the past tense but also for the present and future tense.

نإ تسرد تحجن

‘in darast(a) najaht(a)

= if (you) studied (you) succeeded

translation: if you studied you would pass = if you study, you will pass

نمؤملا نم نمأ هراج هقئاوب

al-mu”min(u) man ‘amin(a) jaaruh(u) bawaa’iqah(u)

= the believer (is) who (he) was secured (from), neighbor (of) him, harms (of) him

translation: a believer is one whose neighbor wouldn’t have to worry about harm from him

The subject of the verb ‘amin(a) نمأ “secured” was jaaruh(u) هراج. The object of the same verb is

bawaa’iq(a) قئاوب. The pronoun -h(u) ه “him” is referring to the believer.


Present Tense

Present tense in English has the following aspects.

simple present he does

perfect present he has done

progressive present he is doing

perfect progressive present he has been doing

It was stated earlier that there is no perfect progressive aspect for verbs in Arabic – that the

perfect aspect is expressed in all tenses by employing the perfective structure and that the

progressive aspect is expressed always by employing the imperfective structure. The imperfective

structure is also used for the simple present tense. Since the verbs are usually given in the

perfective form, one should know how to extract the root from them. The root letters can be used

then to fill the spaces in the imperfective structure formula.

Imperfective verbs are not “built words” as were the perfective verbs. They have endings that

differ depending on the mood of the verb. There are three different models for different endings –

indicative, subjunctive and jussive. Verbs in the imperative take different structures from the

regular imperfective ones – and those are built words, not inflective ones. This is why they will

be dealt with separately. Imperfective verbs can become built. This is when they are connected to

a specific particle that is called “noon of emphasis” – the energetic mood – or when they are in

the plural feminine conjugations.

Now we will take the different perfective structures and turn them into the indicative

imperfective.

1. Triliteral Root Without Additional Letters.

The perfective structures are:

fa”al(a) لعف

fa”il(a) فلع

fa”ul(a) لعف

These structures share a similar conjugation technique.

fa”al(a) لعف / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) do ‘af”al(u) آلعف

(you) do (m.) taf”al(a) تلعف

(you) do (f.) taf”alyin(a) تلعفني

(he) does yaf”al(u) يلعف

(she) does taf”al(u) تلعف


DU

AL

(you) do taf”alaan(i) تالعفن

(they) do (m.) yaf”alaan(i) يالعفن

(they) do (f.) taf”alaan(i) تالعفن

PL

UR

AL

(we) do (dual/pural) naf”al(u) نلعف

(you) do (m.) taf”alwun(a) تلعفنو

(you) do (f.) taf”aln(a) تلعفن

(they) do (m.) yaf”alwun(a) يلعفنو

(they) do (f.) yaf”aln(a) يلعفن

The three bold letters represent the root letters. The underlined letters are unchangeable

additional letters. The indicative mood changes in the other two moods – they are totally dropped

away in the jussive. Notice that the plural feminine conjugations are “built” and do not have

mood signs. The short vowels are the changeable element of the structures, depending on each

verb and to which category it belongs. There are no specific rules for guessing what the short

vowel will be. fa”al(a) verbs cane take a, i or u in the imperfective; fa”il(a) verbs can take either

a or i; and fa”ul(a) verbs always take u – and these are always instransitive verbs.

fa”al(a) لعف : raQaSa صقر “dance” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) dance ‘arquS(u) صقرأ

(you) dance (m.) tarquS(a) صقرت

(you) dance (f.) tarquSyin(a) نيصقرت

(he) dances yarquS (u) صقري

(she) dances tarquS (u) صقرت

DU

AL

(you) dance tarquSaan(i) ناصقرت

(they) dance (m.) yarquSaan(i) ناصقري

(they) dance (f.) tarquSaan(i) ناصقرت

PL

UR

AL

(we) dance (dual/pural) narquS (u) صقرن

(you) dance (m.) tarquSwun(a) نوصقرت

(you) dance (f.) tarquSn(a) نصقرت

(they) dance (m.) yarquSwun(a) نوصقري

(they) dance (f.) yarquSn(a) نصقري

It can be seen that the verb raQaSa صقر “dance” takes u (Dumma) when transformed to the

imperative. This is totally arbitrary; there is no way to guess if it was not known in advance.


Doubled Verbs

Doubled verbs are verbs that have identical second and third root letters – such as “add(a) دع

“count”. The root is ع د د. Knowing that this verb is a u verb, it we apply this root to the present

structure we will get:

yaf”ul(u) لعفي

ya”dud(u) ددعي

But for some reason Arabs wanted to preserve the shaddah , so they moved back the short

vowel and the result was as follows:

fa”al(a) لعف : “add(a) دع “count” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) count ‘a”udd(u) دعأ

(you) count (m.) ta”udd(a) دعت

(you) count (f.) ta”uddyin(a) نيدعت

(he) counts ya”udd(u) دعي

(she) counts ta”udd(u) دعت

DU

AL

(you) count ta”uddaan(i) نادعت

(they) count (m.) ya”uddaan(i) نادع

(they) count (f.) ta”uddaan(i) نادعت

PL

UR

AL

(we) count (dual/pural) na”udd(u) دعن

(you) count (m.) ta”uddwun(a) نودعت

(you) count (f.) ta”dudn(a) نددعت

(they) count (m.) ya”uddwun(a) نودعي

(they) count (f.) ya”dudn(a) نددعت

As can be seen, the plural feminine was spared from this transition – because of the rule of “still

letters don’t meet.” This transition applies to all doubled verbs, but the short vowels are still

changeable.

mithaal Verbs

mithaal verbs are verbs whose first original letter is a weak letter. When conjugating mithaal

verbs in the present, the first weak letter will be deleted if the verb is an i verb. This change is

applied only to trilateral verbs without additional letters – such as wa”ad(a) دعو “promise.” This

is an i verb.

yaf”il(u) لعفي

ya”id(u) دعي


fa”al(a) لعف : wa”ad(a) دعو “promise” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) promise ‘a”id(u) دعأ

(you) promise (m.) ta”id(a) دعت

(you) promise (f.) ta”idyin(a) نيدعت

(he) promises ya”id(u) دعي

(she) promises ta”id(u) دعت

DU

AL

(you) promise ta”idaan(i) نادعت

(they) promise (m.) ya”idaan(i) نادع

(they) promise (f.) ta”idaan(i) نادعت

PL

UR

AL

(we) promise (dual/pural) na”id(u) دعن

(you) promise (m.) ta”idwun(a) نودعت

(you) promise (f.) ta”idn(a) ندعت

(they) promise (m.) ya”idwun(a) نودعي

(they) promise (f.) ya”idn(a) ندعت

Hollow Verbs

Hollow verbs are verbs that have a weak letter as the second original letter. A key issue in

conjugating these verbs correctly is to have the true root of the verb – such as qaal(a) لاق “said.”

This verb is a u verb.


yaqwul(u) لوقي

fa”al(a) لعف : qaal(a) لاق “said” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) say ‘aqwul(u) لوقأ

(you) say (m.) taqwul(a) لوقت

(you) say (f.) taqwul(a) نيلوقت

(he) says yaqwul(u) لوقي

(she) says taqwul(u) لوقت

DU

AL

(you) say taqwulaan(i) نالوقت

(they) say (m.) yaqwulaan(i) نالوقي

(they) say (f.) taqwulaan(i) نالوقت


PL

UR

AL

(we) say (dual/pural) naqwul(u) لوقن

(you) say (m.) taqwulwun(a) نولوقت

(you) say (f.) taquln(a) نلقت

(they) say (m.) yaqwulwun(a) نولوقي

(they) say (f.) yaquln(a) نلقي

Notice that when the rule is applied to the plural feminine one gets two still letters following

each other – -و- and -ل- – and this was not acceptable as “still do not meet.” So the procedure here

is to remove the weak letter waaw و and bring back the short vowel u in its place – which means

losing a letter from the word because the short vowel is not a letter but rather a “move.”

Another hollow verb is baa”(a) عاب “sell.” This verb is an i verb.


yabyi”(u) عيبيي

fa”al(a) لعف : baa”(a) عاب “sell” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) sell ‘abyi”(u) عيبأ

(you) sell (m.) tabyi”(a) عيبت

(you) sell (f.) tabyi”(a) نيلعيبت

(he) sells yabyi”(u) عيبي

(she) sells tabyi”(u) عيبت

DU

AL

(you) sell tabyi”aan(i) ناعيبت

(they) sell (m.) yabyi”aan(i) ناعيبي

(they) sell (f.) tabyi”aan(i) ناعيبت

PL

UR

AL

(we) sell (dual/pural) nabyi”(u) عيبن

(you) sell (m.) tabyi”wun(a) نوعيبت

(you) sell (f.) tabi”n(a) نعبت

(they) sell (m.) yabyi”wun(a) نوعيبي

(they) sell (f.) yabi”n(a) نعبي

Again, to avoid the meeting of two still letters – ي- and -ع- – in the plural feminine structures

the yaa’ ي was changed to i.

The last hollow verb is khaaf(a) فاخ “fear.” This verb is an a verb.

yaf”al(u) لعفي

yakhaaf(u) فاخي


fa”al(a) لعف : khaaf(a) فاخ “fear” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) fear ‘akhaaf(u) فاخأ

(you) fear (m.) takhaaf(a) فاخت

(you) fear (f.) tabkhaaf(a) نيفاخت

(he) fears yakhaaf(u) فاخي

(she) fears takhaaf(u) فاخت

DU

AL

(you) fear takhaafaan(i) نافاخت

(they) fear (m.) yakhaafaan(i) نافاخي

(they) fear (f.) takhaafaan(i) نافاخت

PL

UR

AL

(we) fear (dual/pural) nakhaaf(u) فاخن

(you) fear (m.) takhaafwun(a) نوفاخت

(you) fear (f.) takhaafn(a) نفخت

(they) fear (m.) yakhaafwun(a) نوفاخي

(they) fear (f.) yakhaafn(a) نفخي

One more time, to avoid the meeting of two still letters – -ا- and -ف- - in the plural feminine

structures the ‘alef ا is changed to a.

Defective Verbs

Defective verbs are verbs whose last original letter is a weak letter. In the imperfective i and

u verbs, the last weak of the perfective will be replaced by the long vowel which corresponds to

the original weak letter of the root. However, a verbs will always have the long vowel ‘alef ا at

their end. An example is bakaa يكب “cry.” This verb is an i verb.


yabkyi يكبي

The last weak letter will be turned into a long vowel. Note that the indicative mood sign

cannot appear after a long vowel – thus it will disappear. When such sign occurs after a long

vowel it is said to be “estimated” rather than “apparent’ – which is the normal situation. Here is

an example of an a verb – nisyi(a) يسن “forget.”

yaf”al(u) يلعف

yansaa ىسني

The last long weak letter was turned into long ‘alef ى because the verb was an a verb, and the

indicative mood sign is estimated after the long ‘alef. The last example is – samaa امس “rise

solemnly.” This verb is a u verb.



yasmwu ومسي

fa”al(a) لعف : samaa امس “rise solemnly” / Imperfective S

ING

UL

AR

(I) rise ‘asmwu ومسأ

(you) rise (m.) tasmwu ومست

(you) rise (f.) tasmyin(a)) نيمست

(he) rises yasmwu ومسي

(she) rises tasmwu ومست

DU

AL

(you) rise tasmuwaan(i) تنومس

(they) rise (m.) yasmuwaan(i) ناومسي

(they) rise (f.) tasmuwaan(i) ناومست

PL

UR

AL

(we) rise (dual/pural) nasmwu ومسن

(you) rise (m.) tasmwun(a) نومست

(you) rise (f.) tasmwun(a) نومست

(they) rise (m.) yasmwun(a) نومسي

(they) rise (f.) yasmwun(a) نومسي

Again we see the phenomenon of “stills do not meet.”

Enfolding Verbs

Enfolding verbs embrace the definitions of both mithaal and defective verbs. They have two

weak letters – one at the beginning and the other at the end of the root. These verbs getting the

dealing of both mithaal and defective verbs – the first letter is deleted like done for mithaal verbs

and the last letter is transformed into a long vowel like done to defective verbs. An example is—

waqaa ىقو “protect.”


yaqyi يقي

The first waaw و was deleted and the ‘alef ى was transformed into yaa’ ي.


fa”al(a) لعف : waqaa ىقو “protect” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) protect ‘aqyi يقأ

(you) protect (m.) taqyi يقت

(you) protect (f.) taqyin(a) نيقت

(he) protects yaqyi يقي

(she) protects taqyi يقت

DU

AL

(you) protect taqyiaan(i) نيقت

(they) protect (m.) yaqyiaan(i) نيقي

(they) protect (f.) taqyiaan(i) نيقت

PL

UR

AL

(we) protect (dual/pural) naqyi يقن

(you) protect (m.) taqwun(a) نوقت

(you) protect (f.) taqyin(a) نيقت

(they) protect (m.) yaqwun(a) نوقي

(they) protect (f.) yaqyin(a) نيقي

The same issues that were faced when conjugating the defective verb arise in this formation.

2. Triliteral Root With Additional Letters

The perfective measures are:

‘af”al(a) لعفأ

fa””al(a) لعف

faa”al(a) لعاف

‘infa”al(a) لعفنإ

‘ifta”al(a) لعتفإ

‘if”all(a) لعفإ

tafa”al(a) لعفت

tafaa”al(a) لعافت

‘istaf”al(a) لعفتسإ

These are all of the remaining perfective structures with trilateral roots. As can be seen, five

of these structures have an ‘alef أ or إ in front of them. These ‘alef’s are removed when forming

the imperfective structures.


Triltieral Root With One Additional Letter (Quadriliteral Perfective Verbs)





Quadriliteral perfective structures conjugate similarly when forming the imperative structures

of them.

PA

ST

faa”al(a) لعاف fa””al(a) لعف ‘af”al(a) لعفأ

PR

ES

EN

T

yufaa”il(u) لعافي yufa””il(u) لعفي yuf”il(u) لعفي

The ‘alef أ in front of the first perfective structure automatically goes away.

Barring the ‘alef أ, the structure itself remains intact – the short vowel a (fatHa) is

changed to i (kasra).

All quadrilateral perfective verbs are i verbs.

Following is the conjugation of each structure.


fa”al(a) لعف : ‘akram(a) مركأ “dignify” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) dignify ‘ukrim(u) مركأ

(you) dignify (m.) tukrim(u) مركت

(you) dignify (f.) takrimyin(a) نيمركت

(he) dignifies yukrim(u) مركي

(she) dignifies tukrim(u) مركت

DU

AL

(you) dignify tukrimaan(i) نامركت

(they) dignify (m.) yukrimaan(i) نامركي

(they) dignify (f.) tukrimaan(i) نامركت


PL

UR

AL

(we) dignify (dual/pural) nukrim(u) مركن

(you) dignify (m.) tukrimwun(a) نومركت

(you) dignify (f.) tukrimn(a) نمركت

(they) dignify (m.) yukrimwun(a) نومركي

(they) dignify (f.) yukrimn(a) نمركي

There is a special case – ‘ayqan(a) نقيأ “become certain.”

yuf”il(u) لعفي

yuqin(u)i نقوي

There is no specific reason for changing the yaa’ ي to waaw و, except that Arabs found the

sound yuy to be hard to pronounce.

fa”al(a) لعف : waqaa نقوي “become certain” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) become certain ‘yuqin(u) نقوأ

(you) become certain (m.) tyuqin(u) قوتن

(you) become certain (f.) tyuqinyin(a) نينقوت

(he) becomes certain yuqin(u) نقوي

(she) becomes certain tuqin(u) نقوت

DU

AL

(you) become certain tyuqinaan(i) نانقوت

(they) become certain (m.) yyuqinaan(i) نانقوي

(they) become certain (f.) tyuqinaan(i) نانقوت

PL

UR

AL

(we) become certain

(dual/pural)

nauyqin(u) نقون

(you) become certain (m.) tyuqinun(a) نونقوت

(you) become certain (f.) tyuqinn(a) نقوت

(they) become certain (m.) yuqinwun(a) نونقوي

(they) become certain (f.) yyuqinn(a) نقوي

Other similar verbs to this one are ‘aysar(a) رسيأ “to become rich” and ‘ayna”(a) عنيأ “do.”



fa””al(a) لعف : “allam(a) ملع “teach” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) teach ‘u”allim(u) ملعأ

(you) teach (m.) tu”allim(u) ملعت

(you) teach (f.) tu”allimyin(a) نيملعت

(he) teaches yu”allim(u) ملعي

(she) teaches tu”allim(u) ملعت

DU

AL

(you) teach tu”allimaan(i) ناملعت

(they) teach (m.) yu”allimaan(i) ناملعي

(they) teach (f.) tu”allimaan(i) ناملعت

PL

UR

AL

(we) teach (dual/pural) nu”allim(u) ملعن

(you) teach (m.) tu”allimwun(a) نوملعت

(you) teach (f.) tu”allimn(a) نملعت

(they) teach (m.) yu”allimwun(a) نوملعي

(they) teach (f.) yu”allimn(a) نملعي


faa”al(a) لعاف : saa”ad(a) دعاس “help” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) help ‘usaa”id(u) دعاسأ

(you) help (m.) tusaa”id(u) دعاست

(you) help (f.) tusaa”idyin(a) دعاستني

(he) helps yusaa”idim(u) دعاسي

(she) helps tusaa”idim(u) دعاست

DU

AL

(you) help tusaa”idaan(i) نادعاست

(they) help (m.) yusaa”idaan(i) نادعاسي

(they) help (f.) tusaa”idaan(i) نادعاست

PL

UR

AL

(we) help (dual/pural) nusaa”id(u) دعاسن

(you) help (m.) tusaa”idwun(a) نودعاست

(you) help (f.) tusaa”idn(a) ندعاست

(they) help (m.) yusaa”idwun(a) نودعاسي

(they) help (f.) yusaa”idn(a) ندعاسي


Triltieral Root With One Additional Letter (Pentariliteral Perfective Verbs)





tafa””al(a) لعفت


To form the perfective:

The ‘alef أ in front of the first past structure must disappear.

Barring the ‘alef أ, the perfective structure itself remains intact.

The prefix is ya- rather than yu- for all of these verbs.


‘infa”al(a) لعفنإ : ‘intZar(a) رظتنإ “wait” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) wait ‘antaZir(u) رظتنأ

(you) wait (m.) tantaZir(u) رظتنت

(you) wait (f.) tantaZiryin(a) نيرظتنت

(he) waits yantaZir(u) رظتني

(she) waits tantaZir(u) رظتنت

DU

AL

(you) wait tantaZaraan(i) نارظتنت

(they) wait (m.) yantaZaraan(i) نارظتني

(they) wait (f.) tantaZaraan(i) نارظتنت

PL

UR

AL

(we) wait (dual/pural) nantaZir(u) رظتنن

(you) wait (m.) tantaZirwun(a) نيرظتنت

(you) wait (f.) tantaZirn(a) نرظتنت

(they) wait (m.) yantaZirwun(a) نيرظتني

(they) wait (f.) yantaZirn(a) نرظتني



‘ifta”al(a) لعتفإ : ‘intaSar(a) رصتنإ “win” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) win ‘antaSir(u) رصتنأ

(you) win (m.) tantaSir(u) رصتنت

(you) win (f.) tantaSiryin(a) رصتنتني

(he) wins yantaSir(u) رصتني

(she) wins tantaSir(u) رصتنت

DU

AL

(you) win tantaSaraan(i) نارصتنت

(they) win (m.) yantaSaraan(i) نارصتني

(they) win (f.) tantaSaraan(i) نارصتنت

PL

UR

AL

(we) win (dual/pural) nantaSir(u) رصتنن

(you) win (m.) tantaSirwun(a) نيرصتنت

(you) win (f.) tantaSirn(a) نرصتنت

(they) win (m.) yantaSirwun(a) نيرصتني

(they) win (f.) yantaSirn(a) نرصتني

‘ifta”al(a) لعتفأ : ‘attasa”(a) عستأ “expand” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) expand ‘attasa”(u) عستأ

(you) expand (m.) tattasa”(u) عستت

(you) expand (f.) tattasa”yin(a) نيعستت

(he) expands yattasa”r(u) عستي

(she) expands tattasa”(u) عستت

DU

AL

(you) expand tattasa”aan(i) ناعستت

(they) expand (m.) yattasa”aan(i) ناعستي

(they) expand (f.) tattasa”aan(i) ناعستت

PL

UR

AL

(we) expand (dual/pural) nattasa”(u) عستن

(you) expand (m.) tattasa”wun(a) نوعستت

(you) expand (f.) tattasa”n(a) نعستت

(they) expand (m.) yattasa”wun(a) نوعستي

(they) expand (f.) yattasa”n(a) نعستي



‘if”all(a) لعفإ : ‘ikhDarr(a) رضخإ “(color) green” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) green ‘akhDarr(u) رضخأ

(you) green (m.) takhDarr(u) رضخت

(you) green (f.) takhDarryin(a) نيرضخت

(he) greens yakhDarr(u) رضخي

(she) greens takhDarr(u) رضخت

DU

AL

(you) green takhDarraan(i) نارضخت

(they) green (m.) yakhDarraan(i) نارضخي

(they) green (f.) takhDarraan(i) نارضخت

PL

UR

AL

(we) green (dual/pural) nakhDarr(u) رضخن

(you) green (m.) takhDarrwun(a) نورضخت

(you) green (f.) takhDarirn(a) * نرضخت

(they) green (m.) yakhDarrwun(a) نورضخي

(they) green (f.) yakhDarirn(a) * نرضخي

* The shaddah was untied to prevent two still letters from meeting.


tafa””al(a) لعفت : ta”allam(a) ملعت “learn” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) learn ‘ata”allam(u) ملعتأ

(you) learn (m.) tata”allam(u) ملعتت

(you) learn (f.) tata”allamyin(a) نيملعتت

(he) learns yata”allam(u) ملعتي

(she) learns tata”allam(u) ملعتت

DU

AL

(you) learn tata”allamaan(i) ناملعتت

(they) learn (m.) yata”allamaan(i) تيناملع

(they) learn (f.) tata”allamaan(i) ناملعتت

PL

UR

AL

(we) learn (dual/pural) nata”allam(u) ملعتن

(you) learn (m.) tata”allamwun(a) نوملعتت

(you) learn (f.) tata”allamn(a) نملعتت

(they) learn (m.) yata”allamwun(a) نوملعتي

(they) learn (f.) yata”allamn(a) نملعتي


Triliteral Root With Three Additional Letters (Hexaliteral Perfective Verbs)

This is the last structure for verbs with trilateral roots.


The ‘alef أ in front of the first perfective structure must disappear.


The short vowel a changes to i.

The prefix is ya- rather than yu-.


‘istaf”al(a) لعفتسإ : ‘ista”mal(a) لمعتسإ “use” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) learn ‘asta”mil(u) لمعتسأ

(you) learn (m.) tasta”mil(u) لمعتست

(you) learn (f.) tasta”milyin(a) نيلمعتست

(he) learns yasta”mil(u) لمعتسي

(she) learns tasta”mil(u) لمعتست

DU

AL

(you) learn tasta”milaan(i) نالمعتست

(they) learn (m.) yasta”milaan(i) نالمعتسي

(they) learn (f.) tasta”milaan(i) نالمعتست

PL

UR

AL

(we) learn (dual/pural) nasta”mil(u) لمعتسن

(you) learn (m.) tasta”milwun(a) نولمعتست

(you) learn (f.) tasta”miln(a) نلمعتست

(they) learn (m.) yasta”milwun(a) نولمعتسي

(they) learn (f.) yasta”miln(a) نلمعتسي

3. Quadriliteral Root Without Additional Letters

The perfective structure is:

fa”lal(a) للعف

The perfective structure itself remains intact.


The prefix is yu-.



fa”l(a) للعف : Tam’an(a) نأمط “reassure” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) reassure ‘uTam’in(u) نئمطأ

(you) reassure (m.) tuTam’in(u) نئمطت

(you) reassure (f.) tuTam’inyin(a) نينئمطت

(he) reassures yuTam’in(u) نئمطي

(she) reassures tuTam’in(u) نئمطت

DU

AL

(you) reassure tuTam’inaan(i) نانئمطت

(they) reassure (m.) yuTam’inaan(i) نانئمطي

(they) reassure (f.) tuTam’inaan(i) نانئمطت

PL

UR

AL

(we) reassure (dual/pural) nuTam’in(u) نئمطن

(you) reassure (m.) tuTam’inwun(a) نونئمطت

(you) reassure (f.) tuTam’inn(a) نئمطت

(they) reassure (m.) yuTam’inwun(a) نونئمطي

(they) reassure (f.) yuTam’inn(a) نئمطي

4. Quadriliteral Root With Additional Letters (Quadrliteral Root With One

Additional Letter)


tafa”lal(a) للعفت

tafay”al(a) لعيفت

tamaf”al(a) لعفمت

The perfective structure itself remains intact.

The short vowel a sats as a.

The prefix is ya-.


tafa”lal(a) للعف

tafa”lal(a) للعف : tadaHraj(a) خرحدت “roll” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) roll ‘atadaHraj(u) خرحدتأ

(you) roll (m.) tatadaHraj(u) خرحدتت

(you) roll (f.) tatadaHrajyin(a) نيجرحدتت

(he) rolls yatadaHraj(u) خرحدتي

(she) rolls tatadaHraj(u) خرحدتت

DU

AL

(you) roll tatadaHrajaan(i) ناجرحدتت

(they) roll (m.) yatadaHrajaan(i) حدتيناجر

(they) roll (f.) tatadaHrajaan(i) ناجرحدتت

PL

UR

AL

(we) roll (dual/pural) natadaHraj(u) خرحدتن

(you) roll (m.) tatadaHrajwun(a) نوجرحدتت

(you) roll (f.) tatadaHrajn(a) نجرحدتت

(they) roll (m.) yatadaHrajwun(a) نوجرحدتي

(they) roll (f.) yatadaHrajn(a) نجرحدتي

Quadriliteral Root With Additional Letters (Quadrliteral Root With Two

Additional Letters)


‘if”alall(a) للعفإ

The ‘alef أ in front of the first perfective structure must disappear.



The prefix is ya-.


‘if”alall(a) للعفإ : ‘iTma’ann(a) نأمطإ “become unworried” / Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) become unworried ‘aTma’inn(u) نئمطأ

(you) become unworried (m.) taTma’inn(u) نئمطت

(you) become unworried (f.) taTma’innyin(a) نينئمطت

(he) becomes unworried yaTma’inn(u) نئمطي

(she) becomes unworried taTma’inn(u) نئمطت


DU

AL

(you) become unworried taaTma’innjaan(i) نانئمطت

(they) become unworried (m.) yaaTma’innjaan(i) نانئمطي

(they) become unworried (f.) taaTma’innjaan(i) نانئمطت P

LU

RA

L

(we) become unworried

(dual/pural)

naTma’inn(u) نئمطن

(you) become unworried (m.) taTma’innwun(a) نونئمطت

(you) become unworried (f.) taTma’inann(a) * ننئمطت

(they) become unworried (m.) yaTma’innwun(a) ننئمطي

(they) become unworried (f.) yaTma’inann(a) * ننئمطي

* The shaddah was untied to prevent two still letters from meeting.

Finally, here is a list of all the structures.

Imperfective Perfective

yaf”al(u) لعفي

fa”al(a)

لعف

yaf”il(u) لعف لعفي

yaf”ul(u) لعف لعفي

yuf”il(u) لعفي ‘af”al(a) لعفأ

yufa””il(u) لعفي fa””al(a) لعف

yufaa”il(u) لعافي faa”al(a) لعاف

yanfa”il(u) فنيلع ‘infa”al(a) لعفنإ

yafta”il(u) لعتفي ‘ifta”al(a) لعتفإ

yaf”all(u) لعفي ‘if”all(a) لعفإ

yatafa””al(u) لعفتي tafa”al(a) لعفت

yatafaa”al(u) لعافتي tafaa”al(a) لعافت

yastaf”il(u) لعفتسي ‘istaf”al(a) لعفتسإ

yufa”lil(u) للعفي fa”lal(a) للعف

yatafa”lal(u) للعفتي tafa”lal(a) للعفت

yatafay”al(u) لعيفتي tafay”al(a) لعيفت

yatamaf”al(u) لعفمتي tamaf”al(a) لعفمت

yaf”alall(u) لعفي ‘if”alall(a) للعفإ


Future Tense

The imperfective is the structure used for future tense in Arabic. In fact, this is the structure

that was employed most often in classical Arabic. However, in modern standard Arabic the

imperfective alone is often used to describe an action in the present tense. The future in modern

standard Arabic is usually formed by adding either one of two particles before the perfective.

sa- -س

sawfa فوس

There is not any difference in usage between the two particles, and those do not affect the mood

or any characteristics of the verb.

Tenses for the Imperfective Structure

The imperfective structure is used in the following tenses.

1. Simple Present

لعفي

yaf”al(u)

(he) does

2. Simple Future

لعفيس

sa-yaf”al(u)

(he) will do

فوس لعفي

sawfa yaf”al(u)

(he) will do

3. Progressive Present

لعفي

yaf”al(u)

(he) is doing

4. Progressive Past


ناك لعفي

kaan(a) yaf”al(u)

(he) was doing

5. Progrssive Future

نوكيس لعفي

sa-yakwun(u) yaf”al(u)

(he) will be doing

فوس نوكي لعفي

sawfa yakwun(u) yaf”al(u)

(he) will be doing

A Scheme for All Tenses

Tense Formula

PA

ST

Simple Perfective لعف

he did

Anterior Perfective ناك لعف

he had done

Perfect Perfective ناك دق لعف

he had done

Progressive Imperfective ناك لعفي

he was doing

PR

ES

EN

T

Simple Imperfective لعفي

he does

Perfect Perfective دق لعف

he has done

Progressive Imperfective لعف

he is doing

FU

TU

RE

Simple Imperfective لعفيس

he will do

Anterior Perfective نوكيس لعف

he will have done

Perfect Perfective نوكيس دق لعف

he will have done


Tense Formula

Progressive Imperfective نوكيس لعفي

he will be doing

Moods

Verb moods that exist in Arabic are:

Indicative

Subjunctive

Jussive

Energetic

Imperative

All these moods are moods only of the imperfective verbs. This means that they can be

expressed in both the present and the future tenses. Perfective verbs, on the other hand, do not

take more than a single mood. This is why they are “built” words. The unique mood of the

perfective verbs is not really identified in Arabic grammar, in that it is thought that all perfective

verbs are built in the subjunctive mood – but this really does not matter since there is no other

mood that these verbs can take. Thus, there is only one mood in the past tense.

The first three moods – indicative, subjunctive and jussive – are obtained by altering the

declension (mood signs) of the indicative verbs; these are the verbs that have been dealt with so

far. The energetic mood is not considered a mood in Arabic grammar – it is obtained by attaching

a particle that is alled “noon of emphasis” to the end of the imperfective structure. The imperative

mood will take a different structure from the regular imperative one – this is why these verbs are

considered a third, separate category from the perfective and the imperfective in Arabic grammar.

The Subjunctive

The indicative is turned into the subjunctive by changing the mood signs at the end of the

verb.

fa”al(a) لعف : Subjunctive Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) do ‘af”al(u) لعفأ

(you) do (m.) taf”al(u) لعفت

(you) do (f.) taf”alyi يلعفت

(he) does yaf”al(a) لعفي

(she) does taf”al(a) لعفت

DU

AL

(you) do taf”alaa العفت

(they) do (m.) yaf”alaa العفي

(they) do (f.) taf”alaa العفت


PL

UR

AL

(we) do (dual/pural) naf”al(a) فنلع

(you) do (m.) taf”alwu اولعفت

(you) do (f.) taf”aln(a) نلعفت

(they) do (m.) yaf”alwu اولعفي

(they) do (f.) yaf”aln(a) نلعفي

The differences between the subjunctive and indicate imperfective verbs were that the indicative -

u is changed to -a, and the noon ن is deleted. The plural feminine marker, as mentioned earlier, is

not mood inflected.

There are two distinct types of imperfective structures. The first type has a short vowel as a

sign of the mood, and the second type has the mood sign letter noon ن. The verbs of the second

type are designated in Arabic grammar as “the five verbs.” For irregular verbs, mood inflection

for defective verbs may be seen. Determining when to use each mood is simple in Arabic – a verb

will be in the subjunctive mood only if it is preceded by what is called a “subjunctive particle.”

The subjunctive particles are the following.

Subjunctive Particles

that ‘an نأ

will not lan نل

in order to kay يك

then ‘ithan نذإ

Indicative Subjunctive Particles

so that li- -ل

until Hattaa ىتح

or ‘aw وأ

then fa- -ف

and wa- و

‘an نأ is used to form infinitives in Arabic just as “to” is used to form them in English. It

precedes the imperfective and it means “that.”

يرأد نأ ملعت

‘uryid(u) ‘an ‘ata”allam(a)

= (I) want that (I) learn

Translated: I want to learn

‘an نأ is used after verbs such as “want,” “can,” “try,” “love,” “hate,” etc., just like in

English. lan نل is the particle used to negate future events. It is used with imperfective.


بهذينل

lan yathhab(a))

= will not (he) go

Translated: he will not go

kay يك means “in order to” or “so that.”

اوؤاج يك اودعاسي

jaa’wu kay yusaa”idwu

= (they) came so that (they) help

Translated: they came to help

Very often kay يك will be preceded by the article li- -ل. This will change nothing.

اوؤاج يكل اودعاسي

jaa’wu li-kay yusaa”idwu

= (they) came so that (they) help

Translated: they came to help

‘ithan نذإ is different from the other particles. It is not exclusively a subjunctive particle and

can be a jussive particle as well. The usage of ‘ithan as a subjunctive particle requires certain

conditions and is an archaic usage. Therefore, it will not be described in detail here – the

conditions, in brief, are that it is (1) the first letter of the sentence and (2) not separated from the

imperfective by any word except for a swearing construction.

كروزأس

sa-‘azwuruk(a)

= (I) will visit you

Translated: I will visit you

نذإ كمركأ

‘ithan ‘ukrimak(a)

= then (I) be generous with you

Translated: I would be generous with you if you did

نذإ و هللا كمركأ

‘ithan ‘ukrimak(a)

= then (I swear by) God (I) be generous with you

Translated: I certainly would be generous with you if you did


The second set of particles are not really subjunctive particles. li- -ل can be added to the

particle kay يك and that will not change anything. Correspondingly, all the particles of the second

set can be added to the particle ‘an نأ, but here there is a change than can happen. The change

will be that ‘an نأ is omitted; nevertheless, the verb will remain in the subjunctive mood.

انيتأ كارنل

‘ataynaa li-naraak(a)

= (we) came to (we) see you

Translated: we came to see you

li- -ل is an ablative particle that can be attached only to nouns – including pronouns. It is

attached to a verb in this example because there is an omitted ‘an نأ before the subjunctive verb.

In this case, ‘an نأ is said to be “estimated” after li- -ل. ‘an نأ with an imperfective verb together

form an infinitive or verbal noun which can accept the ablative li- -ل. Since the verb ends with a

long vowel aa, as a rule the mood sign will not show up.

نهرظتنأس ىتح نعجري

sa-‘antaZituhunn(a) Hattaa yarja”n(a)

= (I) will wait for (them) until (they) return

Translated: I will wait for their return

Hattaa ىتح is an ablative particle, too. There is an estimated ‘an نأ between it and the

following verb – which must be in the subjunctive mood. The mood sign is not showing here

because this particular conjugation of the imperfective – plural feminine – is a built one.

رصتنن وأ تومن

nantaSir(u) ‘aw namwut(a)

= (we) win or (we) die

Translated: either we win or we die

‘aw وأ is a conjunction word. It can normally precede verbs – but when the following verb is

in the subjunctive mood there must be an estimated ‘an نأ in between them. Remember, the

imperfective alone often denotes the future tense in classical writings.

fa- -ف is also a conjunction word that means “then.” It works grammartically in a manner

similar to ‘aw وأ – but fa- -ف would be followed by an estimated ‘an نأ only in sentences that

contain negation, a command, an interrogation, a wishing word, etc.

ال بهذت وأ اوكهتف

laa tathhabwu fa-tahlakwu

= not (you) go then (you) perish

Translated: don’t go or you will perish

The verb after laa ال is in the jussive mood.


wa و is the conjunction word that means “and.” It works identically to fa- -ف here and requires

the same conditions.

ال عتظ و ئست فرصتلا

laa ta”iZ wa tusyi’(a) (a)t-taSarruf(a)

= not (you) preach and (you) do badly the behavior

Translated: don’t preach and misbehave at the same time

The Jussive

The indicative is turned into the jussive by changing the mood signs.

fa”al(a) عفل : Jussive Imperfective

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) do ‘af”al لعفأ

(you) do (m.) taf”al لعفت

(you) do (f.) taf”alyi يلعفت

(he) does yaf”al لعفي

(she) does taf”al لعفت

DU

AL


(they) do (m.) yaf”alaa العفي

(they) do (f.) taf”alaa العفت

PL

UR

AL

(we) do (dual/pural) naf”al لعفن



(they) do (m.) yaf”alwu اولعفي

(they) do (f.) yaf”aln(a) نلعفي

For verbs other than the “five verbs,” simply delete the final short vowels of the indicative.

For the “five verbs,” delete the noon ن – which is what was also done with the subjunctive.

Basically, in the jussive all the indicative mood signs are deleted. An irregularity of the jussive

mood is that verbs which have weak letters at their end or middle positions will lose the weak

letters.

The jussive mood will be used in two situations: (1) when the imperfective verb is preceded

by a jussive particle or (2) when the imperfective verb is describing the promised or expected

outcome of a preceding phrase.


1. Simple Jussive Particles. There are four particles which act on one imperfective verb

changing it into the jussive mood.

did not lam مل

have not yet lammaa امل

(do) not laa ال

imperative particle li- -ل

lam مل is the negative particle that is used to negate past tense events. However, it is used only

with an imperfective verb and can never be used with perfective verbs.

مل بهذي يلع

lam yathhab “aliyy(un)

= (did not (he) go Ali

Translated: Ali didn’t go

مل لكأي دلولا

lam ya’kul(i) al-walad(u)

= did not (he) eat the boy

Translated: the boy did not eat

The verb after lam مل must be in the jussive mood. In the second sentence, the -i was added to

prevent two still letters from directly following each other – the l ل of the jussive verb and the l of

will not be pronounced if it is not the first uttered sound. This vowel will لا since the ‘alef of – لا

always be added when necessary.

lammaa امل is an archaic negation particle. It is used just as lam مل but the meaning is a bit

different. lammaa امل means “have not yet.”

امل لصي دبع هللا

lammaa yaSil “abd(u) (a)l-laah(i)

= has not yet (he) arrive Abdullah

Translated: Abdullah hasn’t arrived yet

laa ال is the word for “no” in Arabic. It is also used as a negative particle of the imperfective

that can have different senses. laa ال will be a jussive particle only when it means a command or

an order, or “do not.”

ال نزحت

laa taHzan

= not (you) get sad

Translated: don’t be sad


li- -ل is an imperative particle that turns the indicative verb into an order or a command. It can

be understood to mean “do.”

بهذتل نم انه

li-tathhab min hunaa

= (you) go from here

Translated: go away from here

2. Double-Acting (Conditional) Jussive Words. These include particles and nouns;

they can act on two different imperfective verbs, changing their moods into the jussive – but they

can act on other words, too. The two conditional particles.

if ‘in نإ

‘ithmaa امذإ

The second is archaic. An example of ‘in نإ.

نإ سردت حجنت

‘in tadrus tanjaH

= if (you) study (you) succeed

Translated: if you study you will pass

Conditional nouns are:

who man نم

what maa ام

wherever mah-maa امهم

when mataa ىتم

whenever mataa maa ىتم ام

when ‘ayyaan(a) نايأ

whenever ‘ayyanaana maa نايأ ام

how, when, where ‘annaa ىنأ

where ‘ayn(a) نيأ

wherever ‘ayna-maa نايأ ام

wherever Haythu-maa ثيح ام

however kayfa-maa فيك ام

any ‘ayy(u) يأ

whichever ‘ayyu-maa يأ ام


All these nouns are built words except for the last two, which can have different case signs,

depending on the grammatical case.

نم عرزي دصحي

man yazra” yaHSud

= who plants harvests

Translated: he who plants harvests

ام اومت مكزجي هللا هب

maa ta”malyu yajzikum(i) (a)l-lah(u) bih(i)

= what (you) do (he) rewards you God by it

Translated: God will reward you by your deeds

The verb yajzay يزجي “reward” is a defective verb that loses its last weak letter as a sign for

being in the jussive mood. The -u after yazjikum مكزجي was to prevent two still letters from directly

following each other.

امم لواحت لشفت

mahmaa tuHaawil tafshal

= whatever (you) try (you) fail

Translated: whatever you try, you will fail

ىتم تأت يندجت

mataa ta’ti tajidnyi

= when (you) come (you) find me

Translated: when you come, you will find me

The verb ta’ti تأت “come” is a defective verb that loses its last weak letter as a sign for being

in the jussive mood.

نيأ طقسي رطملا رضخت ضرألا

‘ayn(a) yasquT(i) (a)l-maTar(u) takhDarr(i) (a)l-‘arD(u)

= where (he) falls the rain (she) greens the earth

Translated: where the rain falls, the earth greens up

The -i after the jussive verbs are to prevent two still letters fromm directly following each other.

امثيح يبهذت يدجت أقدصأ

Haythumaa tathhaby itajidyi ‘aSdiqaa’

= wherever (you) go (you) find friends

Translated: wherever you go, you will meet new friends


3. Jussive Without Particle. This happens in conditional sentences that contain a

command, an interrogation or a wish.

لمعإ دجب حجنت

‘i”mal bi-jidd(in) tanjaH

= (you) work with diligence (you) succeed

Translated: work hard, you’ll succeed

تيل رمع بيرق هرزأ

layt(a) “mar(a) qaryib(un) ‘azurh(u)

= it is wished if Umar (is) near (I) visit him

Translated: I wish Umar were near so I could visit him

Imperative

The imperative mood in Arabic is used to command a second person – whether singular, dual

or plural. This mode is different from the other imperfective moods in that there is a new structure

for it. This structure is similar to the jussive mood – especially in terms of irregular verbs. There

is no imperative mood in the past tense; there is only one fixed mood in the past tense. The

imperative verbs – as imperfective verbs – denote both the present and the future tenses.

In Arabic grammar imperative verbs are considered a third category of verbs in addition to

the perfective and the imperfective. The imperfective verbs are “built” verbs since they do not

undergo mood inflection. Creating the imperative verb structure from the perfective one is similar

to creating the imperfective. The major steps in forming the imperfective are (1) adding the prefix

y- in front of the verb and the suitable suffix to its end, (2) chaging the short vowel, and (3)

removing the hamza ء in front of the verb if it exists. Forming the imperative, for the most part,

will be only by implementing step (2) and adding the suitable suffix. That is, to get the imperative

structure one must change the short vowel in the perfective structure in an identical manner to

what would be done when forming the imperfective – one would also add the suitable

imperfective suffix. Excluding the three structures of fa”al(a) لعف, one can now form the

imperative for all the perfective structures based on what has been presented.

Imperative : you do! Perfective : (he) did

Sing. masc. ‘af”il لعفأ

‘af”al(a)

لعفأ

Sing. fem. ‘af”ilyi يلعفأ

Dual ‘af”ilaa العفأ

Plur. masc. ‘af”ilwu اولعفأ

Plur. fem. ‘af”ilna فأنلع

The three structures of fa”al(a) لعف, however, will require additional changes. For these, start

by getting the verb into the imperfective, then apply the following steps.


Have the imperfective verb in the jussive mood – remove the mood signs.

fa”al(a) لعف : Imperfective (Jussive)

SIN

G

(you) do (m.) taf”al لعفت

(you) do (f.) taf”alyi يلعفت D

UA

L


PL

UR



Remove the first letter from the verb.

SIN

G

(you) do (m.) f”al لعف

(you) do (f.) f”alyi يلعف

DU

AL

(you) do f”alaa العف

PL

UR

(you) do (m.)

f”alwu اولعف

(you) do (f.) f”aln(a) نلعف

Add hamza ء + i (إ) in front of the verb.

fa”al(a) لعف : Imperative

SIN

G (you) do (m.) ‘if”al لعفإ

(you) do (f.) ‘if”alyi يلعفإ

DU

AL

(you) do ‘if”alaa العفإ

PL

UR

(you) do (m.) ‘if”alwu اولعفإ

(you) do (f.) ‘if”aln(a) نلعفإ

This was for the structure yaf”al(u) لعفي. Now apply the same exact steps for the structure

yaf”il(u) لعفي.


Add hamza ء + u ( أ )in front of the verb.

fa”al(a) لعف : Imperative

SIN

G

(you) write (m.) ‘uktub بتكأ

(you) write (f.) ‘uktubyi يبتكأ D

UA

L

(you) write ‘uktubaa ابتكأ

PL

UR

(you) write (m.) ‘uktubwu اوبتكأ

(you) write (f.) ‘uktubn(a) نبتكأ

Finally, a general scheme.

Imperative Perfective

‘if”al لعفإ

لعفإ if”il“ لعف

‘uf”ul لعفأ

‘af”il لعفأ ‘af”al(a) لعفأ

fa””il لعف fa””al(a) لعف

faa”il لعاف faa”al(a) لعاف

‘infa”il لعفنإ ‘infa”al(a) لعفنإ

‘ifta”il لعتفإ ‘ifta”al(a) لعتفإ

‘if’all لعفإ ‘if”all(a) لعفإ

tafa””al لعفت tafa”al(a) لعفت

tafaa”al لعافت tafaa”al(a) لعافت

‘istaf”il لعفتسإ ‘istaf”al(a) لعفتسإ

fa”lil للعف fa”lal(a) للعف

tafa”lal للعفت tafa”lal(a) للعفت

tafay”al لعيفت tafay”al(a) لعيفت

tamaf”al لعفمت tamaf”al(a) تلعفم

‘if”alall للعفإ ‘if”alall(a) للعفإ


Doubled Verbs

Doubled verbs are verbs that have identical second and third root letters. When conjugating

doubled verbs in the imperative one would do what was done to the regular verbs. The difference

here is that trilateral doubled perfective verbs do not take a hamza ء in front of them when turned

into the imperative – except for the plural feminine conjugation.

Start from the imperfective verb in the jussive mood.

“add(a) دع “count” : Imperfective (Jussive)

SIN

G (you) count (m.) ta”udd دعت

(you) count (f.) ta”uddyi يدعت

DU

AL

(you) count ta”uddaa ادعت

PL

UR

(you) count (m.) ta”uddwu اودعت

(you) count (f.) ta”uddn(a) ندعت

Remove the first letter from the verb and that’s it – except for the plural dfeminine which

take a hamza ء.

“add(a) دع “count” : Imperative

SIN

G (you) count (m.) ”udd دع

(you) count (f.) ”uddyi يدع

DU

AL

(you) count ”uddaa ادع

PL

UR

(you) count (m.) “uddwu اودع

(you) count (f.) ”uddn(a) ندعأ

mithaal Verbs

mithaal verbs are verbs whose first original letter is a weak letter. Similarly to what was done

above, when one forms imperatives from trilateral hollow perfective verbs, one does what was

done for the regular verbs except do not add a hamza ء in front of the verb. However, this applies

only to mithaal verbs which lost their first weak letters when they were turned into the

imperfective. That is, only trilateral i verbs will not take the hamza ء.


Imperative Imperfective

(Jussive)

Perfective

promise دعو دعي دع

“id ya”id wa”ad(a)

find دحو دحي دح

jid yajid wajad(a)

come to دفو دفي دف

fid yafid wafad(a)

Hollow Verbs

Hollow verbs are verbs that have a weak letter as the second original letter. When

forming an imperative from a trilateral hollow perfective verb one does what was done

for the regular verbs except do not add a hamza ء iin front of the verb.

qaal(a) لاق “say” : Imperfective (Jussive)

SIN

G

(you) say (m.) taqul لقت

(you) say (f.) taqwulyi يلوقت

DU

AL

(you) say taqwulaa الوقت

PL

UR

(you) say (m.) taqwulwu اووقت

(you) say (f.) taquln(a) نلقت

qaal(a) لاق “say” : Imperative

SIN

G

(you) say (m.) qul لق

(you) say (f.) qwulyi يلوق

DU

AL

(you) say

qwulaa الوق

PL

UR

(you) say (m.) qwulwu اووق

(you) say (f.) quln(a) نلق


Defective Verbs

Defective verbs are verbs whose last original letter is a weak letter. Defective verbs are dealt

with just like regular verbs.

Enfolding Verbs

Enfolding verbs “enfold” the definitions of both mithaal and defective verbs. They have

two weak letters – one at the beginning and the other at the end of the root. These verbs

get the dealing of both mithaal and defective verbs. When imperatives are formed from

trilateral enfolding perfective verbs one does what was done for the regular verbs except

do not add a hamza ء in front of the verb. This applies only to i verbs which lost there

first weak letters when they were turned into the imperfective.

wafaa ىفو “is loyal” : Imperfective (Jussive)

SIN

G (you) be loyal (m.) tafi فت

(you) be loyal (f.) tafyi تيف

DU

AL

(you) be loyal tafiyaa ايفت

PL

UR

(you) be loyal (m.) tafwu اوقت

(you) be loyal (f.) tafyin(a) نيفت

wafaa ىفو “is loyal”: Imperative

SIN

G

(you) be loyal (m.)

fi

followed by other talk

ف

fih

Not followed by other talk

هف

(you) be loyal (f.) fyi يف

DU

AL

(you) be loyal fiyaa ايف

PL

UR

(you) be loyal (m.) fwu اوق

(you) be loyal (f.) fyin(a) نيف


Passive Voice

The structures that have been dealt with were in the active voice. Now let’s turn the

perfective and the imperfective active voice structures into the passive voice ones.

Passive Perfective Verbs

The general rule is that the short vowel after the first letter is changed to u and the short

vowel of the second letter is changed to i.

Active : (he) did

fa”al(a) لعف

fa”il(a) لعف

fa”ul(a) لعف

Passive : (he) was done

fu”il(a) لعف

fu”il(a) لعف

fu”il(a) لعف

Hollow Verbs

Hollow verbs are verbs that have a weak letter as the second original letter. When turning

perfective hollow verbs into passive voice, the weak letter will always be turned into a long

vowel y ي.

Active : (he) did

qaal(a) = said لاق

baa”(a) = sold عاب

naam(a) = slept مان

‘ikhtaar(a) = chose راتخإ


qyil(a) = was said ليق

byi”(a) = was sold عيب

nyim(a) = sleeping was done مين

‘ikhtyir(a) = was chosen ريتخإ


Defective Verbs

Defective verbs are verbs whose last original letter is a weak letter. When changing perfective

defective verbs into passive voice, the weak letter will always be turned into

-iy(a) ي-.

Active : (he) did

‘ataa = came to ىتأ

da”aa = called اعد

nasiy(a) = forgot يسن


‘utiy(a) = was came to يتأ

du”iy(a) = was called يعد

nusiy(a) = was forgotten يسن

Notice that if one stops talking at one of these verbs, the ending will be -iy ي- – by definition

of the long vowel. The remaining structures of perfective verbs are the following.

Active : (he) did











tafa”lal(a) للعفت

tafay”al(a) لعيفت

tamaf”al(a) لعفمت



Additional rules for forming the passive of these structures are:

Long vowel ‘alef aa ا will be turned to wu و.

For structures which begin with a ta- ت, the second letter will also have to be

followed by an u.

For structures which begin with an ‘i- إ, the third letter will also have to be

followed by an u.


‘uf”il(a) لعفأ

fu””il(a) لعف

fwu”il(a) لعوف

‘unfu”al(a) لعفنأ

‘uftu”al(a) لعتفأ

‘ufull(a) لعفأ

tufu”il(a) لعفت

tufwu”il(a) لعوفت

‘ustuf”il(a) لعفتسأ

fu”lil(a) للعف

tufu”lil(a) للعفت

tufuy”il(a) لعيفت

tumuf”il(a) لعفمت

‘uf”ulill(a) للعفأ

Tenses for the Passive Perfective Verb

The passive perfective verb is used in the following tenses.

1. Simple Past

لعف

fu”il(a)

= (he) was done

Translation: he was done


2. Anterior Past

ناك لعف

kaan(a) fu”il(a)

= (he) was was done

Translation: he had been done

3. Anterior Future

نوكيس لعف

sa-yakwun(u) fu”il(a)

= (he) will be was done

Translation: he will be done

4. Perfect Present

دق لعف

qad fu”il(a)

= (he) has been done

Translation: he has been done

5. Perfect Past

ناك دق لعف

kaan(a) qa) fu”il(a)

= (he) was has been done

Translation: he had been done

6. Perfect Future

نوكس دق لعف

sa-yakwun(u) qad fu”il(a)

= (he) will be has been done

Translation: he will have been done


Passive Imperfective Verbs

The general rule is that the short vowel after the first letter be changed to u and the short vowel

after the second letter be changed to a. This applies to all three moods.

Active : (he) does

yaf”al لعفي

yaf”il لعفي

yaf”ul لعفي

Passive : (he) is (being) done

yuf”al لعفي

yuf”al لعفي

yuf”al لعفي

Hollow Verbs

Hollow verbs are verbs that have a weak letter as the second original letter. When turning

imperfective hollow verbs into passive voice, the weak letter will always be turned into a long

vowel aa ا.

Active : (he) does

yaqwul = says لوقي

yabyi” = sells عيبي

yanaam = sleeps ماني

yakhtaar = chooses راتخي


yuqwul = is (being) said لاقي

yubaa” = is (being) sold عابي

yunaam = sleeping is (being) done ماني

yukhtaar = is (being) chosen راتخي


Defective Verbs

Defective verbs are verbs whose last original letter is a weak letter. When changing

imperfective defective verbs into the passive voice, the weak letter will always be turned into aa ا.

Active : (he) does

ya’tyi = comes to يتأي

yad”wu = calls وعدي

yansaa = forgets ىسني


yu’taa = is (being) came to ىتؤي

yud”aa = is (being) called ىعدي

yunsaa = is (being) forgotten ىسني

Changing the rest of the imperfective structures does not require any additional rules.

Active : (he) did

yaf”al لعفي

yaf”il لعفي

yaf”ul لعفي

yuf”il لعفي

yufa””il لعفي

yufaa”il لعافي

yanfa”il لعفني

yafta”il لعتفي

yaf”all لعفي

yatafa””al لعفتي

yatafaa”al لعافتي

yastaf”il لعفتسي

yufa”lil للعفي

yatafa”lal للعفتي


yuf”al لعفي

yufa””al لعفي

yufaa”il لعافي



yunfa”al لعفني

yufta”al لعتفي

yuf”all لعفي

yutafa””al لعفتي

yutafaa”al لعافتي

yustaf”al لعفتسي

yufa”lal للعفي

yutafa”lal للعفتي

Adding the future tesne particles sa- -س or sawfa فوس will not change anything in these

structures.

Tenses for the Passive Imperfective Verb

The passive imperfective verb is used in the following tenses.

1. Simple Present

لعفي

yuf”al(u)

= (he) is (being) done

Translation: it is (being) done

2. Simple Future

لعفيس

sa-yuf”al(u)

= (he) will be done

Translation: it will be done

فوس لعفي

sawfa yuf”al(u)

= (he) will be done

Translation: it will be done


3. Progressive Present

لعفي

yuf’al(u)

= (he) is being done

Translation: it is being done

4. Progressive Past

لعفناك

kaan(a) yuf’al(u)

= (he) was being done

Translation: it was being done

5. Progressive Future

نوكيس لعف

sa-yakwun(u) yuf’al(u)

= (he) will be being done

Translation: it will be (being) done

فوس نوكي لعف

sawfa yakwun(u) yuf’al(u)

= (he) will be being done

Translation: it will be (being) done


VII. PRONOUNS

Pronouns in Arabic belong to the category of “nouns.” Therefore, everything that applies to

nouns will apply to pronouns. Pronouns have genders, numbers and grammatical case. Pronouns

are always definite nouns. Pronouns in Arabic are in four categories:

Subject Pronouns

o Separate Subject Pronouns

o Attached Subject Pronouns

Object Pronouns

o Separate Object Pronouns

o Attached Object Pronouns

Separate Subject Pronouns

Separate Subject Pronouns

SIN

GU

LA

R

I ‘anaa انأ

you (m.) ‘ant(a) تنأ

you (f.) ‘anti تنأ

he huw(a) وه

she hiy(a) يه

DU

AL

you ‘antumaa امتنأ

they humaa اه

PL

UR

AL

we (dual/pural) naHn(u) نحن

you (m.) ‘antum متنأ

you (f.) ‘antunn(a) نتنأ

they (m.) hum مه

they (f.) hunn(a) نه

In Arabic, a mixed group of males and females will always be referred to by the plural

masculine pronouns or conjunctions.

Separate pronouns work similarly to the English ones.

انأ دمحأ

‘anaa ‘aHmad(u)

= I (am) Ahmad

Translation: I am Ahmad


Proper names must have noonation, but ‘aHmad دمحأ cannot be noonated because it belongs

to the “forbidden to noonation” words – which cannot be noonated.

تنأ فرعت

‘ant(a) ta”rif(u)

= you know

Translation: you know

نحن انه

naHn(u) hunaa

= we (are) here

Translation: we are here

ʕ نم مه

man hum ?

= who (are) they?

Translation: who are they?

One important difference from English is that separate subject pronouns can be omitted from

sentences in Arabic in many situations. This is because nominal declensions of the verbs make it

clear who the subject is – or as in Arabic grammar, those declensions are themselves subject

pronouns as will be seen shortly.

ديرأ ةقيقحلا

‘ureed(u) (a)l-Haqyiqa(ta)

= (I) want the truth

Translation: I want the truth

ʕ اذام لعفنس

maathaa sa-naf”al(u) ?

= what will (we) do?

Translation: what will we do?

Pronouns of Separation

Thanks to the many word declensions in Arabic – which often indicate the gender and the

number of the subject – separate subject pronouns have really little significance in regard to the

syntax of Arabic sentences. This is actually the case for all older languages as well – such as

Latin. However, separate subject pronouns are still used in Arabic. They are most often used

redundantly for emphasizing either the subject or the object of the sentence. Sometimes, however,

they can be important to clarify the meaning of a sentence – this will usually be when they are

used in present tense “be” sentences.


Separate subject pronouns are called “pronouns of separation” when they are used

without grammatical necessity. This will be the case for separate subject pronouns most of the

time. Pronouns of separation will be used in the following situations.

1. In Present Tense “Be” Sentences. This is a vital usage. If the subject and the

predicate of a present tense “be” sentence were both definite words, the meaning of the phrase

would be ambiguous.

بإميهار ريدملا انه

‘ibraahyim(u) (a)l-mudyir(u) hunaa

= Ibrahim, the manager, (is) here

= Ibrahim (is) the manager here

This dual meaning is because the word al-mudyir ريدملا “the director” can be either an

adjective or a predicate. So, to make a distinction – a separation – between the two, it is usual to

add a separate subject pronoun in place of the non-existing “be” in present tense “be” sentences –

that is, between the subject and the predicate.

ميهاربإ وه ريدملا انه

‘ibraahyim(u) huw(a) (a)l-mudyir(u) hunaa

= Ibrahim he (is) manager here

Translation: Ibrahim is the manager here

A similar ambiguity can also occur when the subject and the predicate are both indefinite

words, but it is very uncommon in Arabic for the subject of a “be” sentence to be an indefinite

word. That is, a sentence of the type “a man is here” virtually would not be used in Arabic –

instead such sentences will often be expressed via demonstratives, such as “there is a man here.”

داعس يه تخأ نيمساي

su”aad(u) hiy(a) ‘ukht(u) yaasamyin(a)

= Su’ad she (is) (the) sister (of) Jasmine

Translation: Su’ad is Jasmine’s sister

Both su”aad داعس “Su’ad” and yaasmyin داعس “Jasmine” are “forbidden to noonation;” hence

the irregular case signs. hiya يه “she” is used to disambiguate from “Su’ad, Jasmine’s sister, …”

but clearly it is not a must in this case because there was nothing after the clause ‘ukht(u)

yaasamyin(a) تخأ نيمساي “Jasmine’s sister.” So, one can say that the use of the separation pronoun

is optional in this case.

طابرلا يه ةمصاع برغملا

ar-rabaaT(u) hiy(a) “aaSima(tu) (a)l-maghrib(i)

= Rabat she (is) (the) capital (of) Morocco

Translation: Rabat is the capital of Morocco


hiya يه “she” is used to disambiguate from “Rabat, the capital of Morocco, …” Again, the

use of the separation pronoun is optional here.

2. Between verbs and Coordinators. The pronouns of separation are often used

between verbs and coordinator conjunctions.

تهذ و ادمحم

thahab(a) wa muHammada(n)

= (he) went with Muhammad

Translation: he and Muhammad went

Here the separate subject pronoun allowed the coordinator wa و to have the meaning of

“and,” and the noun after the coordinator was in the nominative case again. However, it is still

possible for wa و to mean “with” in this sentence – one just needs to change the case as in the

following sentence.

تهذ وه و ادمحم

thahab(a) huw(a) wa muHammada(n)

= went he with Muhammad

Translation: he went with Muhammad

So, it all depends on the case sign.

اوبهذإ و مكاخأ

‘ithhabwu wa ‘akhaakum

= (you) go with (the) brother (of) you

Translation: go with your brother

‘akhaa ىخأ “brother” is one of the “six nouns” that take irregular case signs.

اوبهذإ متنأ و مكوخأ

‘ithhabwu ‘antum wa ‘akhwukum

= go you and (the) brother (of) you

Translation: go you and your brother

اوبهذإ متنأ و مكاخأ

‘ithhabwu ‘antum wa ‘akhaakum

= go you with (the) brother (of) you

Translation: go with your brother


3. For Emphasis. Anywhere other than in the two situations just mentioned, the

pronouns of separation can be used, but they are not to be used for disambiguation – rather for

emphasizing the subject or the object..

ناك انه

kaana hunaa

= (he) was here

Translation: he was here

-وه ناك انه

huwa kaana hunaa

= he was here

Thanslation: he was here (emphasis)

نوفرعي باوبلا

ya”rifwun(a) (a)l-jawaab(a)

= (they) know the answer

= they know the answer

مه نوفرعي باوبلا

hum ya”rifwun(a) (a)l-jawaab(a)

= they know the answer

Translation: they know the answer (emphasis)

مق

qum

= (you) get up

= get up

مق تنأ

qum ‘ant(a)

= get up you

Translation: you get up! (emphasis)


Attached Subject Pronouns

These are contained within the declensions that appear at the end of verbs – both perfective

and imperfective.

1. Perfective Verbs. The declensions of perfective verbs are composed of attached subject

pronouns and of marker letters. There are no mood signs for the perfective verbs

because these are “built” words that have only one, unchangeable mood.

Attached Subject Pronouns – Prefective Verbs

Marker Pronoun Declension

1st Person 1

st Person Marker

taa’ of the actor -t(u) ت-

naa of the actors -naa ان-

2nd

Person

Masc. Sing. Marker taa’ of the actor -t(a) ت-

Fem Sing. Marker taa’ of the actor -ti ت-

Dual Marker taa’ of the actors -tumaa امي-

Masc. Plur. Marker taa’ of the actors -tum مت-

Fem. Plur. Marker taa’ of the actors -tunn(a) نت-

3rd

Person

Dual Masc. Marker ‘alef of the two -aa ا-

Dual Fem. Marker ‘alef of the two -ataa ات-

Masc. Plur. Marker waaw of the group -wu او-

Fem. Plur. Marker noon of the group -n(a) ن-

2. Imperfective Verbs. Imperfective verb conjugations are two types – the “five verbs”

which have suffixes attached to the stem verb, and the rest of the conjugations which have only

prefixes. The suffixes of the “five verbs” are composed of attached subject pronouns followed by

a letter noon ن – this noon is a sign only of the indicative mood and it will not appear in the other

moods. There is one exception to what has been mentioned so far – that is the feminine plural

conjugations. These are “built” words that have an unchangeable suffix that is composed of a

single pronoun letter. The attached subject pronouns of the imperfective verbrs follow.

Attached Subject Pronouns – Imprefective Verbs

Mood Sign Pronoun Declension

Indicative Mood yaa’ of the female vocative -yin(a) ني-

Indicative Mood ‘alef of the dual (two) -aan(i) نا-

Indicative Mood waaw of the group -wun(a) نو-

Indicative Mood noon of the women -n(a) ن-


Hiding Pronouns

Since not all verbs have declensions that can be deemed subject pronouns, Arab grammarians

postulated that there should be an invisible “hiding pronoun” after each verb that is without a

declension.

Hiding Pronoun Verb Without Attached Subject Pronoun

(he) (وه) Past – 3rd

person sing. masc. لعف

(she) (يه) Past – 3rd

person sing. fem. تلعف

(I) (انأ) Present – 1st person sing. لعفأ

(you) (تنأ) Present – 2nd

person sing. masc. لعفت

(he) (وه) Present – 3rd

person sing. masc. لعفي

(she) (يه) Present – 3rd

person sing. fem. لعفت

(we) (نحن) Present – 3rd

person sing. plur.dual لعفن

The -ta ت- at the end of the 3rd

person singular feminine past verb is not an attached subject

pronoun—it is a feminine marker. If a separate subject pronoun appears after a verb that has an

attached subject pro0noun, it will be an emphatic pronoun—but not a subject. In Arabic grammar,

the 1st and 2

nd person hiding pronouns are said to be “obligatory hiding pronouns”—there will

always be a hiding pronoun after 1st and 2

nd person conjugations of verbs without attached subject

pronouns. And if a separate subject pronoun appears after them, it will be an emphatic pronoun—

but not a subject. On the other hand, the 3rd

person hiding pronouns are ‘optionally hiding

pronouns.” There will be no hiding pronoun if a separate pronoun appears after 3rd

person

conjugations of verbs without attached subject pronouns.

Separate Object Pronouns

These can be used both as direct and indirect object pronouns. The former use is rare in the

modern language, whereas the latter is very common – even in the colloquial spoken dialects.

Separate Object Pronouns

SIN

GU

LA

R

me ‘iyyaay(a) يايإ

you (m.) ‘iyyaak(a) كايإ

you (f.) ‘iyyaaki كايإ

him ‘iyyaah(u) هايإ

her ‘iyyaahaa اهايإ

DU

AL

you ‘iyyaakumaa امكايإ

them ‘iyyaahumaa امهايإ


PL

UR

AL

us (dual/pural) ‘iyyaanaa انايإ

you (m.) ‘iyyaakum مكايإ

you (f.) ‘iyyaakunn(a) نكايإ

them (m.) ‘iyyaahum مهايإ

them (f.) ‘iyyaahunn(a) نهايإ

Direct Object

When separate object pronouns serve as direct object pronouns they must come before the

verb. This usage is mostly found in classical writings.

كايإ دبعن

‘iyyaak(a) na”bud(u)

= you (we) worship

Translation: we worship you

Separate object pronouns can some after the verb if they are preceded by a conjunction word.

هتركش و مهايإ

shakartuh(u) wa ‘iyyaahum

= (I) thanked him and them

Translation: I thanked him and them

Separate object pronouns come also after the verb if they are preceded by the word ‘illaa ىلإ

“except.”

ال دبعن ىلإ هايإ

laa na”bud(u) ‘illaa ‘iyyaah(u)

= not (we) worship (anybody) except him

Translation: we worship him solely

Note: This sentence uses the negation + exclusion style.

Finally, separate object pronouns can be used in a warning style.

كايإ و باهذلا !

‘iyyaak(a) wa (ath-thahaab(a))

= (I warn) you of going!

Translation: I warn you not to go!


Warning Style

(I warn) you of …

sing. masc. ‘iyyaak(a) wa … h(u) كايإ و…ه

sing. fem. ‘iyyaak(i) wa … h(u) كايإ و…ه

dual ‘iyyaakumaa wa … h(u) اكايإ و…ه

plur. masc. ‘iyyaakum wa … h(u) مكايإ و…ه

plur. masc. ‘iyyaakunn(a) wa … h(u) نكايإ و…ه

Indirect Object

Separate object pronouns serve as indirect object pronouns only when the direct object is an

attached object pronoun.

ينطعأ اهايإ

‘a”Tinyi ‘iyyaahaa

= give me her

Translation: give it to me

The attached object pronoun -nee ين- “me” serves as the direct object here, while the separate

object pronoun serves as the indirect object.

هايإ كيدهأ

‘iyyaah(u) ‘uhdyik(a)

= him (I) present you

Translation: I give it to you as a present

Here, the separate object pronoun serves again as an indirect object, but it comes before the

verb. The direct object is the attached object pronoun -k(a) ك- “you.”


Attached Object Pronouns

These are the object pronouns that are used most often. They can serve both as direct and

indirect object pronouns.


SIN

GU

LA

R

me -yi ي-

you (m.) -k(a) ك-

you (f.) -k(i) ك-

him ‘h(u) ه-

her -haa اه-

DU

AL

you -kumaa امك-

them -humaa امه-

PL

UR

AL

us (dual/pural) -naa ان-

you (m.) -kum مك-

you (f.) -kunn(a) نك-

them (m.) -hum مه-

them (f.) -hunn(a) نه-


Marker Pronoun Declension

1st Person

Sing. Marker yaa’ of the speaker -yi ي-

Plur. Marker naa of the speakers -naa ان-

2nd

Person

Masc. Sing. Marker kaaf of the vocative -k(a) ك-

Fem Sing. Marker kaaf of the vocative -k(i) ك-

Dual Marker kaaf of the vocative -kumaa امك-

Masc. Plur. Marker kaaf of the vocative -kum مك-

Fem. Plur. Marker kaaf of the vocative -kunn(a) نك-

3rd

Person

Masc. Sing. Marker haa’ of the absence -h(u) ه-

Fem. Sing. Marker haa’ of the absence -haa اه-

Dual Marker haa’ of the absence -humaa امه-

Masc. Plur. Marker haa’ of the absence -hum هم-

Fem. Plur. Marker haa’ of the absence -hunn(a) نه-


I. Indirect Object

This is often when the attached object pronoun is attached to verbs.

كبحأ

‘auHibbuk(i)

= (I) love you (f., s.)

Translation: I love you

كبحأ

‘auHibbuk(a)

= (I) love you (m., s.)

Translation: I love you

اهلعف

fa”alahaa

= (he) did her

Translation: he did it

هملعاس

sa-‘u”allimuh(u)

= (I) will teach him

Translation: I will teach him

مهفرعن

na”rifuhum

= (we) know them (m., p.)

Translation: we know them

اهاتلاق

qaalataahaa

= (they) (f., d.) said her

Translation: they said it

A noon ن will be prefixed to the attached first person singular object pronoun -yi ي- to

become -nyi ين- in the following situations:

When it is attached to verbs.

When it is attached to either one of the two paricle min نم “from” and “an

”.about“ نع

This noon ن is called the “noon of protection.”


ينودعاس !

saa”idwunyi

= (you) (m., p.) help me

Translation: help me!

يننفرعيس

sa-ya”rifnanyi

= (they) (f., p.) will know me

Translation: they will know me

An additional waaw و will also be prefixed to the same pronoun when it is attached to a

second person masculine plural perfective verb. So, the -yi ي- pronoun will become

-wunyi ينو-.

ينومتيأر

ra’aytumwunyi

= (you) (m., p.) saw me

Translation: you saw me

Attachment Form of Pronoun “me”

to nouns and most particle -yi ي-

to verbs and to the pasrticles -nyi ين-

to second person masculine plural pefective verbs -wunyi ينو-

Other changeable pronouns are the third person pronouns. Most Arabs of ancient times didn’t

like the following combinations:

ihu

yihu

ayhu

When these combinations occur, the -hu ه of the attached pronoun will be changed to -hi ه.

Another way to say this is that the -hu ه will become -hi ه if the pronoun is preceded by a short

vowel i or a consonant letter yaa’ ي.

هطعأ

‘a”Tih(i)

(you) (m., s.) give him

Translation: give him


مهيطعأ

‘a”Tyihim

= (you) (f., s.) give them (m., p.)

Translation: give them

نهيري

yuryihinn(a)

= (he) shows them (f., p.)

Translation: he shows them

Forms of Third Person Attached Object Pornouns

Preceded by i, yi or ay Regular

-hi(i) ه- -h(u) ه-

-haa اه- -haa اه-

-himaa امه- -humaa امه-

-him مه- -hum مه-

-hinn(a) نه- -hunn(a) نه-

The attached object pronouns will also be in the direct object case when they are attached to

the verb-like particles. One of the reasons that these particles are designated like that is because

they can be attached to object pronouns.

ينتيل تنك كانه

laytanyi kunt(u) hunaak(a)

= it is wished if me was there

Translation: I wish that I were there

layt(a) تيل is a verb-like particle that is used for wishing. Being verb-like, it takes the form -

nyi ين- of the first person singular attached object pronoun – me. The perfective verb kunt(u) تنك

is used because perfective verbs in Arabic can be used as subjunctive verbs. This is similar to

English where the past form is also the subjunctive.

هنإ يف لخادلا

‘innah(u)fyi (a)l-daakhil(i)

= it is true that him in the inside

Translation: he is inside


نكنكل دق نتبهذ

lakinnakunn(a) qad thahabtunn(a)

= but you (.f, p.) have gone

Translation: but you have gone

اهلعل رطمت مويلا

‘a”allahaa tumTer(u) (a)l-yawm(a)

= it is hoped that her will rain today

Translation: I hope it will rain today

As for the first person singular attached object pronoun “me” and the verb-like particles,

these particles can all take the two forms interchangeably – except for layt(a) تيل to which it is

highly recommended that it take the form -nyi ين- only.

Forms of Verb-Like Partcicles with the First Person Singular

Attached Object Pronoun

‘innyi ينإ ‘innanyi يننإ

‘annyi ينأ ‘annanyi يننأ

ka’annyi يناك ka’annanyi ينناك

lakinnyi ينكل lakinnanyi يننكل

la”allyi ينعل la”allanyi يننعل

--- --- laytanyi ينتيل

II. Indirect Object

Attached object pronouns serve as indirect objects by attachment to nouns (to form genitive

constructions), to prepositions or to verbs along with other pronouns.

Indirect Objects of Verbs

This is an archaic usage. In the modern language the indirect – or second – object of a verb would

usually be referred to by a separate object pronoun.

هكتيطعأ

‘a”Taytukah(u)

= (I) gave you him

Translation: I gave it to you


اهينومتلأس

sa’altumwunyihaa

= (you) (m., p.) asked me her

Translation: you asked me for it

or: you asked me about it

An important note here is that the order of pronouns attached to the verb does not depend on

which one is direct object and which one is indirect. Rather, the first person pronouns will always

come before the second person pronouns in order – and these will always come before the third

person pernouns.

Object Pronouns Attached to Nouns

Object pronouns will be attached to nouns to form genitive constructions.

1. Object Pronouns Attached to Singular Nouns

1) ar-raf” عفرلا case is the nominative or the subject case.

kitaab(un) باتك “a book”

Meaning Literal Translation Example

my book kitaabyi = (the) book (of) me يباتك

your book (m., s.) kitaabuk(a) = (the) book (of) you كباتك

your book (f., s.) kitaabuk(i) = (the) book (of) you كباتك

his book kitaabuh(u) = (the) book (of) him هباتك

her book kitaabuhaa = (the) book (of) her اهباتك

your book (dual) kitaabukumaa = (the) book (of) you اتكامكب

their book (dual) kitaabuhumaa = (the) book (of) them امهباتك

our book kitaabunaa = (the) book (of) us انباتك

your book (m., p.) kitaabukum = (the) book (of) you مكباتك

your book (f., p.) kitaabukunna = (the) book (of) you نكباتك

their book (m., p.) kitaabuhum = (the) book (of) them مهباتك

their book (f., p.) kitaabuhunn(a) = (the) book (of) them نهباتك

Remember that the word forming the first part of a genitive construction is always a definite

word. Also note that the pronoun -yi ي- “me” to a noun will not allow the case sign to appear – it

will be called “estimated” between the noun and the pronoun.


Attachment of First Person Singular Object Pronoun to Nouns Ending in a Long

Vowel

Long vowels at the end of nouns will turn the -yi or -iy into a -y(a). The same transformation

will also occur when adding the -yi to dual and masculine plural nouns.

اصعي

“aSaay(a)

= (the) stick (of) me

Translation: my stick (cane)

يماحم

muHaamyiy(a) = muHaamiyy(a)

= (the) attorney (of) me

Translation: my attorney

The consonant -y is followed by a short vowel -a in this case in order to prevent two still

letters from directly following each other – which is a bad thing in Arabic.

2) an-naSb بصنلا case is the accusative, dative or vocative cases.

kitaab(an) باتك “a book”



your book (m., s.) kitaabak(a) = (the) book (of) you كباتك

your book (f., s.) kitaabak(i) = (the) book (of) you كباتك

his book kitaabah(u) = (the) book (of) him هباتك

her book kitaabahaa = (the) book (of) her اهباتك

your book (dual) kitaabakumaa = (the) book (of) you امكباتك

their book (dual) kitaabahumaa = (the) book (of) them امهباتك

our book kitaabanaa = (the) book (of) us انباتك

your book (m., p.) kitaabakum = (the) book (of) you مكباتك

your book (f., p.) kitaabakunna = (the) book (of) you نكباتك

their book (m., p.) kitaabahum = (the) book (of) them مهباتك

their book (f., p.) kitaabahunn(a) = (the) book (of) them نهباتك


3) al-jarr بصنلا case is the ablative or the genitive cases. The regular case sign for this case is

a short vowel -i – which is one of the three sounds (-i, -yi and -ay) that lead to bad combinations

with third person pronouns.

kitaab(in) باتك “a book”



your book (m., s.) kitaabik(a) = (the) book (of) you كباتك

your book (f., s.) kitaabik(i) = (the) book (of) you كباتك

his book kitaabih(i) = (the) book (of) him هباتك

her book kitaabihaa = (the) book (of) her اهباتك

your book (dual) kitaabikumaa = (the) book (of) you امكباتك

their book (dual) kitaabihimaa = (the) book (of) them امهباتك

our book kitaabinaa = (the) book (of) us انباتك

your book (m., p.) kitaabikum = (the) book (of) you مكباتك

your book (f., p.) kitaabikunna = (the) book (of) you نكباتك

their book (m., p.) kitaabihim = (the) book (of) them مهباتك

their book (f., p.) kitaabihinn(a) = (the) book (of) them نهباتك

2. Object Pronouns Attached to Dual Nouns

In the genitive construction section, it was noted that the noun declensions which have noon

when they are the first part of a ن at their ends – dual and masculine plural – must lose the noon ن

genitive construction. This is still true in this case. As mentioned above, the form -y(a) of the first

person singular pronoun must be used instead of the standard -yi when adding the pronoun to dual

or masculine plural nouns.

1) ar-raf” عفرلا Case

kitaabaan(i) ناباتك “two books”


my two books kitaabaay(a) = (the) two books (of) me ياباتك

your two books (m., s.) kitaabaak(a) = (the) two books (of) you كاباتك

your two books (f., s.) kitaabaak(i) = (the) two books (of) you كاباتك

his two books kitaabaah(u) = (the) two books (of) him هاباتك

her two books kitaabaahaa = (the) two books (of) her اهاباتك

your two books (dual) kitaabaakumaa = (the) two books (of) you امكاباتك

their two books (dual) kitaabaahumaa = (the) two books (of) them امهاباتك


kitaabaan(i) ناباتك “two books”


our two books kitaabaanaa = (the) two books (of) us اناباتك

your two books (m., p.) kitaabaakum = (the) two books (of) you مكاباتك

your two books (f., p.) kitaabaakunna = (the) two books (of) you نكاباتك

their two books (m., p.) kitaabaahum = (the) two books (of) them مهاباتك

their two books (f., p.) kitaabaahunn(a) = (the) two books (of) them نهاباتك

2) an-naSb بصنلا and al-jarr بصنلا Cases

kitaabayn(i) نيباتك “two books”


my two books kitaabyay(a) = (the) two books (of) me يباتك

your two books (m., s.) kitaabayk(a) = (the) two books (of) you كيباتك

your two books (f., s.) kitaabayk(i) = (the) two books (of) you كيباتك

his two books kitaabay(i) = (the) two books (of) him هيباتك

her two books kitaabayhaa = (the) two books (of) her اهيباتك

your two books (dual) kitaabaykumaa = (the) two books (of) you امكيباتك

their two books (dual) kitaabayhimaa = (the) two books (of) them مهيباتكا

our two books kitaabaynaa = (the) two books (of) us انيباتك

your two books (m., p.) kitaabaykum = (the) two books (of) you مكيباتك

your two books (f., p.) kitaabaykunna = (the) two books (of) you نكيباتك

their two books (m., p.) kitaabayhim = (the) two books (of) them مهيباتك

their two books (f., p.) kitaabayhinn(a) = (the) two books (of) them نهيباتك

3. Object Pronouns Attached to Masculine Plural Nouns

The noon ن at the end of masculine plural nouns must go away when they form the first part

of a gentive construction. The form -y(a) of the first person singular pronoun must be used

instead of -yi.

1) ar-raf” عفرلا Case. The -wu و- signof this case will be turned to -yi ي- when attaching

the first person singular pronoun -yi to the noun. Euphony is the only reason behind this

transformation and it does not mean that the case sign has changed – nor has the case of the noun

which is still the subject case.


mu”allimwun(a) نوملعم

mu”allimwuy(a) يوملعم

mu”allimyiy(a) يملعم

mu”allimwun(a) نوملعم “teachers”


my teachers mu”allimwuyi = (the) teachers (of) me يملعم

your teachers (m., s.) mu”allimwuk(a) = (the) teachers (of) you كوملعم

your teachers (f., s.) mu”allimwuk(i) = (the) teachers (of) you كوملعم

his teachers mu”allimwuh(u) = (the) teachers (of) him هوملعم

her teachers mu”allimwuhaa = (the) teachers (of) her اهوملعم

your teachers (dual) mu”allimwukumaa = (the) teachers (of) you امكوملعم

their teachers (dual) mu”allimwuhumaa = (the) teachers (of) them امهوملعم

our teachers mu”allimwunaa = (the) teachers (of) us انوملعم

your teachers (m., p.) mu”allimwukum = (the) teachers (of) you مكوملعم

your teachers (f., p.) mu”allimwukunna = (the) teachers (of) you نكوملعم

their teachers (m., p.) mu”allimwuhum = (the) teachers (of) them مهوملعم

their teachers (f., p.) mu”allimwuhunn(a) = (the) teachers (of) them نهوملعم

2) an-naSb بصنلا and al-jarr بصنلا Cases. In these cases the sign will be -yi ي-, which will

lead to bad combinations with the third person pronouns and thus there will be changes.

mu”allimyin(a) نيملعم “teachers”


my teachers mu”allimyiy(a) = (the) teachers (of) me يملعم

your teachers (m., s.) mu”allimyik(a) = (the) teachers (of) you كيملعم

your teachers (f., s.) mu”allimyik(i) = (the) teachers (of) you كيملعم

his teachers mu”allimyih(i) = (the) teachers (of) him هيملعم

her teachers mu”allimyihaa = (the) teachers (of) her ايملعم

your teachers (dual) mu”allimyikumaa = (the) teachers (of) you امكيملعم

their teachers (dual) mu”allimyihimaa = (the) teachers (of) them امهيملعم

our teachers mu”allimyinaa = (the) teachers (of) us انيملعم

your teachers (m., p.) mu”allimyikum = (the) teachers (of) you مكيملعم

your teachers (f., p.) mu”allimyikunna = (the) teachers (of) you نكيملعم


mu”allimyin(a) نيملعم “teachers”


their teachers (m., p.) mu”allimyihim = (the) teachers (of) them مهيملعم

their teachers (f., p.) mu”allimyihinn(a) = (the) teachers (of) them نهيملعم

Feminine plural and irregular plural nouns will behave just like regular nouns when attached

to object pronouns

Forms of the First Person Singular Object Pronoun With Attachment to Nouns

Singular Nouns

not ending with long vowel

-yi

-y(a)

in Classical Arabic (Koran)

ending with long vowel -y(a)

Dual Nouns -y(a)

Plural Nouns -y(a)

4. Object Pronouns Attached to Noun Prepositions

Many prepositions in Arabic are nouns, and they can be attached to pronouns to form genitive

constructions just like any other nouns.

in front of him ‘amaamah(u)

(in) (the) front (of) him همامأ

behind her khalfahaa)

(in) (the) back (of) her اهفلخ

underneath us taHtanaa

(in) (the) underneath (of) us انتحت

after you (m., p.) ba”dakum

(in) (the) “after” (of) you مكدعب

before them (f., p.) ‘qablahunn(a))

(in) (the) f”before” (of) them نهلبق

Object Pronouns Attached to Particles

Particles to which object pronouns can be attached are tiwo types—the verb-like particles

and the ablative paricles. The ablative particles are prepositions. Pronouns attached to them will

be—just like any other noun after an ablative particle—in the ablative case.


bi- ب- “in / by / with”

Meaning Example

in / by / with me byi يب

in / by / with you (m., s.) bik(a) كب

in / by / with you (f., s.) bik(i) كب

in / by / with him bih(i) هب

in / by / with her bihaa اهب

in / by / with you (dual) bikumaa امكب

in / by / with them (dual) bihimaa امهب

in / by / with us binaa هنب

in / by / with you (m., p.) bikum مكب

in / by / with you (f., p.) bikunn(a) نكب

in / by / with them (m., p.) bikhim مهب

in / by / with them (f., p.) bihinn(a) نهب

Remember that the -hu of the third person pronouns must be turned to -hi when the pronoun

is preceded by one of the sounds -i, -yi and -ay.

fyi يف “in”

Meaning Example

in me fyiy(a) يف

in you (m., s.) fyiyk(a) كيف

in you (f., s.) fyiyk(i) كيف

in him fyiyh(i) هيف

in her fyiyhaa اهيف

in you (dual) fyiykumaa امكيف

in them (dual) fyiyhimaa امهيف

in us fyiynaa هنيف

in you (m., p.) fyiykum مكيف

in you (f., p.) fyiykunn(a) نكيف

in them (m., p.) fyiyhim مهيف

in them (f., p.) fyiyhinn(a) نهب

It was previously mentioned that the two particles min نم “from” and “an نع “about” are

attached to the -nyi ين- form of the first person singular object pronoun.


min يف “in”

Meaning Example

from me minyi ينم

from you (m., s.) mink(a) كنم

from you (f., s.) mink(i) كنم

from him minh(u) هنم

from her minhaa اهنم

from you (dual) minkumaa امكنم

from them (dual) minhumaa امهنم

from us minnaa انم

from you (m., p.) minkum مكنم

from you (f., p.) minkunn(a) نكنم

from them (m., p.) minhum مهنم

from them (f., p.) minhunn(a) نهنم

“an نع “about”

Meaning Example

about me “annyi ينع

about you (m., s.) “ank(a) كنع

about you (f., s.) “ank(i) كنع

about him “anh(u) هنع

about her “anhaa اهنع

about you (dual) “ankumaa امكنع

about them (dual) “anhumaa امهنع

about us “annaa انع

about you (m., p.) “ankum مكنع

about you (f., p.) “ankunn(a) نكنع

about them (m., p.) “anhum مهنع

about them (f., p.) “anhunn(a) نهنع

The two particles ‘ilaa ىلح “to” and “alaa ىلع “on” require modification when attached to

opbject pronouns.


‘ilaa ىلإ “to”

Meaning Example

to me ‘ilayy(a) يلإ

to you (m., s.) ‘ilayk(a) كيلإ

to you (f., s.) ‘ilayk(i) كيلإ

to him ‘ilayh(i) هيلإ

to her ‘ilayhaa اهيلإ

to you (dual) ‘ilaykumaa لإامكي

to them (dual) ‘ilayhimaa امهيلإ

to us ‘ilanyaa انيلإ

to you (m., p.) ‘ilaykum مكيلإ

to you (f., p.) ‘ilaykunn(a) نكيلإ

to them (m., p.) ‘ilayhim مهيلإ

to them (f., p.) ‘ilayhinn(a) نهيلإ

“alaa ىلع “on”

Meaning Example

on me “alayy(a) يلع

on you (m., s.) “alayk(a) كيلع

on you (f., s.) “alayk(i) كيلع

on him “alayh(i) هيلع

on her “alayhaa اهيلع

on you (dual) “alaykumaa امكيلع

on them (dual) “alayhimaa امهيلع

on us “alanyaa انيلع

on you (m., p.) “alaykum مكيلع

on you (f., p.) “alaykunn(a) نكيلع

on them (m., p.) “alayhim مهيلع

on them (f., p.) “alayhinn(a) نهيلع

The last Arabic article that can be attached to pronouns is li- -ل “for / to.” This particle will be

changed to la- when attached to object pronouns.


li- -ل “for / to”

Meaning Example

for / to me lyi يل

for / to you (m., s.) lak(a) كل

for / to you (f., s.) lak(i) كل

for / to him lah(u) هل

for / to her lahaa اهي

for / to you (dual) lakumaa امكل

for / to them (dual) lahumaa امهل

for / to us lanaa انل

for / to you (m., p.) lakum مكل

for / to you (f., p.) lakunn(a) نكل

for / to them (m., p.) lahum مهل

for / to them (f., p.) lahunn(a) نهل

Why so many variations in pronouns? This is because classical Arabic was made out of many

different dialects of Arabic which were spoken in pre-Islamic Arabia. The irregularities seen with

pronouns reflect the differences that existed between these dialects. The differences can still be

seen today in the spoken dialects of Arabic, whose diversity was primarily determined by the

diversity of the dialects of old Arab tribes.

Demonstratives

Demonstratives in English are “this,” “that,” “these,” and “those.” In Arabic, demonstratives

are nouns, thus they have the characteristics of gender, number and case. There are so many

demonstratives in classical Arabic that only the ones that are usually used in modern life are

covered. Demonstratives are called in Arabic “nouns of pointing.”

1. Near Demonstratives

The basic forms of demonstratives are the near demonstratives. All demonstratives are “built”

words – do not change form with changing in grammatical case – except for the dual

demonstratives which are case inflected.


Demonstratives (Basic Forms)

this (m., s.) thaa اذ

this (f., s.) thyi يذ

these (m. dual)

thaan(i)

(subject) ناذ

thayn(i)

(object) نيذ

these (f. dual)

taan(i)

(subject) نات

tayn(i)

(object) نيات

these (plur.) ‘ulaa’(i) * ءالوأ

‘ulaa * ىلوأ

* The waaw و is silent.

The feminine singular demonstrative has so many variants in the classical language of which

none are used in the modern language. However, some of them may be heard in some spoken

dialects today.

Demonstratives for the

Feminine Singular

(Basic Forms)

“this”

thee يذ

thih هذ

thih(i) هذ

thihyi يهذ

thaat(u) تاذ

taa ات

tyi يت

tih هت

tih(i) هت

tihyi يهت

All of these feminine singular demonstratives are also “built” words – except for thaat(u) تاذ

which is a really obsolete demomnstrative.


It is common to add a haa- -ه prefix to demonstratives. This prefix will change nothing in the

meaning. Note that the haa- lacks an extended ‘alef ا in writing -ه when attached to most

demonstratives. This haa- is called the “haa- of attention.”

Demonstratives Attached to Attention haa-

(Basic Forms)

this (m., s.) haathaa اذه

this (f., s.) haathyi يذه

these (m. dual)

haathaan(i)

(subject) ناذه

haathayn(i)

(object) نيذه

these (f. dual)

haataan(i)

(subject) ناته

haatayn(i)

(object) نياته

these (plur.) haa‘ulaa’(i) ءالوه

‘ulaa ىلوأ cannot take the haa- prefix, and this prefix takes a different figure haa اه when

attached to the feminine dual demonstratives.

Four of the feminine singular demonstratives can be prefized with attention haa-.

haathyi يذه

haathih هذه

haathih(i) هذه

haathihyi يهذه

Now to the bottom line – the near demonstratives that are really used in modern standard

Arabic are the following.


Commonly Used Near Demonstratives

this (m., s.) haathaa اذه

this (f., s.) haathih(i) هذه

these (m. dual)

haathaan(i)

(subject) ناذه

haathayn(i)

(object) نيذه

these (f. dual)

haataan(i)

(subject) ناتاه

haatayn(i)

(object) نياتاه

these (plur.) haa‘ulaa’(i) ءالوه

اذه موي ليمج

haathaa yawm(un) jamyil(un)

= this (is) a day a beautiful

Translation: this is a nice day

هذه ةحيصن هديج

haathih(i) naSyiHa(tun) jayyida(tun)

= this (is) an advice a good

Translation: this is good advice

ءالوه موق نوقداص

haa’ullaa’(i) qawm(un) Saadiqwun(a)

= these (are) people honest

Translation: these are honest people

Since demonstratives are definite nouns, when the predicate is also definite there can be a

problem. This problem is similar to what has been described already concering separation

pronouns.

اذه ملعملا

haathaa (a)l-mu”allim(u)

This phrase can mean either one of two things.

this teacher

this (is) the teacher


To make the distinction, a separation pronoun is used.

اذه وه ملعملا

haathaa huw(a) (a)l-mu”allim(u)

= this he (is) the teacher

Translation: this is the techer

So, basically, according to the noun after the demonstrative there are the following three

situations.

this is a teacher اذه ملعم

haathaa mu”allim(un)

this teacher اذه ملعملا

haathaa (a)l-mu”allim(u)

this is the teacher اذه وه ملعملا

haathaa huw(a) (a)l-mu”allim(u)

ناتاه امه ناتذيلتلا

haataan(i) humaa (at-tilmyithataan(i)

= these they (are) the two students (f.)

Translation: these are the two students

humaa امه is necessary here to distinguish the sentence “these are the two students” from

“these two students.”

اذه وه يقيدص

haathaa huw(a) Sadyiqyi

= this he (is) (the) friend (of) me

Translation: this is my friend

humaa امه is not necessary like in the previous example. This phrase without the pronoun

could not mean anything other than “this is my friend.”

اذه يقيدص

haathaa Sadyiqyi

= this (is) (the) friend (of) me

Translation: this is my friend

Because there is no ambiguity here, the usage of a separation pronoun is optional.


هذه ةكم

haathih(i) makka(tu)

= this (is) Mecca

Translation: this is Mecca

هذه يه ةكم

haathih(i) hioy(a) makka(tu)

= this she (is) Mecca

Translation: this is Mecca

hiy(a) يه here is optional (emphatic).

هذه يه

haathih(i) hiy(a)

= this (is) she

Translation: this is her / here she is

hiy(a) يه here is a predicate but not a separation pronoun. Thus a rule can be stated: a

separation pronoun must be used after demonstratives only if the predicate is a noun attached to

the definite article al- -لا – otherwise it is optional (emphatic).

2. Middle Demonstratives

Middle demonstratives are used to refer to things that are neither near nor far but in between.

They are obtained by adding a -k(a) ك- suffix to the basic forms of demonstratives.

Demonstratives Attached to Vocative kaaf ك

that (m., s.) thaak(a) كاذ

that (f., s.) thyik(a) كيذ

those (m. dual)

thaanik(a)

(subject) كناذ

thaynik(a)

(object) كنيذ

those (f. dual)

taanik(a)

(subject) كنات

taynik(a)

(object) كنيت

those (plur.) ‘ulaa’ik(a) كئالوأ

‘ulaak(a) كالوأ


Only two of all the feminine singular demonstratives can take the vocative kaaf ك.

thyik(a) يذك

tyik(a) كيت

Here is the most difficult part – since this suffix is a “vocative kaaf” it will change in form

according to which person is being addressed with the sentence. These changes are very much a

classical aspect of Arabic rather than a modern one.


Addressing Feminine Singular

that (m., s.) thaak(i) كاذ

that (f., s.) thyik(i) كيذ

those (m. dual)

thaanik(i)

(subject) كناذ

thaynik(i)

(object) كنيذ

those (f. dual)

taanik(i)

(subject) كنات

taynik(i)

(object) كنيت

those (plur.) ‘ulaa’ik(i) كئالوأ

‘ulaak(i) كالوأ


Addressing Dual

that (m., s.) thaakumaa امكاذ

that (f., s.) thyikumaa امكيذ

those (m. dual)

thaanikumaa

(subject) امكناذ

thaynikumaa

(object) امكنيذ

those (f. dual)

taanikumaa

(subject) امكنات

taynikumaa

(object) امكنيت

those (plur.) ‘ulaa’ikumaa امكئالوأ

‘ulaakumaa امكالوأ



Addressing Masculine Plural

that (m., s.) thaakum مكاذ

that (f., s.) thyikum مكيذ

those (m. dual)

thaanikum

(subject) مكناذ

thaynikum

(object) مكنيذ

those (f. dual)

taanikum

(subject) مكنات

taynikum

(object) مكنيت

those (plur.) ‘ulaa’ikum مكئالوأ

‘ulaakum مكالوأ


Addressing Feminine Plural

that (m., s.) thaakunn(a) نكاذ

that (f., s.) thyikunn(a) نكيذ

those (m. dual)

thaanikunn(a)

(subject) نكناذ

thaynikunn(a)

(object) نكنيذ

those (f. dual)

taanik nn(a)

(subject) نكنات

taynikunn(a)

(object) نكنيت

those (plur.) ‘ulaa’ikunn(a) نكئالوأ

‘ulaakunn(a) نكالوأ

It is possible to add the attention haa- -ه to middle demonstratives – so that the basic

demonistratives will have two letters attached in the following manner.


that (m., s.) haathaak(a) كاذه

that (f., s.) haatyik(a) كيته

those (m. dual)

haathaanik(a)

(subject) كناذه

haathaynik(a)

(object) كنيذه

those (f. dual)

haataanik(a)

(subject) كناته

haataynik(a)

(object) كنيته

those (plur.) haa‘ulaa’ik(a) كئالوه

The “vocative kaaf” in these demonstratives is also changeable according to which person is

being addressed. The changing kaaf will de identical to that which is shown above.

3. Place Demonstratives

Place demonstratives also belong to the “nouns of pointing.” Therefore, they are also of three

types: near, middle and far.

1) Near Place Demonstratives. The near place demonstyrative that is used in Modern

Standard Arabic is:

here انه

hunaa

Other classical near demonstratives are the following.

here

hannaa انه

hinnaa انه

hannat تنه

hanyi ينه

With the addition of “haa of attention”:

here

haahunnaa انهه

haahannaa انهه

haahinnnat تنهه

haahanyi ينهه


2) Middle Place Demonstratives. These are obtained by adding the “vocative kaaf.”

They refer to things that are neither near nor far but in between.

there كانه

hunaak(a)

Classical ones:

there hannaak(a) كانه

hinnaak(a) كانه

With “haa attention”:

there

haahunaak(a) كانهه

haahinnaak(a) كانهه

haahannaak(a) كانهه

3) Far Place Demonstratives. These are all used in modern Arabic.

there

thamm(a) مث

thammat(a) ةمث

hunaalik(a) كلانه

The last one contains the “laam of distance.”

نحن انه

naHn(u) hunaa

= we (are) here

Translation: we are here

كانه رمأ رخأ

hunaak(a) ‘amr(un) ‘aakhar(u)

= there (is) a thing other

Translation: there is another thing

ةمث ةلكشم ةصيوع

thammat(a) mushkila(tun) “awyiSa(tun)

= there (is) a problem a difficult

Translation: there is a difficult problem


Relative Pronouns

Relative pronouns in English include “who”, “whom”, “whose”, “which”, “what”, and “that.”

A relative pronoun links two clauses into a single complex clause. To this extent, it is a similar

function to a subordinating conjunction – however,unlike a conjunction, a relative pronoun stands

in place of a noun. For example, “This is the book which he bought.”

A relative pronoun in Arabic is called a “noun of the connected.” Being nouns, relative

pronouns have the characteristics of nouns – namely gender, number and grammatical case.

Relative pronouns are always definite words. Relative pronouns in English have some

characteristics that are not present in Arabic. In English, “that” is used for both humans and non-

humans. There is a similar word in Arabic, but it has to change to modify different numbers and

genders.

General Relative Pronouns

Who / Whom / Which / That

SIN

G

.

Masculine al-lathyi يذلآ

Feminine al-latyi يتلآ

DU

AL

Masculine

(Subject)

al-lathaan(i) ناذللآ

Masculine

(Object)

al-lathayn(i) نيذللآ

Feminine

(Subject)

al-lataan(i) ناتللآ

Feminine

(Object)

al-latayn(i) نيتللآ

PL

UR

AL

Masculine

al-lathyin(a) نيذلآ

al-‘ulaa

(Archaic word) ىلألآ

Feminine

al-laatyi يتاللآ

al-laa’yi يئاللآ

al-lawaatyi يتاوللآ

These are major relative pronouins in Arabic. The only case-inflected ones are the dual

relative pronouns – the rest are “built” words. Each one of those words can be translated as

“that,” “who,” “whom,” or “which.” Apart from “that,” English uses specific relative pronouns

for humans and for non-humans. “Who” is used for humans – “I know who did that.” The Arabic

equivalent would be:

who / whom man نم

This word is specific for humans and it has only this single form for all cases, numbers and

genders.


The relative pronoun “which” is specifically used for non-human in English. In Arabic there

is no such word and this word is translated to the general relative pronouns mentioned above.

The relative pronoun “what” also has an equivalent in Arabic – “I know what you did.”

what maa ام

Usage of Relative Pronouns

1. General Relative Pronouns

These are the relative pronouns most commonly used. They can be translated as “who,”

“whom,” “which,” or “that.” They are used somewhat similarly in English, but the point here is

that they change in form to suit the antecedent.

اذه باتكلا يذلآ تيرتشإ

haathaa (a)l-kitaab(u) (a)l-lathyi ‘ishtarayt(u)

= this (is) the book which/that (I) bought

Translation: this is the book that I bought

It is very common to add an attached object pronoun after the verb in such sentences.

اذه باتكلا يذلآ هتيرتشإ

haathaa (a)l-kitaab(u) (a)l-lathyi ‘ishtaraytuh(u)

= this (is) the book which/that (I) bought him


It is also common to add a redundant separation subject pronoun in such sentences.

اذه باتكلا يذلآ تيرتشإ

haathaa huw(a) (a)l-kitaab(u) (a)l-lathyi ‘ishtaraytuh(u)

= this he (is) the book which/that (I) bought


Other examples.

ناذه امه ناباتكلا ناذللآ امهتيرتشإ

haathaan(i) humaa (a)l-kitaabaan(i) (a)l-lathaan(i) ‘ishtaraytuhumaa

= those they (are) the two books that/which (I) bought them

Translation: those are the two books that I bought


ذخ نيرانيدلا نيذللا يف جردلا

khuth(i) (a)d-dyinaarayn(i) (a)l-lathayn(i) fyi (a)d-durj(i)

= (you) take the two dinars that/which (are) in the drawer

Translation: take the two dinars that are in the drawer

ألوه مه سانلا نيذلا ينوداس

haa’ulaa’(i) hum(u) (a)l-naas(u) (a)l-lathyin(a) saa”adwunyi

= those they (are) the people that/who helped me

Translation: those are the people who helped me

Note that when using the general relative pronouns it is often possible to omit the word to

which the relative pronoun refers – the antecedent.

اذه وه يذلا هتيرتشإ

haathaa huw(a) (a)l-lathyi ‘ishtaraytuh(u)

= this he (is) that/which (I) bought him

Translation: this is what I bought

ألوه مه نيذلا ينودعاس

haa’ulaa’(i) hum(a) (a)l-lathyin(a) saa”adwunyi

= those they (are) that/who helped me

Translation: those are (the people) who helped me

2. Relative Pronoun “Who”

“Who” in English changes in form as in the following.

Subject Tom is the one who can do it.

Object Dan is the man whom I saw

Adpositional

Complement

Jenny is the woman with whom he is

happy.

Possessive John is the boy whose book this is.

Suprisingly, the Arabic equivalent does not change at all. It is a “built” word and it assumes a

sole form for all cases, numbers and genders.

who / whom man نم


However, the usage of this word differs from English. For example in English, “Tom is the

one who can do it.” In Arabic this sentence will become “Tom is who can do it.” This is the major

point here – in Arabic the antecedent must go away when using the relative pronoun “who.”

Usually a separation subject pronoun will be added so the final structure will be “Tom he is who

can do it.”

Subject Case

موت وه نم عيطتسي نأ اهلعفي

twum(un) huw(a) man yastatyi”(u) ‘an yaf”alahaa

= Tom he (is) who (he) can that (he) do her

Translation: Tom is the one who can do it

ينغلا نم عنقي امب كلمي

al-ghaniyy(u) man yaqna”(u) bimaa yamlik(u)

= the rich (is) who is sufficed with what (he) has

Translation: he who is suifficed with what he has is a rich person

ينغلا وه نم عنقي امب كلمي

al-ghaniyy(u )huw(a) man yaqna”(u) bimaa yamlik(u)

= the rich (he) is who is sufficed with what (he) has

Translation: he who is sufficed with what he has is a rich person

Object Case

ناد وه نم تيأر

daan(un) huw(a) man ra’ayt(u)

= Dan he (is) whom (I) saw

Translation: Dan is the man whom I saw

And more commonly:

ناد وه نم هتيأر

daan(un) huw(a) man ra’aytuh(u)

= Dan he (is) whom (I) saw him

Translation: Dan is the man whom I saw


With Prepositions

The usage of relative pronouns as adpositional complements is not present in Arabic. For

example the English sentence, “Jenny is the woman with whom he is happy.” In order to translate

this sentence into Arabic, it must be rephrased first. Either one of the two types of relative

pronouns can be used.

1) The General Relative Pronoun (That). The structure in Arabic will be “Jenny is the

woman that he is happy with her.”

2) The Specific Relative Pronoun (Whom). The structure in Arabic will be “Jenny she is

whom he is happy with her.” It is not possible to delete the object pronoun after the preposition.

ينج يه لاةارم يتلا دعسي اهعم

jennyi hiy(a) (a)l-mar’a(tu) (a)l-latyi yas”ad(u) ma”ahaa

= Jenny she (is) the woman that (he) is happy with her

Translation: Jenny is the woman that he is happy with

ينج يه دعسي اهعم

jennyi hiy(a) man yas”ad(u) ma”ahaa

= Jenny she (is) whom (he) is happy with her

Translation: Jenny is the woman whom he is happy with

Again, it is not possible to delete the final object pronoun in these two sentences.

The Possessive

Another usage of relative pronouns in English is in the possessive form “whose.” This type of

relative pronoun is not present at all in Arabic. An English example, “John is the boy whose book

this is.” In order to translate this sentence to Arabic it must be rephrased in either of the following

ways.

1) With the General Relative Pronoun (That). The structure in Arabic will be “John is the

boy that his book is this” or “John is the boy that this is his book.”

2) With the Specific Relative Pronoun (Whom). The structure in Arabic will be “John is who

his book is this” or “John is who this is his book.”

3) Without Any Relative Pronoun – The Best Way. The structure in Arabic will be “John is

the owner of this book.”

نوج وه يبصلا يذلا اذه هباتك

jwun(un) huw(a) (a)S-Sabiyy(u) (a)l-lathyi haathaa kitaabuh(u)

= John he (is) the boy that this (is) (the) book (of) him

Translation: John is the boy whose book this is


نوج وه نم اذه هباتك اذه

jwun(un) huw(a) man kitaabuh(u) haathaa

= John he (is) who (the) book (of) him (is) this

Translation: John is the boy whose book this is

نوج وه بحاص اذه باتكلا

jwun(un) huw(a) SaaHib(u) haathaa (a)l-kitaab(i)

= John he (is) (the) owner (of) this book

Translation: John is the owner of this book

3. Relative Pronoun “What”

what maa ام

Unlike “who,” the relative pronoun “what” in English is similar to the Arabic one in that the

antecedent is omitted in English, too. Therefore, it should be easy here.

فرعأ ام تلعف

‘rif(u) maa fa”alt(a)

= (I) know what (you) did

Translation: I know what you did

Note that the word maathaa اذام is related to maa ام and it works exactly like it – including as

a relative pronoun.

A final point about relative pronouns is the idea of restrictiveness. An English non-restrictive

relative clause is preceded by a pause in speech or a comma in writing – whereas a restrictive

clause normally is not. Compare the following sentences, which have two different meanings in

English.

The builder, who erects very fine houses, will make a large profit.

The builder who erects very fine houses will make a large profit.

In Arabic there are no restrictive relative clauses. The only possible form of relative clauses is

the second one.


A summary of relative pronouns in Arabic.

English Relative

Pronoun

Usage Arabic Equivalent

that

humans and non-

humans

يذلا

changeable form;

antecedent may be

omitted

which non-humans not present

who humans

نأ

no antencedent whom

to whom humans not present

whose humans and non-

humans not present

what

(no antecedent) non-humans

ام

no antecedent


VIII. ARABIC SENTENCES

Every complete sentence in English must have at least a subject and a verb. This is also

generally true in Arabic; however, the organization of these elements in a sentence can be a bit

different in Arabic. In English sentences the subject usually precedes the verb. In Arabic there are

two types of sentences in regard to subject and verb order.

Nominal sentences – sentences in which the subject precedes the verb

Verbal sentences – sentences in which the verb precedes the subject

Usage of Each Type Of Sentence

Unlike English, where the change in the intonation of the speaker is probably the only way to

emphasize or stress different elements of the sentence, emphasis of different elements can be

achived in Arabic by alternating between the two types of sentences. Nominal sentences are used

when the subject is the most important element in the sentence and which the speaker seeks to

emphasize. Verbal sentences are in fact the normal tone – they are used when the speaker is not

stressing anything in particular or when the speaker seeks to stress the verb or the action.

Nominal Sentences

A nominal sentence in Arabic is a sentence that starts with the subject – a noun – and the verb

follows. The subject can be a noun, a pronoun, a demonstrative, or a relative clause. The defining

property of a nominal sentence is that the subject procedes the verb. Thus there are more than one

possibility for nominal sentences in the presence of an object, an adverb, a prepositional phrase,

etc. The first one is the standard or usual one.

Standard Structure of Nominal Sentences

Subject Verb Others

the boy reads his book Object

the boy reads fast Adverb

the boy reads in the library Prepositional

Phrase

the boy is smart Adjective

The other possible structures for nominal sentences are more rare.

Alternative Structures for Nominal Sentences

Others Subject Verb

in the library the boy reads

Others Subject Verb Others

in the library the boy reads his book

Subject Other Verb

the boy in the library reads


So the important point is that the subject always precedes the verb in nominal sentences.

Examples of nominal sentences.

Subject – Verb – Object

دلولا أرقي هباتك

al-walad(u) yaqra’(u) kitaabkah(u)

= the boy reads (the) book (of) him

Translation: the boy reads his book

Subject – Verb – Prepositional Phrase

تانبلا نبعلي يف ةقيدحلا

al-banaat(u) yal”abn(a) fyi (a)l-Hadyiqa(ti)

= the girls play in the yard/park

Translation: the girls are playing in the yard/park

“Be” Sentences

Earlier the fact that nominal, present tense “be” sentences do not have verbs – the verb “be”

is omitted in the present tense – was discussed. This is the only case in Arabic in which there is

no verb in the sentence. In these verbless sentences the stress usually falls on the predicate not the

subject – the part after the “be” – unless the intonation says otherwise.

Subject – Predicate

نسح انه

Hasan(un) hunaa

= Hassan (is) here

Translation: Hassan is here

اذه موي بيصع

haathaa yawm(un) “aSyib(un)

= this (is) a day a hard

Translation: this is a hard day


ىليل يه ةجوز دومحم

laayla hiy(a) zawja(tu) maHmwud(in)

= Layla she (is) (the) wife (of) Mahmud

Translation: Layla is Mahmud’s wife


يقيدص وه كلام رجملا

Sadyiqyi huw(a) maalik(u) (a)l-matjar(i)

= (the) friend (of) me he (is) (the) owner (of) the shop

Translation: my friend is the owner of (owns) the shop

ةرهاقلا يه ةمصاع رصم *

al-qaahira(tu) hiy(a) “aaSima(tu) miSr(a)

= Cairo she (is) (the) capital (of) Egypt

Translation: Cairo is the capital of Egypt

* Note: miSr رصم is a “forbidden to noonation” word and it takes an

irregular sign for the genitive case.

Sentences that begin with an indefinite word – such as “a man is here” – are not usually used

in Arabic. The demonstrative “there” will usually be used for such sentences.

كانه لجر بابلاب

hunaak(a) rajul(un) bi-l-baab(i)

= there (is) a man by the door

Translation: there is a man at the door

ةمث دحا ام

thammat(a) ‘aHad(un) maa

= there (is) one-some

Translation: someone is there

Note that such sentences that begin with “there is” will not become “there was” when

rendered in the past tense – nor will they become “there will be” when in the future tense. To

change the tense of these sentences from the present to the past or the future, a verbal sentence is

usually used – that is, “was there a man at the door” or “will be there a man at the door.” These

will be covered in more detail during the discussion on verbal sentences.

“Be” sentences in the past tense have the perfective verb kaan(a) ناك “was” or one of its

conjugations.

Subject – Verb – Adverb

أمسلا تناك ةيفاص

as-samaa’(u) kaanat Saafiya(tan)

= the sky was (existed) clearly

Translation: the sky was clear


The verb “be” in Arabic requires an adverb after it rather than an adjective as in English. This

is only true when the verb appears but not when it is not apparent – such as in the present tense.

Such verbs are called in Arabic the “incomplete verbs.”


نيسح ناك كانه

Hasayn(un) kaan(a) hunakk(a)

= Hussein was there

Translation: Hussein was there

اذه ناك اموي ابيصع

haathaa kaan(a) yawma(n) “aSyiba(n)

= this was (existed) a day a hard

Translation: this was a hard day

In the future tense, “be” verbs are sa-yakwun(u) نوكيس “will be” or sawf(a) yakwun(u) نوكي

”.will be“ فوس


أمسلا نوكتس ةيفاص

as-samaa’(u) sa-takwun(u) Saafiyat(an)

= the sky will be (exist) clearly

Translation: the sky will be clear

Pronoun Sentences

Sentences which start with subject pronouns are nominal sentences. When there is a verb

after the subject pronoun, the pronoun can be kept or omitted. Third person subject pronouns will

always have an emphatic function if they are kept before the verb. The other pronouns – first and

second person – can and cannot have an emphatic function, depending on the intonation.

Subject – Verb

انأ فرعأ

‘anaa ‘ar”rif(u)

= I know

Translation: I know

In this sentence the pronoun – a first person pronoun – is not emphatic unless the intonation

stresses it.


Verb – Hiding Subject

فرعأ

‘ar”rif(u)

= know (I)

Translation: I know

This is a verbal sentence because the subject – a hiding pronoun after the verb – does not

precede the verb.


انأ زهاج

‘anaa jaahiz(un)

= I (am) ready

Translation: I am ready


انأ تنك ازهاج

‘anaa kunt(u) jaahiza(n)

= I was ready

Translation: I was ready

Verb – Attached Subject – Adverb

تنك ازهاج

kunt(u) jaahiza(n)

= was (I) ready



انأ نوكأس ازهاج

‘anaa sa-‘akwun(u) jaahiza(n))

= I will be ready

Translation: I will be ready


Verb – Hiding Pronoun – Adverb

نوكأس ازهاج

sa-‘akwun(u( jaahiza(n)

= will be (I) ready



تنأ ثدحتت ةيبرعلا !

‘ant(a) tataHaddath(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= you speak the Arabic

Translation: you speak Arabic!


متنأ ال يننوقدصت

‘antum laa tuSaddiqwunanyi

= you not believe me

Translation: you do not believe me


وه لعف اذه

huwa fa”al(a) haathaa

= he did this

Translation: he did this

Note: Third person pronoun is always emphatic.


امه اتلاق اذه

humaa qaalataa haathaa

= they (f. dual) said this

Translation: they said this


مه كانه

hum hunaak(a)

= they (m., p.) (are) there

Translation: they are there


Here, even though the pronoun is a third person pronoun, the stress came on the predicate

because this is a “be” sentence without a verb – so the stress falls on the predicate.

Nominal sentences can begin with other types of nouns.

Demonstrative

انه دجت ام ديرت

hunaa tajid(u) maa turyid(u)

= here (you) find what(you) want

Translation: here you can find what you want

Relative Pronoun

نم عرز دصح

man zara”(a) HaSad(a)

= who planted harvested

Translation: he who planted harvested

Note that perfective verbs in Arabic can be used as

subjunctive verbs, which is somewhat similar to English.

Others

ىتم ام تيتأ يندجت

mataa maa ‘atayt(a) tajidunyi

= whenever (you) came (you) will find me

Translation: whenever you come you will find me

A summary for nominal sentences.

The Subject The Verb The Stress

a noun any verb except “be” in present tense on the subject

a demonstrative 1

st and 2

nd person – changeable

a pronoun 3

rd person – on the subject

a noun “be” in present tense –

not apparent

a demonstrative

a pronoun


Verbal Sentences

A verbal sentence is a sentence that starts with the verb and the subject follows. The subject

can be a noun, a pronoun, a demonstrative, or a relative clause. The defining property of a verbal

sentence is that the verb precedes the subject. There are more than one possibility for verbal

sentences in the presence of an object, an adverb, a prepositional phrase, etc.

Standard Structure of Verbal Sentences

Verb Subject Object

read the boy his book Object

read the boy fast Adverb

read the boy in the library Prepositional Phrase

The other possible structures for verbal sentences are more rare.

Alternative Structures for Nominal Sentences

Others Verb Subject

دلولا أرقي يف ةبتكملا

in the library read the boy

Others Verb Subject Others

هباتك دلولا أرقي يف ةبتكملا

in the library read the boy his book

Verb Other Subject

دلولا يف ةبتكملا أرقي

read in the library the boy

The main point is that the verb always precedes the subject in verbal sentences.


Subject of Verbal Sentences

Subjects in verbal sentences may not always show up. There can be apparent, attached and

hiding subjects in verbal sentences.

1. Apparent Singular Subjects

Verb – Subject – Object

أرقي دلولا هباتك

yaqra’(u) (a)l-walad(u) kitaabah(u)

= read the boy (the) book (of) him


Compare this sentence with its nominal alternative in which the subject is the stressed

element.



al-walad(u) yaqra’(u) kitaabah(u)



More examples on verbal sentences.

Verb – Subject – Adverb

تناك ءامسلا ةيفاص

kaan(a) (a)s-samaa’(u) Saafiya(tan)

= was (existed) the sky clearly

Translation: the sky was clear

The verb in Arabic requires an adverb after it rather than an adjective like in English. This is

only true when the verb appears but not when it is apparent – such as in the present tense. Such

verbs are called in Arabic the “incomplete verbs.”


ناك اذه اموي ابيصع

kaan(a) haathaa yawma(n) “aSyiba(n)

= was this a day a hard

Translation: this was a hard day



نوكيس دمحم انه ادغ

sa-yakwun(u) muHammad(un) hunaa ghada(n)

= will be Muhammad here tomorrow

Translation: Muhammad will be here tomorrow

Verb – Attached Object – Subject

ينرسي كنأ انه

yasurrunyi ‘annak(a) hunaa

= please me that you (are) here

Translation: I am glad that you are here

Sentences which begin with an indefinite word – such as “a man is here” – are not usually

used in Arabic. The demonstrative “there” is usually used for such sentences.

كانه لجر بابلاب

hunaak(a) rajul(un) bi-l-baab(i)

= there (is) a man by the door

Translation: there is a man at the door

To change this sentence to the past tense from the present tense a verbal sentence is usually used.

ناك كانه لجر بابلاب

kaan(a) hunaak(a) rajul(un) bi-l-baab(i)

= was there a man by the door

Translation: there was a man at the door

ناك ةمث دحأ ام

kaan(a) thammat(a) ‘aHad(un) maa

= was there one-some

Translation: someone was there

The same thing about these sentences is true for the future tense. To change the tense of these

sentences to the future, a verbal sentence is usually used. Sentences of the type “there will be” are

not the usual way of doing it.


نوكيس نهكا ريثكلا نم نيوعدملا

sa-yakwun(u) hunaak(a) (a)l-kathyir(u) min(a) (a)l-mad”wuyin(a)

= will be there many of the invited

Translation: there will be many guests

نوكيس ةمث ةثراك

sa-yakwun(u) thammat(a) kaarithat(un)

= will be there a distaster

Translation: there will be a disaster

2. Apparent Dual and Plural Subjects

Now comes the tricky point about verbal sentences. Verbs in Arabic are conjugated in

different forms to suit different numbers and genders of the subjects. However, in verbal

sentences – if a verb is followed by an apparent noun subject – the verb will always be conjugated

in the singular form. This happens only with third person conjugations of verbs because those are

the only ones that can be followed by apparent noun subjects.

Verb – Subject – Prepositional Phrase

بهذي لجرلا ىلإ هلمع

yathhab(u) (a)r-rajul(u) ‘ilaa “amalih(i)

= go the man to (the) work (of) him

Translation: the man goes to (his) work

In this sentence the subject – the man – is singular and the verb is conjugated in the singular

form; so nothing unusual.


بهذي لاجرلا ىلإ مهلامعأ

yathhab(u) (a)r-rijaal(u) ‘ilaa ‘a”maalihim

= go the men to (the) works (of) them

Translation: the men go to (their) work

In this sentence the subject – the men – is plural, but it is an apparent noun so the verb ought

to be conjugated in the singular form. Note that in the nominal counterpart the verb must be

conjugated in the plural.



لاجرلا نوبهذي ىلإ مهلامعأ

(a)r-rijaal(u) yathhabwun(a)‘ilaa ‘a”maalihim

= the men go to (the) works (of) them

Translation: the men go to (their) work


تلخد ناتديس ىلإ لحملا

dakhalat sayyidataan(i) ‘ilaa (a)l-maHall(i)

= entered two ladies to the shop

Translation: two ladies entered the shop

The subject – two ladies – is dual, but since it is an apparent noun the verb is conjugated in

the singular form. The nominal version for comparison is:


ناتديس اتلخد ىلإ لحملا

sayyidataan(i) dakhalataa ‘ilaa (a)l-maHall(i)

= two ladies entered to the shop

Translation: two ladies entered the shop

Verb – Subject

مزهيس ءادعألا

sa-yuhzam(u) (a)l-‘a”daa’(u)

= will be defeated the enemies

Translation: the enemies will be defeated

The verb here is in the passive voice. It is in the singular conjugation even though the subject

is plural – because the subject is an apparent noun. To turn it into a nominal sentence, the

conjugation has to be changed to the plural.

Subject – Verb

ءادعألا زهيسنوم

al-‘a”daa’(u) sa-yuhzamwun(aq)

= the enemies will be defeated

Translation: the enemies will be defeated


Verb – Subject -- Adverb

نوكتس تاملعملا تارضاح

sa-takwun(u) (a)l-mu”allimaat(u) HaaDiraat(in)

= will be the teachers (f.) present

Translation: the teachers will be present


تاملعملا نوكيس تارضاح

(a)l-mu”allimaat(u) sa-yakwun(a) HaaDiraat(in)

= the teacher (f.) will be present

Translation: the teachers will be present

Apparent noun subjects include things other than simple nouns in Arabic.

Demonstratives

Verb – Subject

هكسميس ألوه

sa-yumsikuh(u) haa’ulaa’(i)

= will catch him these

Translation: those will catch him

Relative Pronouns

Verb – Subject

ءاج نيذلا اننودعاسيس

jaa’(a) al-lathyin(a) sa-yusaa”idwunnaa

= came who will help us

Translation: they who will help us came


Gender of Verbs

Verbs are always singular in a verbal sentence when the subject is an apparent third person

noun. The gender of these singular verbs would normally be masculine if the subject was

masculine – and feminine if the subject was feminine. However, feminine subjects can in fact

equally take masculine or feminine verbs in many situations.

Verb – Subject

عقو سأكلا

waqa”(a) (a)l-ka’s(u)

= fell the cup (f.)

Translation: the cup fell down

تعقو سأكلا

waqa”at(i) (a)l-ka’s(u)

= fell the cup (f.)

Translation: the cup fell down

The subject – the cup – is a feminine word. In the first sentence the verb is masculine and in

the second one the verb is feminine. Both are correct – this is possible only in verbal sentences if

the verb precedes the subject.

Verb – Subject

تءاج تانبلا

jaa’t(i) (a)l-banaat(u)

= came the girls

Translation: the girls came

ءاج تانبلا

jaa’a (a)l-banaat(u)

= came the girls

Translation: the girls came

Again, both are correct.

There are two situations in which the verb must be feminine— - nd only feminine.

1) If the subject is an apparent true feminine noun – female person – that is directly

following the verb, without separating words. Broken or irregular plurals are excluded from this

rule.


Verb – Subject

تعجر داعس

raja”at su”aad(u)

= returned Su’ad

Translation: Su’ad returned

In this sentence the verb must be feminine because the subject is a true female person.

2) If the subject is a pronoun referring to a feminine noun – whether it is a true or a

figurative feminine.

Verb – Hiding Subject – Prepostitional Phrase

تجرخ من ةفرغلا

kharajat min(a) (a)l-ghurfa(ti)

= went out (she) from the room

Translation: she went out of the room

Any irregular plural can take a masculine verb. The other way around is also true – irregular

plurals can always take feminine verbs, even if the subject is a true masculine. Thus, irregular

plural subjects can take masculine and feminine verbs interchangeably in verbal sentences.

Verb – Subject

تجرخ نم ةفرغلا

qad jaa’at(i) (a)r-rijaal(u)

= have came the men

Translation: shethe men have come

In this sentence the subject is true masculine – yet the verb is feminine. This is because the

subject is an irregular plural word. It is always preferred that the gender of the verb matches the

gender of the subject. One good reason for that is simply to avoid any confusion or mistakes.

Attached and Hiding Subjects

In verbal sentences the subjects are often apparent. However, subjects of verbs can be omitted

in Arabic sentences. Since every complete sentence must have a subject, Arabic grammar deals

with this issue in the following manner.


If the verb has a declension, then this is the subject and it is called an “attached subject

pronoun.”

Attached Subject Pronouns

did (I) fa”alt(u) تلعف

did (you – f., s.) fa”alt(i) تلعف

did (they – m., p.) fa”alwu اولعف

do (they – m. dual) yaf”alaan(i) نالعفي

do (they – m., p.) yaf”alwumn(a) نولعفي

do (they – f., p.) yaf”aln(a) نلعفي

The only exception to this is the third person feminine singular perfective verb – which does

have a declension but it is not an attached subject pronoun, but rather a feminine marker.

did… (no subject) fa”alat تلعف

If a separate subject pronoun appears after a verb that has an attached subject pronoun, it will be

an emphatic pronoun – but not the subject – as far as Arabic grammar is concerned.

If the verb does not have an attached pronoun, the subject will be an unseen pronoun that

follows the verb and is called a “hiding pronoun.”

Hiding Pronoun Verb Without Attached Pronoun

(he) (وه) Past – 3rd

person masc. sing. لعف

(she) (يه) Past – 3rd

person fem. sing. تلعف

(I) (انأ) Present – 1st person sing. لعفأ

(you) (تنأ) Present – 2nd

person masc. sing. لعفت

(he) (وه) Present – 3rd

person masc. sing. لعفي

(she) (يه) Present – 3rd

person fem. sing. لعفت

(we) (نحن) Present – 1st person plur./dual لعفن

Verb – Attached Subject – Object

دقل متلكأ لك ءيش

laqad ‘akaltum kull(a) shay’(in)

= have eaten you every thing

Translation: you have eaten everything


Verb – Attached Subject – Prepositional Phrase

نوؤرقي يف ةبتكملا

yaqra’wun(a) fyi (a)l-maktaba(ti)

= read (they) in the library

Translation: they read in the library

Note that it is unusual for sentences with only an attached or a hiding third person subject –

but not an apparent noun subject – to be used if they were not proceded by other words or related

sentences. The last example is not a good sentence in Arabic. Verb-like particles may be used in

such sentences.

Verb – Attached Subject – Adverb

تنك ازهاج

kunt(u) jaahiza(n)

= was I ready


Verb – Attached Subject – Object

انفرع باوجلا

“arafnaa (a)l-jawaab(a)

= knew we the answer

Translation: we have found out the answer

Verb – Attached Subject – Verb

انك فرعن باوجلا

kunnaa na”rif(u) (a)l-jawaab(a)

= were we know the answer

Translation: we knew the answer

Examples on hiding subjects.

Verb – Hiding Subject – Object

ديرن نأ لنبع

nuryid(u) ‘an nal”ab(a)

= want (we) that play (we)

Translation: we want to play



دقل لكأ لك ءيش

laqad ‘akal(a) kull(a) sahy’(in)

= has eaten (he) every thing

Translation: he has eaten everything

Object – Verb – Hiding Subject

قحلا لوقأ مكل

al-Haqq(a) ‘aqwul(u) lakum

= the truth say (I) to you (m., p.)

Translation: I tell you the truth

Verb – Hiding Subject – Adverb

ناك اموي ابيصع

kaan(a) yawma(n) “aSyiba(n)

= was (he) a day a hard

Translation: it was a hard day

Verb – Hiding Subject – Adverb

فوس ازهاجنوكأ

sawf(a) ‘akwun(u) jaahiza(n)

= will be (I) ready


Separate Subject Pronouns in Verbal Sentences

Although separate subject pronouns are apparent words, an important idea in Arabic grammar

is that separate subject pronouns (S.S.P.) are not the subjects in verbal sentences that contain

them – that is if they come after the verb. The subjects will still be either the attached subject

pronouns or the hiding pronouns – the separate subject pronouns are only emphatic words. Thus,

adding a separate subject pronoun to a verbal sentence will confer a marked emphatic effect on

the subject.


Verb – Hiding Subject – S.S.P. – Object

فرعت تنأ باوجلا

ta”rif(u) ‘ant(a) (a)l-jawaab(a)

= know you the answer

Translation: you know the answer

Compare with


فرعت باوجلا

ta”rif(u) (a)l-jawaab(a)

= know (you) the answer

Translation: you know the answer

More examples.

Verb – Attached Subject – S.S.P. –Object

تنك انأ ازهاج

kunt(u) ‘anaa jaahiza(n)

= was I ready


The “I” here is stressed as well.

Verb – Attached Subject – S.S.P. – Object

نونوكتس متنأ نيزهاج

sa-takwunwun(a) ‘antum jaahizwin(a)

= will be you (m., p.) ready

Translation: you will be ready

Since separate subject pronouns are not subjects in verbal sentences, verbs are conjugated in

the dual and the plural – will have attached pronouns – even if they are followed by dual or plural

apparent subject pronouns. This is contrary to the regular rules of verbal sentences with apparent

plural or dual noun subjects.

Verb – Attached Subject – S.S.P. – Prepositional Phrase

نالخدت امه ىلإ لحملا

tadkhulaan(i) humaa ‘ilaa (a)l-maHall(i)

= enter (f. dual) they to the shop

Translation: they enter the shop


Verb – Attached Subject – S.S.P. – Prepositional Phrase

نوبحذي مه ىلإ مهلامعأ

yathhabwun(a) hum ‘ilaa ‘a”maalihim

= go (m., p.) they to (the) works (of) them

Translation: they go to their work

A final grammatical note is that third person singular separate subject pronouns are regarded

differently here – those will be considered subjects if they appeared after verbs. This has to do

with the concept of “optionally hiding pronouns” and “obligatory hiding pronouns.”


لكأ وه هماعط

‘akal(a) huw(a) Ta”aamah(u)

= ate he (the) food (of) him

Translation: he ate his food

Verb –Subject – Object

تبرش يه اهبارش

sharibat hiy(a) sharaabahaa

= drank she (the) drinks (of) her

Translation: she drank her drinks

Additionally, a case in which the verbs of verbal sentences are conjugated regularly – in the

singular – if they are followed by dual or plural separate subject pronouns is if there is an

exclusive particle before the pronoun.

Negative Verb – Exclusion – Subject

ام ءاج الإ مه

maa jaa’(a) ‘illaa hum

= not came (3rd

m., s.) except/but them

Translation: nobody came except them

Negative Verb –Object – Exclusion – Subject

ام اهلعف الإ تنإ

maa fa”alahaa ‘illaa ‘ant(a)

= did not her/it except/but you

Translation: it is certainly you who did it


In these sentences the separate subject pronouns are actual subjects – not emphatic words.

This includes all of them – not only the third person singulars.

Verb-Like Particles

Verb-like particles are a very important group of particles that is commonly used in both

classical Arabic and modern standard Arabic.

Verb-Like Particles

it is true that ‘inna نإ

that ‘anna نأ

but laakinna نكل

it is like that ka’anna ناك

it is hoped for that / it

may be that la”all(a) لعل

It is wished that layt(a) تيل

The first four of these paricles are in fact all based on the same particle ‘inna نإ. This word

comes from an unclear origin. However, Arabs regularly use this word as an “opening word” to

start a nominal sentence.

Nominal sentences are usually used in Arabic when one wishes to emphasize the subject. In

order to neutralize the emphatic effect of bringing the subject in front of the verb in nominal

sentences, Arabs use the verb-like particles (V.L.P.) – especially ‘inna نإ – at the beginning of

nominal sentences to confer a “normal tone” on the sentence – counting on their verb-like nature,

which in a sense turns the sentence back into a verbal sentence. Although the literal meaning of

‘inna is “it is verified or true that” – which is an emphatic meaning – the actual purpose of using

‘inna is to de-emphasize the subject of a nominal sentence.

This is important because most of the speakers of other languages are not familiar with the

usage of verbal sentences and when they speak Arabic they usually use nominal sentences

without using the essential ‘inna – which can make them sound “not very native-like.”

Using ‘inna نإ

1. A verbal sentence (normal tone).


أرقي دلولا هباتك

yaqra’(u) (a)l-walad(u) kitaabah(u)

= reads the boy (the) book (of) him



2. A nominal sentence (emphatic tone).



(a)l-walad(u) yaqra’(u) kitaabah(u)



3. A nominal sentence with ‘inna (normal tone).

V.L.P – Subject – Verb – Object

نإ دلولا أرقي هباتك

‘inna (a)l-walad(a) yaqra’(u) kitaabah(u)

= it is true that the boy reads (the) book (of) him


Using ‘inna requires simple things:

That it be used in front of a nominal sentence – and only a nominal sentence.

That the grammatical case of the subject of the nominal sentence be changed

from the nominative to the accusative case.

The changing of the subject’s case to the accusative is another reason for why ‘inna is called

a verb-like particle – because this seems as if the subject has become an object of ‘inna.

In Arabic the subject of a sentence that contains a verb-like particle is called “the noun of the

verb-like particle.” The predicate of the sentence is called “the predicate of the verb-like particle.”

More examples of ‘inna in different situations.

V.L.P – Subject – Predicate

نإ ءامسلا ةيفاص

‘inna (a)s-samaa’(a) Saafiya(tun)

= it is true that the sky (is) clear

Translation: the sky is clear


نإ ايلع انه

‘inna “aliyya(n) hunaa

= truthfully Ali (is) here

Translation: Ali is here



نإ اذه موي بيصع

‘inna haathaa yawm(un) “aSyib(un)

= truthfully this (is) a day a hard

Translation: this is a hard day

Not all nominal sentences can have a verb-like particle. For example, conditional sentences or

sentences that begin with a locational demonstrative cannot. If the subject is a separate pronoun it

must be changed to an attached object pronoun while adding ‘inna.


انأ زهاج

‘anna jaahiz(un)

= I (am) a ready



ينإ زهاج

‘innyi jaahiz(un)

= truthfully me (is) a ready


A must case for using ‘inna is when the sentence begins with a third person subject pronoun –

otherwise it will be very emphatic.


يه ةاتف ةيكذ

hiy(a) fataa(tun) thakiyya(tun)

= she (is) a girl a smart

Translation: she is a smart girl


اهنإ ةاتف ةيكذ

‘innahaa fataa(tun) thakiyya(tun)

= truthfully her (is) a girl a smart

Translation: she is a smart girl



وه يقيدص

huw(a) Sadyiqyi

= he (is) (the) friend (of) me

Translation: he is my friend


هنإ يقيدص

‘innahu Sadyiqyi

= truthfully him (is) (the) friend (of) me

Translation: he is my friend

V.L.P – Subject – Predicate (Prepositional Phrase)

هنإ يف لخادلا

‘innah(u) fyi (a)d-daakhil(i)

= it is true that him (is) in the middle

Translation: he is inside


مه سانأ نوبيط

hum ‘unaas(un) Tayyibwun(a)

= they (are) people kind

Translation: they are kind people


هنإ سانأ نوبيط

‘innahum ‘unaas(un) Tayyibwun(a)

= truthfully them (are) people kind

Translation: they are kind people


‘inna نإ with Emphatic la- -ل

A commonly used particle – especially in classical Arabic – is emphatic la- -ل. This la-

precedes many words for the purpose of emphasis. It also precedes nominal sentences.

ديزل قياص

la-zayd(un) Saadiq(un)

= certainly Zayd (i) an honest

Translation: certainly Zayd is honest

ديزل يقياص

la-huw(a) Sadyiqyi

= certainly he (is) (the) friend (of) me

Translation: certainly he is my friend

When using ‘inna with such sentences, the emphatic la- will have to be moved from before

the subject to before the predicate.

نإ اديز قياص

‘inna zayda(n) la-Sadyiq(un)

= truthfully Zayd (is) certainly an honest

Translation: certainly Zayd is honest

هنإ يقياص

‘innahu la-Sadyiqyi

= truthfully him (is) certainly (the) friend (of) me

Translation: certainly he is my friend

This moved emphatic la- is called in Arabic the “slipped laam” because it slips from before

the subject to after it.

Why Verb-Like?

They look like verbs and end with the perfective verb declension -a.

They all carry meanings of verbs.

They affect the subject of the nominal sentence by changing its case to the

Accusative – which is what verbs do with their objects.

They can be attached to object pronouns like verbs.


Literal Senses of Verb-Like Particles

it is verified that ‘inna نإ

that it is verified that ‘anna نأ

but it is verified that laakinna نكل

as/like it is verified that ka’anna نأك

it is hoped that;

it may be that la”all(a) لعل

it is wished that layt(a) تيل

Understanding Verb-Like Particles

In essence, verb-like particles are the following three.

Basic Verb-Like Particles

it is true that ‘inna نإ

it is hoped that;



The other three particles are based on ‘inna as follows.

1. ‘anna نأ

نأ = نأ + نإ

‘an + ‘inna = ‘anna

that it is true = that

نإ دعوملا مويلا

‘inna (a)l-maw”id(a) (a)l-yawm(a)

= truthfully the appointment/date (is) today

Translation: the appointment/date is today

تننظ نأ دعوملا مويلا

Zanant(u) ‘anna (a)l-maw”id(a) (a)l-yawm(a)

= (I) thought that truthfully the appointment/date (is) today

Translation: I thought that the appointment/date was today


The meaning of ‘anna نأ is a complex meaning which is ‘an ‘inna نأ نإ “that it is true that.”

The non-reduced form ‘an ‘anna cannot be used and it has to be ‘anna.

دقل تدع

la-qad “udt(u)

= (I) have returned

Translation: I have returned / I am back

ينإ دقل تدع

‘innyi qad ‘udt(u)

= truthfully me have returned

Translation: I have returned / I am back

ملأ وملعت ينأ دقل تدع

‘alam ta”lamwu ‘annyi qad udt(u)

= is it that did not (you) know that truthfully me have returned

Translation: didn’t you know that I am back?

Note that ‘an نأ is a particle which means “that.” However, it is used amonst only before

verbs – before verbal sentences – and not before nouns. Therefore, it cannot usually be used

before a nominal sentence unless combined with ‘inna نإ to produce ‘anna نأ.

Two Words for “That”

That Usage

‘an نأ verbal sentences (verbs)

‘anna نأ Nominal sentences (nouns, pronouns, etc.

‘an نأ is used in Arabic to produce infinitive phrases just as “to” is used in English. If the

verb after ‘an is an imperfective verb, it must be in the subjunctive mood.

ديرأ نأ ملعتأ

‘uryid(u) ‘an ‘ata”allam(a)

= (I) want that (I) learn

Translation: I want to learn

‘an نأ is used in front of nominal sentences in only one classical case – which is when ‘an

precedes an “explanatory phrase.”


لسرأف هيلإ نأ برحلا و ةكيش

fa-‘arsal(a) ‘ilayhi’an(i) (a)l-Harb(u) wa shyika(tun)

= then (he) sent to him that the war (is) immenent

Translation: so he sent him a message telling him that was is imminent

2. laakinna نكل

نكل = نكل + نإ

Laakin + ‘inna = laakinna

but it is true that = but

مالكلا لهس نكل لعفلا بعص

al-kalaam(u) sahl(un) laakinna (a)l-f”l(a) sa”b(un)

= the talking (is) easy but truthfully the doing (is) hard

Translation: talking is easy but doing is hard

The non-reduced form laakin ‘inna نكل نإ cannot be used and it has to be laakinna نكل. It is

very habitual for Arabs to add an unnecessary wa و ”and” before both laakin نكل “but” and

laakinna نكل emphasized “but”. This “and” means nothing and does nothing.

تيرتشإ باتكلا و ينكل مل هارقأ دعب

‘ishtarayt(u) (a)l-kitaab(a) wa laakinnyi lam ‘aqra’h(u) ba”d(u)

= (I) bought the but but truthfully me did not read him yet

Translation: I bought the book but I have not read it yet

نكنكل دق نتبهذ

laakinnakunn(a) qad thahabtunn(a)

= but truthfully you (f., p.) have gone

Translation: but you have gone

3. ka’anna ناك

نأك = نأك + نإ

ka’an + ‘inna = ka’anna

like that it is true that = it is like that


Some old Arabian dialects used ka’inna نإك instead of ka’anna نأك. The etymology of ka’inna

may be easier to track – ka” + ‘inna. ka’inna is still used in several Arabic spoken dialects today

– such as Egyptian Arabic.

نأك اديز دسأ

ka’anna zayda(n) ‘asad(un)

= it is like that Zayd (is) a lion

Translation: Zayd is like a lion

The sentence “Zayd is like a lion” cannot be translated literally to Arabic.

False – Nonsense ديز دسأك

Zayd (is) like a lion

False – Nonsense نإ ديز دسأك

truthfully Zayd (is) like a lion

To make such a sentence, one must use the verb-like particle ka’anna نأك like in the

aforementioned example – that is, ka’anna “Zayd is a lion” = “it is like that Zayd is a lion.”

However, if the second word were a definite word, ka’anna would not need to be used – actually

it is better not to use ka’anna in this case, especially in modern Arabic.

ديز دسآلاك

zayd(un) kal-‘asad(i)

= Zayd (is) like the lion


If ka’anna is used in this case, it will sound like a poetry line.

نأك ديز دسآلا

ka’anna zayda(n) (a)l-‘asad(u)

= it is like that Zayd (is) the lion


Having the second word definite is more commonly used in Arabic to express ideas of the

type “something is like a something” or “someone is like a something.” Of course, using ka’anna

in such sentences is somewhat less affirmative – as the second word will be indefinite.


Sentences Judgment

1st Word 2

nd Word 3

rd Word

definite word like

ك

indefinite not good

definite good

ka’anna

نأكdefinite word

indefinite good

definite good

How is “life is like a dream” translated into Arabic? There are two possible ways: the first

one.

ةايحلا ملحلاك

al-Hayaa(tu) kal-Hulum(i)

= the life (is) like the dream

Translation: life is like a dream

This translation gives the exact sense of the original sentence. The other way is to translate it.

نأك ةايحلا ملح

ka’nna (a)l-Hayaa(ta) Hulum(un)

= it is like that the life (is) a dream

Translation: life is like a dream

This translation confers a tinge of uncertainty on the original sentence.

Hoping and Wishing

The remaining two verb-like particles are “hoping” and “wishing.”

it is hoped that



1. la”all(a) لعل or “all(a) لع

A commonly-used verb-like particle, la”all(a) لعل indicates the hope as well as the expectation of

the speaker about something. Sometimes it indicates the mere expextation – including bad

expectations. la”all(a) is used only with nominal sentences and the subject of the sentence is in

the accusative case – just like the rest of the verb-like particles.


لعل امير يتأت ادغ

la”all(a) riymaa ta’tyi ghada(n)

= it is hoped that Rima come tomorrow

Translation: I hope Rima will come tomorrow

لعل ضيرملا دق تام

la”all(a) (a)l-maryiD(a) qad maat(a)

= maybe the patient has died

Translation: maybe the patient has died

لع ضيرملا دق تام

”all(a) (a)l-maryiD(a) qad maat(a)

= maybe the patient has died

Translation: maybe the patient has died

اهلعل رطمت ميولا

la”alahaa tumTer(u) (a)l-yawm(a)

= it is hoped that her will rain today

Translation: I hope it will rain today

2. layt(a) تيل

layt(a) تيل is also a commonly used word. It indicates that the speaker is wishing that what he

says will happen or will be true. layt(a) works just like the other verb-like particles as far as

grammar is concerned.

تيل بابشلا دوعي اموي

layta (a)sh-shabaab(a) ya”wud(u) yawma(n)

= it is wished that the youth returns a day

Translation: I wish to be young again one day

ينتيل تنك كانه

latyanyi kunt(u) hunaak(a)

= it is wished that me was there

Translation: I wish I was there


Verb-Like Particles + maa ام

Verb-like particles can be used regularly with nominal sentences that begin with relative

pronouns such as “that,” “who,” “what,” etc. An example from classical poetry where the poet is

showing the pride of his people.

نإ يذلا كمس ءامسلا انب اتيب هماعد زعأ و لوطأ

‘inna (a)l-lathyi samak(a) (a)s-samaa’(a) banaa lana bayta(n) da”aa’imuh(u) ‘a”azz(u) wa

‘aTwal(u)

= it is true that who raised the heaven built for us a house (the) foundation (of) him (are)

more excellent and taller

Translation: he who raised the heaven has built for us a bouse, the foundations of which are

higher and more excellent

al-lathyi يذلا is a general relative pronoun that can mean “who,” “whom” or “which.”

نإ نم لعف اذه دق باصأ

‘inna man fa”al(a) haathaa qad ‘aSaab(a)

= truthfully who did this has done right

Translation: he who did this has done right

نإ ام هلعفت وه باوصلا

‘inna maa taf”aluh(u) huw(a) (a)S-Sawaab(u)

= truthfully what (you) are doing he (is) the right (thing)

Translation: what you are doing is the right thing

Now to the main point – verb-like particles can be combined with the relative pronoun maa ام

“what” to give a single word with a reduced meaning.

Verb-Like Particles With maa ام

امنإ = نإ + ام

‘inna + maa = ‘innamaa

it is true that what … it is true that …

امنأ = نأ + ام

‘anna + maa = ‘annamaa

that it is true that what … that it is true that …


Verb-Like Particles With maa ام

امنكل = نكل + ام

laakinna + maa = laakinnamaa

but it is true that what … but …

امنأك = نأك + ام

ka’anna + maa = ka’annamaa

like that it is true that what … it is like that …

املعل = لعل + ام

la”all(a) + maa = la”allamaa

it is hoped that what … it is hoped that …

it is may be that what … it may be that …

امتيل = تيل + ام

layt(a) + maa = laytamaa

it is wished that what … it is wished that …

Verb-like particles plus maa ام were so commonly used in classical Arabic that they lost their

primary meanings and became just emphatic versions of the bare verb-like particles. Verb-like

particles plus maa will have no effect whatsoever on the case declensions in the following

sentence – regardless of the syntax. Moreover, verb-like particles plus maa are used with verbal

sentences – just like with nominal sentences. maa in this case is called in Arabic “inactivating

maa.”

امنإ وه هلإ دحاو

‘innamaa huw(a) ‘ilaah(un) waaHid(un)

= truthfully what he (is) (s) a god a one truthfully he (is) a

god a one

Translation: he is only one God

امنإ لوقت قحلا

‘innamaa taQwul(u) (a)l-Haqq(a)

= truthfully what you say (is) the truth truthfully (you) say the

truth

Translation: what you say is nothing but the truth

امنأك اههجو ردبلا

ka’annamaa wajhuhaa (a)l-badr(u)

= it is like that what (the) face (of) her (is) (is) the full moon

it is like that (the) face (of) her (is) the full moon

Translation: her face is like the full moon (beautiful)


املعل ىفشي ضيرملا

la”allamaa yushfaa (a)l-maryiD(u)

= it is hoped that what (he) be healed (is) the patient it is

hoped that (he) be healed the patient

Translation: I hope the patient will get well


IX. NEGATION

Negation in English is achieved by using the word “not” – is not, do not, etc. In Arabic there

are many words that are used to form negative sentences – each one having its specific use and

conditions.

Negative Words

Tense Usage

Word Verbal Sentences Nominal Sentences

Present before verbs only

(imperfective verb only)

before nouns or verbs


lays(a) لسي

is not

Present

and Future

before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb only)


(perfective and


laa ال

not

All Tenses before verbs only

(perfective and



(perfective and


maa ام

not

All Tenses before verbs only

(perfective and



(perfective and


‘in نإ

not

Past before verbs only (imperfective verb only) lam

ملdid not

Past before verbs only (imperfective verb only) lammaa

املdid not yet

Future before verbs only (imperfective verb only) lan

نلwill not

Present not used before nouns or verbs

(time words only)

laat(a) تال

is not

However, there are four pricinple negative words that are commonly used in modern standard

Arabic.


Negative Words Commonly Used in Modern Standard Arabic

Usage Word

Before the predicate in present

tense “be” sentences (sentences

without verbs)

lays(a) سيل

is not

Before verbs (past tense) lam

ملdid not

Before vebrs (future tense) lan

نلwill not

Before verbs (present tense and

imperative)

laa ال

not

Present Tense Negative Sentences

Tense Usage


Present

Tense

Only

before verbs only




lays(a) سيل

not used before nouns only (time

words only)

laat(a) تال

Present or

Future

before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb)


(perfective and

imperfective verb)

laa ال

All Tenses

before verbs only

(perfective and



(perfective and


maa ام

before verbs only

(perfective and



(perfective and


‘in نإ

In order to turn a present tense positive sentence into a present tense negative sentence, these

are the words that can be used. All these words are particles (rootless) except for lays(a) سيل –

which is a perfective “frozen verb” in Arabic grammar. Aside from laat(a) تال, these words can

be used both in front of nouns and in front of verbs if the sentence is a nominal sentence – the

subject is before the verb. If the sentence is a verbal sentence – the verb is before the subject –

negative words can only be used before the verb, and not before the subject. For clarification:


The boy reads his book (positive nominal) The boy not reads his book (negative

nominal) or Not the boy reads his book (negative nominal)

Read the boy his book (positive verbal) Not read the boy his book (negative

verbal)

Possible Structures for Negative Nominal Sentences in Present Tense

Subject Negative Word Verb Others (e.g., Object)

the boy not reads his book

Negative Word Subject Verb Others (e.g., Object)

not the boy reads His book

The first structure – before the verb – is the better one and the one usually used.

Possible Structures for Negative verbal Sentences in Present Tense

Negative Word Verb Subject Others (e.g., Object)

not read the boy His book

A final note – negative words in nominal sentences with verb-like particles come after both

the particle and the subject.

Negative Nominal Sentences in Present Tense Wituh Verb-Like Particles

VLP Subject Negative Word Verb Others (e.g, Object)

truthfully the boy not reads his book

Here are the negatuives words used in present tense sentences successively.

lays(a) سيل

The first word lays(a) سيل is the word commonly used for verb-less sentences. It is a negative

perfective frozen verb. This means that there is only a perfectve past form of this verb, but not the

other forms (imperfective and imperative). There are two theories for the etymology of lays(a).

One theory says that it originally came from a negated demonstrative. The other theory – which is

in accord with Arabic grammar and which appears to be the truthful one – is that it comes from

an obsolete verb. According to traditional Arabic courses:

سيل = ال + يأس

‘ays(a) + laa = lays(a)

not + existed == not existed

However, lays(a) is always an incomplete verb – meaning, literally, “was not” – and it is

never used in its complete sense “existed not” in the Arabic that is practiced today. Although

lays(a) is a perfective verb, it can be used only for present tense sentences – imperfective verbs –


and it cannot be used for past or future tense sentences. Also, lays(a) can never coexist with the

verb yakwun نوكي “be” in one sentence.

Positive Nominal


al-walad(u) yaqra’(u) kitaabah(u)

= the boy reads (the) book (of) him)

Translation: the boy reads his book or the boy is reading his book

Negative

is/exists not

سيل دلولا أرقي هباتك

lays(a) (a)l-walad(u) yaqra’(u) kitaabah(u)

= the boy reading (the) book (of) him)

Translation: the boy does not read his book or it is not the boy who reads

his book

or the boy is not reading his book or it is not the boy who is reading his

book

Negative (Best Choice)

دلولا سيل أرقي هباتك

al-walad(u) lays(a) yaqra’(u) kitaabah(u)

= the boy is/exists not reading (the) book (of) him)

Translation: the boys does not read his book or the boy is not reading his

book

Positive Verbal

يأرق دلولا هباتك

yaqr’(u) (a)l-walad(u) kitaabah(u)

= read the boy (the) book (of) him

Translation: the boys reads his book

Negative

سيل أرقي دلولا هباتك

lays(a) yaqr’(u) (a)l-walad(u) kitaabah(u)

= is/exists not reading the boy (the) book (of) him

Translation: the boys does not read his book or the boy is

not reading his book

To use the negative word directly before the verb in nominal sentences is the best choice –

because in this case these would not be two possibilities for the meaning of the sentence. When


the negative word precedes the subject, it may be negating only the subject but not the verb – and

it may also be negating both.

Positive Nominal

دحأ انه

‘ahmad hunaa

= Ahmad (is) here

Translation: Ahmad is here

Negative

سيل دحأ نها

lays(a) ‘ahmad hunaa

= is not Ahmad here

Translation: Ahmad is not here or it is not Ahmad who is

here


دحأ سيل انه

‘ahmad(u) lays(a) hunaa

= Ahmad is not here

Translation: Ahmad is not here

Since lays(a) is a verb, it must be conjugated to suite different subjects. The middle letter of

the root is yaa’ ي, so it is a hollow weak verb.

fa”ila لعف = lays(a) سيل // Frozen Verb

SIN

GU

LA

R

(I) am not last(u) تسل

(you) are not (m.) last(a) تسل

(you) are not (f.) lasti تسل

(he) is not lays(a) سيل

(she) is not laysa) تسيل

DU

AL

(you) are not lastumma امتسل

(they) are not (m.) laysaa اسيل

(they) are not (f.) laysataa اتسيل

PL

UR

AL

(we) are not (dual/pural) lasnaa انسل

(you) are not (m.) lastum متسل

(you) are not (f.) lastunn(a) نتسل

(they) are not (m.) layswu اوسيل

(they) are not (f.) nsn(a) نسل


Positive Nominal

ءامسلا ةيفاص

as-samaa’(u) Saafiyah(tun)

= the sky (is) a clear

Translation: the sky is clear

Negative

تسيل اءامسل ةيفاص

laysat(i) (a)s-samaa’(u) Saafiyah(tan)

= is not he sky a clear

Translation: the sky is not clear or it is not the

sky that is clear


ءامسلا سيل ةيفاص

as-samaa’(u) laysat Saafiyah(tan)

= the sky is not a clear

Translation: the sky is not clear

Remember that lays(a) is always an incomplete verb and it will always need an adverb to

complete its meaning – that is, the predicate of the positive sentence. Adverbs in Arabic are

always in the accusative case.

lays(a) سيل With Separate Subject Pronouns

The rules for separate subject pronouns with the presence of lays(a) are the same as those

without lays(a). In short, separate subject pronouns can be emphatic in nominal sentences –

before lays(a) – and they are always emphatic in verbal sentences – after lays(a).

Positive Nominal

انأ ديعس

‘anaa sa”yid(un)

= I (am) a happy

Translation: I am happy

Negative (Emphatic)

تسل انأ ديعس

last(u) ‘anaa sa”yida(n)

= am not I a happy

Translation: it is not me who is happy


Negative (Better Choice)

انأ تسل ديعس

‘anaa last(u) sa”yida(n)

= I am not a happy

Translation: I am not happy


تسل ديعس

last(u) sa”yida(n)

= (I) am not a happy


lays(a) سيل With Verb-Like Particles

Negative words in nominal sentences with verb-like particles come after the particle and the

subject.

Positive

نإ اذه لوقل باجع

‘inna haathaa la-qawl(un) “ujaab(un)

= truthfully this (is) certainly a saying an astonishing

Translation: this is astonishing talk

Negative

نإ اذه سيل الوق اباجع

‘inna haathaa lays(a) qawla(n) “ujaaba(n)

= truthfully this is not a saying an astonishing

Translation: this is not astonishing talk

From this example it should be concluded that emphatic la- doesn’t

stay in negative sentences.

Just as it is an intransitive verb, lays(a) can be followed by the preposition bi- -ب “in/by/ with”

to relate it to an indirect object.

he died bed Meaningless sentence because an intransitive verb

cannot have a direct object

he died in bed Meaningful sentence because the preposition

relates the verb to the indirect object


So lays(a) سيل can have an indirect object instead of an adverb if it is followed by the

preposition bi- -ب.

Subject – Incomplete Verb – Adverb

ءامسلا تسيل ةيفاص

as-samaa’(u) laysat Saafiya(tan)

= the is/exists not clearly


Subject – Incomplete Verb – Preposition – Indirect Object

ءامسلا تسيل ةيفاصب

as-samaa’(u) laysat bi-Saafiya(tin)

= the is/exists not clear (state)



ءامسلا يلتس ةيفاصب

as-samaa’(u) laysat bi-(a)S-Saafiya(ti)

= the is/exists not in the clear (state)



انأ تسل ديعسب

‘anaa last(u) bi-sa”yid(in)

= I am/exist not in a happy (state)



انأ تسل ديعسبلاب

‘anaa last(u) bi-(a)s-sa”yid(i)

= I am/exist not in the happy (state)



نإ اذه سيل لوقب باجع

‘inna haathaa lays(a) bi-qawl(in) ‘ujaab(in)

= truthfully this is/exists not in (state of) a saying an astonishing

Translation: this is not an astonishing talk



نإ اذه سيل لوقلاب باجعلا

‘inna haathaa lays(a) bi-(a)l- qawl(i) (a)l-‘ujaab(i)

= truthfully this is/exists not in (state of) the saying the astonishing

Translation: this is not an astonishing talk

In summary: a noun after lays(a) سيل will be an adverb (in accusative case) unless preceded

by the preposition bi-, where it will be an indirect object (in ablative case).

سيل

lays(a)

is/exists not

Subject Preposition Noun

the boy

happily

Adverb

accusative case

bi-

in happy

Indirect Object

ablative case

lays(a) سيل in Modern Standard Arabic

The good use of lays(a) سيل in modern standard Arabic is in sentences without verbs – that

is, in present tense “be” sentences. lays(a) سيل will usually come after the subject and before the

predicate of such sentences. Several examples have already been presented above.

laat(a) تال

laat(a) تال is a classical, unimportant negative particle that has very limited use. Although it

is a particle and not an incomplete verb, it works like lays(a) سيل – requires an adverb in the

accusative case following it. However, there are no limitations to how it is used.

It must be followed exclusively by a noun.

This noun must be a time word – like “day,” “time,” “hour,” etc.

The subject of the sentence must be omitted and only the adverb appears.

تال ةعاس مدنم

laat(a) saa”a(ta) mandam(in)

= is/exists not (the hour) (as) (the) hour (of) a regret

Translation: this is not a time to regret

The original complete form of this sentence would be the following – but not used.


تال ةعاسلا ةعاس مدنم

laat(a)(a)s-saa”a(tu) saa”a(ta) mandam(in)

= is/exists not the hour (as) (the) hour (of) a regret

Translation: this is not a time to regret

Another example from the Koran.

و تال نيح صانم

wa laat(a) Hyin(a) manaaS(in)

= and is/exists not (the time) (as) (the) time (of) an escape

Translation: this is not the right time to avoid punishment, you

should have thought of it before

laa ال

The word for “no” in Arabic, laa ال is the official word used for negation on imperfective

verbs in the present tense. In standard usage, it comes before the verb – and not the subject – of

the sentence.

وه ال فرعي ائيش

huw(a) laa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= he not knows a thing

Translation: he doesn’t know anything

ال فرعي ائيش

laa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= not (he) knows a thing


هنإ ال فرعي ائيش

‘inna0h(u) laa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= is it true that him now knows a thing


دقل كتربخأ هنأ ال فرعي ائيش

la-qad ‘akhbartuk(a) ‘annah(u) laa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= (I) have told you that truthfully him not knows a thing

Translation: I told you he doesn’t know anything


نإ بهذ ال دجي ائيش كانه

‘in thahab(a) laa yajid(u) shay’a(n) hunakk(a)

= if (he) went not (he) finds a thing there

Translation: if he went, he wouldn’t find anything there

The imperfective in the last example serves as a subjunctive verb.

Do Not!

When laa ال comes before second person conjugations of imperfective verbs, it will mean a

negative command.

ال لأست

laa tas’al

= not (you) ask

Translation: don’t ask!

ال يكحضت

laa taDHakyi

= not (you) laugh (f., s.)

Translation: don’t laugh!

When laa is used in this way – to give a negative command – it becomes a jussive particle

and the imperfective verb after it must be in the jussive mood.

When laa ال precedes the subject instead of the verb, it will work either like lays(a) سيل – it

will require an adverb in the accusative case following it – like ‘inna نإ – the subject will be in

the acusative case. However, the subject and the predicate must be indefinite when laa is used

before the subject.

The first usage – like lays(a) سيل – is a rather unusual way to use this particle in Arabic.

ال رطم الطاه

laa maTar(un) haaTila(n)

= is/exists not a rain falling

Translation: no rain is falling or it is not raining or it

is not rain which is falling


ال لجر يف تيبلا

laa rajal(un) fyi (a)l-bayt(i)

= is/exists not a man in the house

Translation: there is no man in the house or the man

in the house is not a man

The second way of using laa ال before nouns – like ‘inna نإ – is much more common. laa ال is

usually used in this way to make a general statement; whereas the previous way of using laa ال –

like lays(a) سيل – should be used when making a more specific statement.

ال دحأ يف تيبلا

laa ‘aHad(a) fyi (a)l-bayt(i)

= not a one (is) in the house

Translation: no one/nobody is in the house

ال لجر ؤرجي ىلع باهذلا

laa rajul(a) yajru’(u) “alaa (a)th-zhahaab(i)

= not a man dares on the going

Translation: no man dares to go

As a norm in the second case, the subject after laa ال will usually not be noonated – although

it will still be indefinite. The subject and the predicate must be indefinite when using negative laa

it is called نإ works like ‘inna ال before the subject of a sentence. In Arabic grammar when laa ال

“begating of genus laa.”

Neither . . . nor . . .

laa is used in Arabic to say “neither…nor…”

ال … و ال …

laa … wa laa …

neither … nor …

ال اذه و ال كاذ

laa haathaa wa laa thaak(a)

= not this and not that

Translation: neither this nor that


ال اتيأر و ال تعمس

laa ra’ayt(u) wa laa sami”t(u)

= not (I) saw and not (I) heard

Translation: neither did I see nor did I hear

Prefixed laa- -ال

In modern Arabic laa ال can often be prefixed to create new words much as non-, un-, in-, im-,

dis-, il-, and ir- are used in English words.

inorganic laa-“udwiyy(un) يوضعال

irresponsible laa-mas’wul(un) لوؤسمال

infinite laa-mutanaah(in) هانتمال

The word ghayr(u) ريغ “other than” is often used in a similar way; however, this word forms

a genitive construction with the noun following it and is not prefixed to it.

not organic ghayru “udwiyy(un) ريغ يوضع

not responsible ghayru mas’wul(un) ريغ لوؤسم

not finite ghayru mutanaah(in) ريغ هانتم

maa ام

Although it is seldom used in formal Arabic, negative maa ام is the most commonly used

negative particle in the modern spoken dialects of Arabic. The usual usage of this particle in

classical Arabic is before perfective verbs, but it can also be used before imperfective verbs –

even though this is a rather awkward usage in the formal language.

وه ام فرعي ائيش

huw(a) maa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)



ام فرعي ائيش

maa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= not (he) nows a thing



هنإ ام فرعي ائيش

‘innah(u) huw(a) maa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= it is true that him not knows a thing


دقل كتربخأ هنأ ام فرعي ائيش

la-qad ‘akhbartuk(a) ‘annah(u)maa ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)


Translation: I told you doesn’t know anything

Before subjects:

ام دحأ انه

maa ‘aHad(un) hunaa

= not a one (is) here

Translation: no one/nobody is here

ام وه فرعي ائيش

maa huw(a) ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= not he nows a thing


ام دحأ فرعي ائيش

maa ‘aHad(un) ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= not a one (knows a thing

Translation: no one/nobody knows anything

maa ام can also work like lays(a) سيل – that is, it will require an adverb in the accusative

case to follow it.

ام اذه ارشب

maa haathaa bashara(n)

= is/exists not this (is) a human

Translation: this is not a human being


With transitive bi- -ب.

ام اذه رشبب

maa haathaa bi-bashar(in)

= is/exists not this in (state of) a human


ام اذه رشبلاب

maa haathaa bi-(a)l-bashara(n)

= is/exists not this in (state of) the human


‘in نإ

The last one of the negative particles in the present tense, ‘in نإ was an important negative

word in classical Arabic – but not as much in modern Arabic.

Before verbs:

وه نإ فرعي ائيش

huw(a) ‘in ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)



نإ فرعي ائيش

‘in ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= not (he) knows a thing


هنإ نإ فرعي ائيش

‘inna(h) ‘in ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= it is true that him not knows a thing


دقل كتربخأ هنأ نإ فرعي ائيش

la-qad ‘akhbartuk(a) ‘annah(u)maa ‘in ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)


Translation: I told you he doesn’t know anything


Before subjects:

نإ دحأ انه

‘in ‘aHad(un) hunaa

= not a one (is) here

Translation: no one/nobody is here

نإ وه فرعي ائيش

‘in huw(a) ya”rif(u) shay’a(n)

= not he knows a thing


نإ دحأ فرعي ائيش

‘in ‘aHad(un) ya”rif(u) sahy’a(n)

= not a one knows a thing

Translation: no one/nobody knows anything

Like laa ال and maa ام, Arabs also use ‘in نإ in the same way as lays(a) سيل – with an adverb

in the accusative case following the subject.

نإ اذه ارشب

‘in haathaa bashara(n)

= is/exists not this (is) a human


Past Tense Negative Sentences

Tense Usage


Past Before verbs only (imperfective verb only) lam مل

Before verbs only (imperfective verb only) lammaa امل

All Tenses

Before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb)

Before nouns or verbs

(perfective and

imperfective verb)

maa ام

Before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb)

Before nouns or verbs

(perfective and

imperfective verb)

‘in نإ


Those are the negative words that can be used in negative sentences in the past tense. They

are all particles. The first two are different from the other two in that they require the verb after

them to be an imperfective verb in the jussive mood – even though the sentence will be in the past

tense.

lam مل

This is the major negative particle for the past tense in formal Arabic. Although it is used for

the past tense, it can never be used with the perfective verb itself – rather, it is only used before

imperfective verbs.

Positive Nominal

دلولا لكأ

al-walad(u) ‘akal(a)

= the boy ate

Translation: the boy ate/has eaten

Negative Nominal

مل دلولا لكأي

lam al-walad(u) ya‘kul

= the boy did not eat

Translation: the boy didn’t eat/hasn’t eaten

Positive Verbal

لكأ دلولا

‘akal(a) (a)l-walad(u)

= ate the boy


Negative Verbal

مل لكأي دلولا

lam ya‘akul (a)l-walad(u)

= did not eat the boy


Positive Nominal

دايز ناك انه

ziyaad(un) kaan(a) hunaa

= Ziyad was here

Translation: Ziad was here


Negative Nominal

دايز مل نكي انه

ziyaad(un) lam yakun hunaa

= Ziyad did not be here

Translation: Ziad was not here

Positive Verbal

ناك دايز انه

kaan(a) ziyaad(un) hunaa

= was Ziyad here

Translation: Ziad was here

Negative Verbal

مل نكي دايز انه

lam yakun ziyaad(un) hunaa

= did not be Ziyad here

Translation: Ziyad was not here

lam is a jussive particle and the imperfective verb after it must be in the jussive mood.

lammaa امل

lammaa امل is a classical negative particle for the past tense that works just like lam مل

– it comes before imperfective verbs and it is also a jussive particle. However, lammaa امل

means “did not yet” rather then “did not” only. When lammaa امل is used the speaker

means that the action is not realized yet but that it is expected to occur at any time.

Positive Nominal

دلولا لكأ


= the boy ate


Negative Nominal

دلولا امل لكأي

al-walad(u) lammaa ya‘kul

= the boy did not eat yet

Translation: the boy hasn’t eaten yet


Positive Verbal

لكأ دلولا

‘akal(a) (a)l-walad(u)

= ate the boy


Negative Verbal

امل لكأي دلولا

lam ya‘akul(i) (a)l-walad(u)

= did not yet eat the boy

Translation: the boy hasn’t eaten yet

Note that when lammaa امل comes before a perfective verb it has a totally different meaning.

In this case, it means something like “since that."

امل سرد حجن

lammaa daras(a) najaH(a)

= since that (he) studied (he) succeed

Translation: since he studied, he passed

Finally, the word lammaa is used in almost all of the modern dialects of Arabic as a

conjunction word meaning “when” – such as lammaa ‘akalt امل تلكأ “when I ate…”

maa ام and ‘in نإ

maa ام and ‘in نإ are used for all tenses. maa ام is frequently used in classical Arabic to

negate past tense sentences – but not as frequently as in modern standard Arabic. maa ام is also

the exclusive past tense negator used in the modern dialects of Arabic.

Positive Nominal

دلولا لكأ


= the boy ate


Negative Nominal

دلولا ام لكأ

al-walad(u) maa ya‘kul

= the boy not ate



Negative Nominal

دلولا نإ لكأ

al-walad(u) maa ya‘kul

= the boy not ate


Positive Verbal

لكأ دلولا

‘akal(a) al-walad(u)

= ate the boy


Negative Verbal

ام لكأ دلولا

maa ‘akal(a) al-walad(u)

= not ate the boy


Negative Verbal

نإ لكأ دلولا

‘in ‘akal(a) al-walad(u)

= not ate the boy


When maa ام or ‘in نإ is used there is no need to change anything about the verb of the

sentence.

Future Tense Negative Sentences

Tense Usage


Future Before verbs only (imperfective verb only) lan نل

Present and

Future

Before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb)

Before nouns and verbs

(perfective and

imperfective verb)

laa ال

All Tenses

Before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb)


(perfective and

imperfective verb)

maa ام

Before verbs only

(perfective and

imperfective verb)


(perfective and

imperfective verb)

‘in نإ


These are the negative words that can be seen in negative sentences in the future tense. They

are all particles. The first one of them is a subjunctive particle and it requires the imperfective

verb after it to be in the subjunctive mood.

lan نل

lan نل is the principle negative particle for future tense in formal Arabic. It comes

before imperfective verbs and if there is a future tense particle before the verb – like sa- -

.it must be removed – فوس or sawfa س

Positive Nominal

ىملس رفاستس ادغ

salmaa sa-tusaafir(u) ghada(n)

= Salma will travel tomorrow

Translation: Salma is traveling tomorrow

Negative Nominal

ىملس نل رفاستس ادغ

salmaa lan sa-tusaafir(u) ghada(n)

= Salma will not travel tomorrow

Translation: Salma is not traveling tomorrow

Positive Verbal

رفاستس ىملس ادغ

sa-tusaafir(u) salmaa ghada(n)

= will travel Salma tomorrow


Negative Verbal

نل رفاستس ىملس ادغ

lan sa-tusaafir(u) salmaa ghada(n)

= will not travel Salma tomorrow


Positive Nominal

سقطلا نوكي اوحص موي نينثالا

aT-Taqs(u) yakwun(a) SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)l-‘ithnayn(i)

= the weather will be clear Monday

Translation: the weather will be clear on Monday


Negative Nominal

سقطلا نل نوكي اوحص موي نينثالا

aT-Taqs(u) lan yakwun(a) SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)l-‘ithnayn(i)

= the weather not will be clear Monday

Translation: the weather will not be clear on Monday

Positive Verbal

نوكيس سقطلا اوحص موي نينثالا

sa-yakwun(u) aT-Taqs(u) SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)l-‘ithnayn(i)

= will be the weather clear Monday


Negative Verbal

نل نوكيس سقطلا اوحص موي نينثالا

lan sa-yakwun(u) aT-Taqs(u) SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)l-‘ithnayn(i)

= not will be the weather clear Monday

Translation: the weather will not be clear on Monday

lan is a subjunctive particle and the imperfective verb after it must always be in the

subjunctive mood.

The future particle sawfa فوس can sometimes be used in negative future tense sentences –

but it must come before the negative word.

فوس نل رفاست ىملس ادغ

sawfa lan tusaafir(a) salmaa ghada(n)



نوكيس سقطلا اوحص ويم نينثالا

aT-Taqs(u) sawfa lan yakwun(a) SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)l-‘ithnayn(i)

= the weather will not be clear Monday



laa ال

laa ال works with imperfective verbs—and these can mean both the present and the future, laa

is used for negative sentences in both the present and the future.

Positive Nominal





Negative Nominal

ىملس ال رفاستس ادغ

salmaa laa sa-tusaafir(u) ghada(n)

= Salma not will travel tomorrow


Positive Verbal





Negative Verbal

ال رفاستس ىملس ادغ

laa sa-tusaafir(u) salmaa ghada(n)

= not will travel Salma tomorrow


ال نوكي سقطلا اوحص موي نينثالا

laa yakwun(u) (a)T-Taqs(u)SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)l-‘ithnayn(i)

= not will be the weather clear Monday

Translation: the weather will notbe clear on Monday

سقطلا ال نوكي اوحص موي ءاتشلا

aT-Taqs(u) laa yakwun(u) SaHwa(n) yawm(a) (a)sh-shitaa’(i)

= the weather not will be clear in the winter

Translation: the weather is not usually clear in winter


The future particle sawfa فوس can sometimes be used in negative future tense sentences –

but it must come before the negative word.

فوس ال رفاست ىملس ادغ

sawfa laa tusaafir(u) salmaa ghada(n)



laa ال + Perfective

laa ال can often precede the perfective past verb in classical Arabic. However, this does not

mean that the sentence will be in the past tense necause laa ال can not negate past tense events –

except in “neither.. nor…” constructions. If laa ال came followed by a perfective verb, that verb

would be a subjunctive verb, not an actual past tense verb – because in Arabic, like English, the

perfective verbs are used as subjunctive verbs.

So, laa ال plus a perfective verb is used for negative wishing – laa ال in this construction will

mean something like “I wish not that…”

ال حمس هللا

laa samaH(a) (a)l-laah(u)

= I wish not that allow God

Translation: may God not allow that or God forbid

ال ردق هللا

laa qaddar(a) (a)l-laah(u)

= I wish not that predestine God

Translation: may God not predestine (that) or God forbid

ال كحمس هللا

laa samaHak(a) (a)l-laah(u)

= I wish not that forgive you God

Translation: may God not forgive you


maa ام and ‘in نإ

maa ام and ‘in نإ are used for all tenses. They can be used to form negative sentences in the

future tense after removing the future particlpes – sa- -س or sawfa فوس.

Positive Nominal





Negative Nominal

ىملس ام رفاست ادغ

salmaa maa-tusaafir(u) ghada(n)



Negative Nominal

ىملس نإ رفاست ادغ

salmaa ‘in tusaafir(u) ghada(n)



Positive Verbal





Negative Verbal

ام رفاست ىملس ادغ

maa tusaafir(u) salmaa ghada(n)


Translation: Salma isnot traveling tomorrow

Negative Verbal

نإ رفاست ىملس ادغ

‘in tusaafir(u) salmaa ghada(n)


Translation: Salma isnot traveling tomorrow


A summary for the common negative words and their usage in modern standard Arabic – note

that the negative words are always placed before the verbs in this scheme.

Tense Positive Sentence Negative Sentence

Present

no verb

lays(a) before predicate

سيل

lays(a)

indicative imperfective

لعفي

yaf”al(u)

laa + indicative imperfective

ال لعفي

laa yaf”al(u)

Past perfective

لعف

fa”al(u)

lam + jussive imperfective

مل لعفي

lam yaf”al

Future indicative imperfective

عفيل

yaf”al(u)

lan + subjunctive imperfective

نل لعفي

lan yaf”al(a)

Imperative

(present/future)

imperative

لعف !

‘if”al

laa + 2nd

person jusstive imperfective

ال لعفت

laa taf”al

Negation + Exclusion Emphatic Style

Arabs did not like talking much and this is why they had the saying “the best talking is what

would be little and significant” – ريخ مالكلا ام لق و لد. This is why they liked it in parts of their

speech – even if they were important for the structure of sentences. This was common in Arabic

amnd Arab grammarians called such omitted parts “estimated” parts of speech. This is common

in Arabic and is called the “negation + exclusion emphatic” style.

تنأ كلم

‘ant(a) malak(un)

= you (are) an angel

Translation: you are an angel

This is a nominal sentence. To make an emphatic version of this sentence using the negation

+ exclusion, one must negate the first part – the subject – and exclude the second part – the

predicate.


نإ تنأ ىلإ كلم

‘in ‘ant(a) ‘illaa malak(un)

= not you (are) (anything) except an angel

Translation: you are nothing but an angel or

definitely you are an angel

The omitted word here was “anything” or “anyone.”

لوقت قحلا

taqwul(u) (a)l-Haqq(a)

= (you) say the truth

Translation: you are telling the truth

ال لوقت ىلإ قحلا

laa taqwul(u) ’illaa (a)l-Haqq(a)

= not (you) will say (anything) except the truth

Translation: you are telling nothing but the truth or

definitely you are telling the truth

Another way of understanding this sentence.

ال لوقت ىلإ قحلا

laa taqwul(u) ’illaa (a)l-Haqq(a)

= not (you) will say (anything) except the truth

Translation: you always tell the truth

A more complicated sentence.

دقل ىبأ ىلإ نأ بهذي

laqad ‘abaa ‘illaa ‘an tathhab(a)

= (he) has refused (everything) except that (he) go

Translation: he insisted on going

This is a common formula in formal Arabic – there is an omitted part, a negation and a

following exception. Note that infinitival ‘an نأ isd a subjunctive particle and the imperfective

verb following it must be in the subjunctive mood.

ىبأ ىلا

’abaa ‘illaa (infinitive)

verb signifying rejection + exclusion word + infinitive


Infinitives in Arabic can be either infinitival phrases like the one in the above example – with

an infinitival ‘an – or verbal nouns.

دقل ىبأ ىلإ نأ بهذي

laqad ‘abaa ‘illaa ‘an tathhab(a)

= (he) has refused (everything) except that the going

Translation: he insisted on going

Another common formula.

هنإ سيل ىلإ اقمحأ

‘innah(u) lays(a) ‘illaa ‘aHmaqa(n)

= truthfully him is/exists not (as anything) except (as) a fool

Translation: he is nothing but a fool

lays(a) سيل is an incomplete verb. It requires an adverb – accusative case – to complete its

meaning instead of a nominative noun predicate. The usual formula is:

سيل ىلا …ه

lays(a) ‘illaa …h(u) (adverb)

An emphatic phrase has evolved from this formula.

هنإ قمحأ سيل ىلإ …

‘innah(u) ‘aHmaqu(n) lays(a) ‘illaa

= truthfully him (is) fool

Translation: he is nothing but a fool

This two-word phrase comes at the end of the sentence, but it means nothing and it is just a

meaningless alteration of the previous formula.

Original Form Altered Form

هنإ قمحأ سيل ىلإ هنإ سيل ىلإ اقمحأ

‘innah(u) lays(a) ‘illaa ‘aHmaqa(n) ‘innah(u) ‘aHmaqu(n) lays(a) ‘illaa

Translation: he is nothing but a fool Translation: he is nothing but a fool


Finally on this subject, the following famous Islamic phrase is also a negation + exclusion

style phrase.

ال هلإ ىلإ هللا

laa ‘ilaah(a) ‘illaa (a)l-laah(u)

= not a god (exist) except God

Translation: there is no god but God


X. INTERROGATIVE

Interrogative sentences—or questions—are two types: yes/no questions (verification

questions) and questions requesting additional information about the sentence by using words

such as “what,” “who,” “when,” etc. Yes/no questions can become multiple choice questions

when the word “or” is used.

Yes/No Questions

Yes/no questions are formed in Germanic languages – of which English is one – by inverting

the subject and the verb of the sentence, such as “you are” becomes “are you?” and “you can”

becomes “can you?” Of course modern English has its own way with the verb “do” – which is

used before the subject in place of most of the verbs.

Turning a sentence into a yes/no question is easier in Arabic than in English. In Arabic, just

put a particle in front of the sentence and that will turn it into a yes/no question – no changes in

cases or moods are required.

There are two particles that can be used to create yes/no questions – or multiple choice

questions with the addition of “or.”

Particles of Interrogation

Is it that? ‘a- -أ

hal له

These particles resemble in meaning the French est-ce que? or “is it that?”

Positive Questions

Positive Sentence

ليلخ انه

khalyil(un) hunna

= Khalil (is) here

Translation: Khalil is here

Positive Question

أ ليلخ انه

‘a-khalyil(un) hunna

= is it that Khalil (is) here?

Translation: is Khalil here?


Positive Question

له ليلخ انه

hal khalyil(un) hunna

= is it that Khalil (is) here?

Translation: is Khalil here?

Positive Answer

معن ليلخ انه

na”am khalyil(un) hunna

= yes Khalil (is) here

Translation: yes, Khalil is here

Negative Answer

ال ليلخ سيل انه

laa khalyil(un) lays(a) hunna

= no Khalil is/exists not here

Translation: no, Khalil is not here

Negative Answer

ال سيل ليلخ انه

laa lays(a) khalyil(un) hunna

= no is/exists not Khalil here


Note that these are many alternatives for forming a negative answer. These are the ones most

commonly used in modern standard Arabic.

Positive Sentence

سقطلا سمشم

aT-Taqs(u) mushmis(un)

= the weather (is) sunny

Translation: it is sunny

Positive Question

سقطلآ سمشم

‘aa-T-Taqs(u) mushmis(un)

= is it that he weather (is) sunny?

Translation: it is sunny?


Positive Question

له سقطلا مشمس

hal aT-Taqs(u) mushmis(un)

= is it that he weather (is) sunny?


Positive Answer

معن سقطلا سمشم

na”am aT-Taqs(u) mushmis(un)

= yes, the weather (is) sunny?


Negative Answer

ال سقطلا سيل سمشم

laa aT-Taqs(u) lays(a) mushmis(un)

= no, the weather is/exists not (as) sunny

Translation: no, it is not sunny

Negative Answer

ال سيل سقطلا سمشم

laa lays(a) aT-Taqs(u) mushmis(un)

= no, is/exists not the weather (as) sunny


Attachment of Interrogative ‘a- -أ to al- -لا

رمقلا رمقلآ

’aa-l-qamar(u) (a)l-qamar(u)

is it that the moon? the moon

سمشلا سمشلآ

’aa-sh-shams(u) (a)sh-shams(u)

is it that the sun? the sun


More examples.

Positive Sentence

ملكتت ةيبرعلا

tatakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= (you)(m., s.) speak the Arabic

Translation: you speak Arabic or you are speaking Arabic

Positive Question

أ ملكتت ةيبرعلا

‘a-tatakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) speak the Arabic?

Translation: do you speak Arabic? or are you speaking Arabic

Positive Question

له ملكتت ةيبرعلا

hal tatakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) speak the Arabic?

Translation: do you speak Arabic? or are you speaking Arabic

Positive Answer

معن ملكتت ةيبرعلا

na”am ‘atakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= yes, (I) speak the Arabic

Translation: yes, I speak Arabic or yes, I am speaking Arabic

Negative Answer

ال ال ملكتت اةيبرعل

laa laa ‘atakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= no not (I) speak the Arabic

Translation: no, I speak do not Arabic or no, I am not speaking Arabic

Multiple Choice Questions

Multiple choice questions have the conjunction “or” in them – such as “do you like apples

more or bananas?” The particle hal له is not used in questions containing the word “or” – only ‘a-

.will be used أ

In Arabic there are two versions of the conjunction “or” – one for regular sentences and

another one for questions or sentences preceded by ‘a- أ. If the sentence containing “or” were not

preceded by ‘a-, the version ‘aw وا would be used for “or.” If the sentence were preceded by ‘a-,

the version ‘am مأ would be used.


Positive Sentence

مترز امإ ايروس وا قارعلا

zurtum ‘immaa swuryaa ‘aw(i) (a)l-‘iraaq(a)

= (you)(m., p.) visited either Syria or Iraq

Translation: you (have) visited either Syria or Iraq

Positive Question

أ مترز مأ ايروس وا قارعلا

‘a-zurtum ‘am(i) swuryaa ‘am(i) (a)l-‘iraaq(a)

= is it that (you)(m., p.) visited Syria or Iraq?

Translation: did/have you visit(ed) either Syria or Iraq?

Positive Answer

انرز ايروس و قارعلا

zurnaa swuryaa wa (a)l-‘iraaq(a)

= (we) visited Syria and Iraq

Translation: we (have) visited Syria and Iraq

Positive Answer

انرز امهيك

zurnaa kilayhimaa

= (we) visited (the) both (of) them

Translation: we (have) visited both of them

Negative Answer

مل رزن ايأ امهنم

lam nazur ‘aa(an) minhuma

= did not (we) visit any from/of them

Translation: we did/have not visit(ed) any of them or we

(have) visited neither of them

Note: Syria can also be written swuriyya(t) ةيروس. This is the only form

that was used before the 20th century, and the form used by the people of

Syria itself until now. It is more correct from an Arabic point of view, but

the form used here is more common.

Positive Sentence

امإ يندعاستس وا ال

‘immaa sa-tusaa”idunyi ‘aw laa

= will help me or not (you)(m., s.) = either

Translation: you are going to either help me or not


Positive Question

أ يندعاستس وا ال

‘a-sa-tusaa”idunyi ‘aw laa

= will help me or not (you)(m., s.) = is it that?

Translation: are you going to either help me or not?

Positive Answer

معن كدعاساس

na”am sa’tusaa”iduk(a)

= yes (I) will help you

Translation: yes, I am going to help you

Negative Answer

ال نل كدعاسأ

Laa lan ‘usa’tusaa”idak(a)

= no will not (I) help you

Translation: no, I am notoing to help you

‘a- -أ Meaning If or When

The particle ‘a- -أ becomes—in certain sentences – a conjunction word that introduces

alternatives like “if” and “when.”

أدبنس ءاوس اورضأ مأ مل اورضحي

sa-nabda’(u) sawaa’(un) ‘a-HaDarwu ‘am lam yaHdDurwu

= (we) will begin a same (it is) if/whether (they)(m., p.) came or did not came

Translation: we will begin whether they came/showed up or not

The word sawaa’(un) ءاوس “a same” is often used in such sentences, but it can be done

without it.

أدبنس اورضأ مأ مل اورضحي

sa-nabda’(u) ‘a-HaDarwu ‘am lam yaHdDurwu

= (we) will begin if/whether (they)(m., p.) came or did not came


The ‘a- itself can also be omitted in such sentences.



sa-nabda’(u) sawaa’(un) HaDarwu ‘am lam yaHdDurwu

= (we) will begin a same (it is) (if/whether) (they)(m., p.) came or did not came


A mostly reduced version.


sa-nabda’(u) HaDarwu ‘am lam yaHdDurwu

= (we) will begin (if/whether) (they)(m., p.) came or did not came


Negative Questions

Negative sentences – such as “you don’t” – are turned into yes/no netagive questions – such

as “don’t you?” – by the same mechanism mentioned for positive sentences. However, the

particle ‘a- -أ is the one used in negative questions.

An important difference here from English lies in the answer to the question. If a question is a

negative question, then the answer must be with the word na”am معن for agreement with the

negative sentence of the question – or for saying “no,” such as “no, I don’t” – and the word balaa

for disagreement with the negative sentence of the question – or for saying “yes”, such as ىلب

“yes, I do.”

Negative Sentence

ليلخ سيل انه

khalyil(un) lays(a) hunaa

= Khalil (is) not here

Translation: Khalil is not here

Negative Sentence

سيل ليلخ انه

lays(a) khalyil(un) hunaa

= (is) not Khalil here



Negative Sentence

ليلخ سيل انه

khalyil(un) lays(a) hunaa

= Khalil (is) not here


Negative Sentence

سيل ليلخ انه

lays(a) khalyil(un) hunaa

= (is) not Khalil here


Negative Question

أ ليلخ سيل انه

‘a-khalyil(un) lays(a) hunaa

= it is that Khalil (is) not here?

Translation: is Khalil not here?

Negative Question

أ سيل ليلخ انه

‘a- lays(a) khalyil(un) hunaa

= it is that (is) not Khalil here?

Translation: is not Khalil here?

Positive Answer

معن ليلخ سيل انه

na”am Khalyil(un) lays(a) hunaa

= yes, Khalil (is) not here


Positive Answer

معن سيل ليلخ انه

na”am lays(a) Khalyil(un) hunaa

= yes, (is) not Khalil here



Negative Answer

ىلب ليلخ انه

balaa Khalyil(un) hunaa

= no, Khalil (is) here

Translation: yes, Khalil is here

Answering Negative Questions – Don’t you?

Agreement with the negative sentence –

no, I don’t na”am معن

Disagreement with the negative sentence

– yes, I do balaa ىلب

When the ‘a- -أ in the negative question is separated from the negative word by the subject,

the emphasis of the question is on the subject – making the question primarily about the subject

rather than the verb or the action. When the ‘a- in the negative question is followed directly by

the negative word, the emphasis of the question is on the the verb or action – making the question

primarily about the verb or action rather than the subject.

Negative Sentence

سقطلا سيل اسمشم

aT-Taqs(u) lays(a) mushmis(an)

= the weather (is) not sunny

Translation: it is not sunny

Negative Sentence

سيل سقطلا اسمشم

lays(a) aT-Taqs(u) mushmis(an)

= (is) not the weather sunny

Translation: it is not sunny

Negative Question

لآسقط سيل اسمشم

‘aa-T-Taqs(u) lays(a) mushmis(an)

= is it that the weather (is) not sunny?

Translation: is it not sunny?


Negative Question

أ سيل سقطلا اسمشم

‘a-lays(a) (a)T-Taqs(u) mushmis(an)

= is it that (is) not the weather sunny?

Translation: is it not sunny

Positive Answer

معن سقطلأ سيل اسمشم

na”am (a)T-Taqs(u) lays(a) mushmis(an)

= yes, the weather (is) not sunny


Positive Answer

معن سيل سقطلا اسمشم

na”am ‘lays(a) (a)T-Taqs(u) mushmis(an)

= yes, (is) not the weather sunny


Negative Answer

ىلب سقطلا اسمشم

balaa (a)T-Taqs(u) mushmis(an)

= no, the weather is sunny

Translation: yes, it is sunny

Negative Sentence

ال ملكتت علاةيبر

laa tatakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= not (you)(m., s.) speak the Arabic

Translation: you don’t speak Arabic or you are not

speaking Arabic

Negative Question

أ ال ملكتت ةيبرعلا

‘a-laa tatakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= is it that not (you)(m., s.) speak the Arabic?

Translation: don’t you speak Arabic? or aren’t you

not speaking Arabic?


Positive Answer

معن ال ملكتأ ةيبرعلا

na”am laa ‘atakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= yes, not (I) speak the Arabic

Translation: no, I don’t speak Arabic or no, I’m not

speaking Arabic?

Negative Answer

ىلب ملكتأ ةيبرعلا

balaa ‘atakallam(u) (a)l-“arabiyya(ta)

= no, (I) speak the Arabic

Translation: yes, I do speak Arabic or yes, I am

speaking Arabic?

Negative Sentence

مل لقت ائيش

lam taqul shay’a(n)

= did not (you)(m., s.) say a thing

Translation: you didn’t say anything or you haven’t

said anything

Negative Question

ملأ لقت ائيش

‘a-lam taqul shay’a(n)

= is it that did not (you)(m., s.) say a thing?

Translation: didn’t you say anything? or haven’t you

said anything?

Positive Answer

معن مل لقأ ائيش

na”am lam taqul shay’a(n)

= yes, did not (I) say a thing

Translation: no, I didn’t say anything or no, I haven’t

said anything


Negative Answer

ىلب لقأ ائيش

balaa taqul shay’a(n)

= no, (I) said a thing

Translation: yes, I did say something or yes, I have

said something

Negative Sentence

نل نوكت كانه

lan takwun(a) hunaak(a)

= will not (you)(m., s.) be there

Translation: you won’t be there

Negative Question

نلأ نوكت كانه

‘a-lan takwun(a) hunaak(a)

= is it that will not (you)(m., s.) be there?

Translation: you won’t be there?

Positive Answer

معن نل نوكأ كانه

na”am lan ‘akwun(a) hunaak(a)

= yes, will not (I) be there

Translation: no, I won’t be there

Negative Answer

ىلب نوكأ كانه

balaa ‘akwun(a) hunaak(a)

= no, (I) will be there

Translation: yes, I will be there


‘a- -أ Conjunction

Arabs tend to use a lot of unnecessary “and’s” in their talk. Here is another manifestation of

this. However, the wa و “and” will not come here before the interrogative particle ‘a- -أ, but it will

rather come between it and the word following it.

أ و فرعت باوجلا

‘a- wa ta”rif(u) (a)l-jawaab(a)

= is it that and (you)(m., s.) know the answer? or and is it that (you)(m.,

s.) know the answer?

Translation: do you know the answer?

أ و ال يعت ام لوقأ

‘a- wa laa ta”yi maa ‘aqwul(u)

= is it that and (you)(m., s.) not comprehend what (I) say? or and is it

that (you)(m., s.) not comprehend what (I) say?

Translation: don’t/won’t you understand what I’m saying? or

don’t/won’t you understand what I say?

أ و مل نمؤت دعب

‘a- wa lam tu’min ba”d(u))

= is it that and (you)(m., s.) did not believe yet? or and is it that

(you)(m., s.) did not believe yet?

Translation: haven’t you believed yet?

However, wa و “and” is not the only particle that can be inserted between ‘a- and the word

following it. Other conjunctions could be inserted as well – like fa- -ف “then/so” and thumm(a) مث

“after that/afterwards.”

أ الف يعت ام لوقأ

‘a-fa-laa ta”yi maa ‘aqwul(u)

= is it that then/so (you)(m., s.) not comprehend what (I) say? or then/so is it that

(you)(m., s.) not comprehend what (I) say?

Translation: so don’t/won’t you understand what I’m saying? or so don’t/won’t

you understand what I say?

أ مث اذإ ام عقو متنمأ هب

‘a-thumm(a) ‘ithaa maa waqa”(a) ‘aamantum bih(i)

= is it that after that if that (he/it) fell (you)(m., p.) believed in him/it? or after

that is it that if that (he/it) fell (you)(m., p.) believed in him/it?

Translation: after that, if it happened, will you believe in it (the punishment)?


This is a difficult sentence from the Koran -the Muslim holy book.

The verb waqa”(a) عقو “fell” means “happened” in classical Arabic.

The verbs are in the perfective because it is a hypothetical situation, and tperfective

verbs in Arabic are used for hypothetical situations – sunjunctive mood.

The word maa ام in this case is an infinitive maa – which means “that”, like

‘an نأ.

The insertion of conjunction words after ‘a- is common in the Koran.

Yes/No Words

There are many words for answering questions other than na”am معن, laa ال, and balaa ىلب.

Here is a listing of the main words.

Yes/No Words

Agreement (true) Disagreement (false)

Positive

Statement

na”am معن laa ال

‘ajal لجأ

kallaa الك ‘iy يإ

Negative

Statement

na”am معن

balaa ىلب ‘ajal لجأ

‘iy يإ

The word kallaa الك is stronger than laa ال and its usage in classical Arabic

imparted a jussive or a warning tone.

The word ‘iy يإ is typically followed by a swearing style in classical Arabic –

such as “yes, I swear by God.”

There are several other obsolete synonyms for na”am معن.

Classical Synonyms for na”am معن

jayr(i) ريج

bajal لجب

jalal للج

‘innah هنإ


Tag Questions

Tag questions in the English way generally are not used in Arabic. However, there is one

formula of a tag questions.

Tag Question In Arabic

أ سيل كلذك

‘a-lays(a) ka-thaalik(a)

= is it that (he/it) (is) not like that?

Translation: isn’t it so?

هنإ ملعي أ سيل كلذك

‘innah(u) ya”lam(a) ‘a-lays(a) ka-thallik(a)

= it is true that him knows, isn’t it so?

Translation: he knows, doesn’t he?

ىلب

balaa

Translation: yes (he does)

معن

na”am

Translation: no (he doesn’t)

تنأ ال هنيبحت أ سيل كلذك

‘ant(i) laa tuHibbyinah(u) ‘a-lays(a) ka-thaalik(a)

= you (f., s.) not love him, isn’t it so?

Translation: you don’t love him, do you?

ىلب

balaa

Translation: no (I don’t)

معن

na”am

Translation: yes (I do)

Note that laa ال can often be used in place of na”am معن in answering questions. This happens

especially when someone wished to make an answer very clear.


هنإ ملعي أ سيل كلذك

‘innah(u) tuHibbyinah(u) ‘a-lays(a) ka-thallik(a)

= it is true that you (f., s.) love him, isn’t it so?

Translation: you love him, don’t you? or you are in love

with him, aren’t you?

ال

laa

Translation: no (I don’t/am not)!

‘a-lays(a) ka-thaalik(a) أ سيل كلذك “Isn’t it so?”

Yes, it is so balaa لبى

No, it is not so na”am معن

laa ال

Introductory Particles

Also called “attention particles,” introductory particles are the Arabic equivalents of the Latin

ecce “behold.” They are used at the beginning of speech in classical Arabic – especially in

literary talk – but they do not mean anything specific. Two of these particles, literally speaking,

are based on the interrogative particle ‘a- -أ.

Particles of Introduction/Attention

Literal Sense Particle

Is it that not? ‘a-laa الأ

Is it that not? ‘a-maa امأ

Behold/here haa اه

Vocative Particle (=o/oh) yaa اي

No kallaa الك

الأ ينإ دق تغلب

‘a-laa ‘innyi qad ballaght(u)

= behold truthfully me have informed

Translation: I have informed you


امأ كنإ قيدصل

‘a-maa ‘innak(a) la-Saadiq(un)

= behold truthfully you (m., s.) (are) certainly honest

Translation: you are indeed telling the truth or you are

honest indeed

The particle haa اه “behold/here” has many uses in Arabic. One of the most notable uses is as

prefization to demonstratives. It is also often used to mean the Latin ecce or “behold.”

اه انأ

haa ‘anaa

= behold/here I (am)

Translation: here I am

اه مه

haa hum

= behold/here they (m., p.) (are)

Translation: here they are

اه انأ انه

naa ‘anaa hunaa

= behold/here I (am) here

Translation: here I am

اه مه كانه

haa hum hunaak(a)

= behold/here they (m., p.) (are) there

Translation: there they are

اه دق نئج

haa qad ji’n(a)

= behold/here they (f., p.) have come

Translation: here they come

yaa اي is the main vocative particle in Arabic. There is nothing like it in English – although it

is often translated to ”oh” or “O” as in “O God.” This particle is commonly used with the

meaning of the Latin ecce or “behold.”


اي ينتيل تم لبق اذه

yaa laytanyi mitt(u) qabl(a) haathaa

= behold it is wished if me died before this

Translation: I wish I had died before this or I wish I were

dead now

Interrogative Pronouns (Nouns)

Yes/no questions are formed by means of interrogative particles. The rest of the words used

in interrogation are all pronouns – nouns in Arabic grammar. They are used to form questions

about such details as “what,” “who,” “when,” “where,” etc.

Nouns of Interrogation

What maa ام

Who man نم

When mataa ىتم

‘ayyaan(a) نايأ

Where ‘ayn(a) نيأ

How kayf(a) فيك

Now many kam مك

Now much

How

‘annaa ىنأ When

Where

Which (of) ‘ayy(u) يأ

Except for ‘ayy(u) يأ, all of the interrogative nouns are “built” words – which means that they do

not show case inflection. They also do not change to suit different genders or numbers. They are

used in a similar way to the interrogative particles.

1. What

ام اذه

maa haathaa

= what this (is)?

Translation: what is this?


ام اذه ءيشلا

maa haathaa (a)sh-say’(u)

= what this the thing (is)?

Translation: what is this thing?

Question

ام كمسإ

maa (‘i)smuk(a)

= what (the) name (of) you (is)?

Translation: what is your name?

Answer

يمسإ دبع نمحرلا

‘ismyi ‘abd(u) (a)r-raHmaan(i)

= (the) name (of) me (is) (the) servant (of) the merciful

Translation: my name is Abdurrahman

ام تلق

maa qult(a)

= what (you)(m., s.) said (is)?

Translation: what did you say?

ام نيديرت

maa turyidyin(a)

= what (you)(m., p.) want (is)?

Translation: what did you want?

ام نولوقتس

maa sa-taqwulwun(a)

= what will (you)(m., s.) say (is)?

Translation: what will you say?

ام دجوي كانه

maa ywujad(u) hunaak(a)

= what exists there (is)?

Translation: what is there?

Note: ywujad(u) دجوي is a passive verb and

the literal sense of it is “is/being found.”


maa + thaa ام + اذ

Interrogative maa ام is commonly combined to the demonstrative thaa اذ “this” to form

maathaa اذام. This combination changes noting, but it is commonly used – especially with verbs.

اذام = ام + اذ

maa + thaa = maathaa

what + this = what

اذام تلق

maathaa qult(a)

= what (you)(m., s.) said (is)?


اذام نيديرت

maathaa turyidyin(a)

= what (you)(m., p.) want (is)?

Translation: what did you want?

اذام نولوقتس

maathaa sa-taqwulwun(a)

= what will (you)(m., s.) say (is)?


اذام دجوي كانه

maathaa ywujad(u) hunaak(a)

= what exists there (is)?


maa + (‘a)l-lathyi ام + يذلا

When used before a verb, interrogative maa ام can be followed by the general relative

pronoun (‘a)l-lathyi يذلا “which/what.” This also will change nothing. However, the difference

here is that the two words will not be combined into a single word.

ام يذلا تلق

maa (a)l-lathyi qult(a)

= what that (you)(m., s.) said (is)?



It is more usual ion Arabic to attach an object pronoun to the verb in such sentences – so the

sentence is as follows.

ام يذلا هتلق

maa (a)l-lathyi qultah(u)

= what that (you)(m., s.) said him (is)?


ام يذلا هنيديرت

maa (a)l-lathyi turyidyinah(u)

= what that (you)(m., s.) want him (is)?

Translation: what do you want?

ام يذلا هنولوقتس

maa (a)l-lathyi sa-taqwulwunah(u)

= what that will (you)(m., p.) say him (is)?


ام يذلا دجوي كانه

maa (a)l-lathyi ywujad(u) hunaak(a)

= what that that exists there (is)?


In the last sentence there is not a pronoun attached to the verb – this is an intransitive verb

and it is impossible for it to have an object.

maathaa + (‘a)l-lathyi اذام + يذلا

This combination is also possible – but not in the regular language. This is a pompous

mixture that can be found in classical literature and in the Koran.

اذام يذلا هتلق

maathaa (a)l-lathyi qultah(u)

= what that (you)(m., s.) said him (is)?


اذام يذلا هنيديرت

maathaa (a)l-lathyi turyidyinah(u)

= what that (you)(m., s.) want him (is)?

Translation: what do you want?


اذام يذلا هنولوقتس

maathaa (a)l-lathyi sa-taqwulwunah(u)

= what that will (you)(m., p.) say him (is)?


اذام يذلا دجوي كانه

maathaa (a)l-lathyi ywujad(u) hunaak(a)

= what that that exists there (is)?


What For/Why

Adding the preposition li- -ل “for” to maa ام will produce lima مل which means “what for” or

“why.”

مل = ل + ام

li + maa = lima

for + twhat = what for or why

مل اذه

lima haathaa

= what for/why this (is)?

Translation: what is this for?

مل انأ انه

lima ‘anna hunaa

= what for/why I (am) here?

Translation: why am I here?

مل تلعف اذه

lima fa”alt(a) haathaa

= what for/why (you)(m., s.) did this?

Translation: what did you do that for? or

why did you do that?

مل نكحضت

lima taDHakn(a)

= what for/why (you)(f., p.) laugh?

Translation: what are you laughing?


Similarly, li- -ل is added to maathaa اذام to create the interrogative li-maathaa اذامل which

means “what for” or “why” – just like lima مل.

اذامل = ل + اذام

li + maathaa = li-maathaa

for + that = what for or why

اذامل اذه

li-maathaa haathaa

= what for/why this (is)?

Translation: what is this for?

اذامل انأ انه

li-maathaa ‘anna hunaa

= what for/why I (am) here?

Translation: why am I here?

اذامل تلعف اذه

li-maathaa fa”alt(a) haathaa

= what for/why (you)(m., s.) did this?

Translation: what did you do that for? or

why did you do that?

اذامل نكحضت

li-maathaa taDHakn(a)

= what for/why (you)(f., p.) laugh?

Translation: what are you laughing?

maa ام and maathaa اذام as Relative Pronouns

Question

فرعتأ اذام ديري

‘a-ta”rif(u) maathaa yuryid(u)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) know what (he) wants?

Translation: do you know what he wants


Answer

و نم نيأ يل نأ ملعأ

wa min ‘ayn(a) lyi ‘an ‘a”lam(a)

= and from where for me that (I) know?

Translation: how should I possibly know?

The wa و “and” in the beginning of the second sentence is a superfluous

word. Arabs use a lot of unnecessary “and’s” in their speech.

2. Who

نم تنأ

man ‘ant(a)

= who you (are)?

Translation: who are you?

نم اذه

man haathaa

= who this (is)?

Translation: who is this?

نم اذه لجرلا

man haathaa (a)r-rajul(u)

= who this the man (is)?

Translation: who is this man?

نم ملعي

man ya”lam(u)

= who knows (is)?

Translation: who knows?

نم نوديرت

man turyidwun(a)

= whom (you)(m., p.) want (is)?

Translation: whom do you want?

man + thaa نم + اذ

Like maa ام, man نم can also be followed by the demonstrative thaa اذ “this,” but they will

not form a single word in this case. However, this is a rare classical combination.


نم اذ تنأ

man thaa ‘ant(a)

= who you (are)?

Translation: who are you?

نم اذ ملعي

man thaa ya”lam(u)

= who knows (is)?


نم اذ نوديرت

man thaa turyidwun(a)

= whom (you)(m., p.) want (is)?


man + (‘a)l-lathyi نم + يذلا

When used before verbs, man نم can be followed by the general relative pronoun (a)l-lathyi

”.which/that“ يذلا

نم لايذ ملعي

man (a)l-lathyi ya”lam(u)

= who that knows (is)?


نم يذلا نوديرت

man (a)l-lathyi turyidwun(a)

= whom that (you)(m., p.) want (is)?


The last sentence is usually expressed as follows.

نم يذلا هنوديرت

man (a)l-lathyi turyidwunah(u)

= whom that (you)(m., p.) want him (is)?



man نم as a Relative Pronoun

Question

له تيأر نم لعف اذه

hal ra”ayt(a) man fa”al(a) haathaa

= is it that (you)(m., s.) saw who did this?

Translation: do have you seen who did this?

Answer

ال و ينكل ملعأ نم وه

laa wa laakinnyi ‘a”lam(u) man huw(a)

= no, but me know who he (is)

Translation: no, but I know who he is

The wa و “and” before laakinnyi ينكل in the second sentence

is superfluous.

3. When

ىتم دعوملا

mataa (a)l-maw”id(u)

= when the appointment/date (is)?

Translation: when is the appointment/date?

ىتم تيتأ

mataa ‘atayt(a)

= when (you)(m., s.) came?

Translation: when did you come?

ىتم رفاستس

mataa sa-tusaafir(a)

= when (you)(m., s.) will travel?

Translation: when will you leave/travel?

ذنم ىتم متنأ انه

munth(u) mataa wa ‘antum hunaa

= since when and you (m., p.) (are) here?

Translation: how long have you been here?


له ملعت ىتم ءاج دالوالا

hal ta”lam(u) mataa jaa’(a) (a)l-‘awlaad(u)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) know when came the children?

Translation: do you know when the children came?

The word ‘ayyaan(a) نايأ also means “when” – but it is classical and not used in modern Arabic.

و ام نورعشي نايأ نوثعبي

wa maa yash”urwun(a) ‘ayyan(a) yub”athwun(a)

= and not (they)(m., p.) feel when (they)(m., p.) will be resurrected

Translation: and they don’t know when they will be resurrected

4. Where

نيأ تنأ

‘ayn(a) ‘ant(a)

= where are (you)(m., s.)?

Translation: where are you?

نيأ ءانس

‘ayn(a) sanaa’(u)

= where Sana’a (female name) (is)?

Translation: where is Sana’a?

نيأ تنك

‘ayn(a) kunti

= where were (you)(m., s.)?

Translation: where were you?

نيأ ميقت

‘ayn(a) tuqyim(u)

= where dwell (you)(m., s.)?

Translation: where do you live? or where are you staying?

ىلإ نيأ ءانس نبهذت

‘illaa ‘ayn(a) tathhabn(a)

To where(you)(f., p.) go?

Translation: where are you going?


نم نيأ كل اذه

min ‘ayn(a) lak(a) haathaa

= from where for you this?

Translation: wherefrom have you gotten this?

أ ملعت نيأ ةلفحلا

‘a-ta”lam(u) ‘ayn(a) (a)l-Hafla(tu)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) know ehere the party (is)?

Translation: do you know where the party is?

5. How

Question

فيك كلاح

kayf(a) Haaluk(a)

= how (the) state (of) you (m., s.) (is)?

Translation: how are you?

Answer

انأ ريخب اركش (كل)

‘anaa bi-khayr(in) shukra(n) [lak(a)]

= I (am) in a well-being, thanking (to you)

Translation: I am fine, thanks

فيك وه

kayf(a) huw(a)

= how (is) he?

Translation: how is he?

فيك تفرع اذه

kayf(a) “arafti haathaa

= how (you)(f., s.) knew this?

Translation: how did you know this?

Question

فيك ودبأ

kayf(a) ‘abdwu

= how (I) look?

Translation: how do I look?


Answer

نيدبت ةعئار

tabdyin raa’I”a(tan)

= (you)(f., s.) look magnificently

Translation: you look great/magnificent

Question

فيك بهذنس

kayf(a) sa-nathhab(u)

= how (we) will go?

Translation: how will we go?

Answer

بهذنس صابلاب

sa-nathhab(u) bi-(a)l-baaS(i)

= (we) will go by bus

Translation: we will go by bus

له كربخأ فيك فرع اذه

hal ‘akhbarak(i) kayf(a) “araf(a) haathaa

= is it that (he) told you (f., s.) how (he) knew this?

Translation: did he tell you how he knew this?

6. How Many / How Much

There is only one word to express these things in Arabic, kam مك. This word was originally

ka-maa امك “like what” before it evolved to the form known today. The nouns after kam مك must

always be singular and in the accusative case.

مك ادلو كيدل

kam walada(n) ladayk(a)

= how many a child (in) (the) place (of) you (m., s.) (are)

Translation: how many children do you have?

The words ladaa ىدل and “ind(a) دنع are somewhat similar in meaning to the

French chez, but they are also used for time meaning “at”—like in “at sunset.”

مك ةرم كترذح

kam maara(tan) Haththartuk(a)

= how many a time (I) warned you (m., s.) (are)?

Translation: how many times have I warned you?


له ملعت مك ةعاس كترظتنإ

hal ta”lam(u) kam saa”a(tan) ‘intaZartuk(a)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) know how many an hour (I) waited you (m., s.)?

Translation: do you know how many hours I’ve been waiting for you?

مك غلبي ددع ناكس ليزاربلا

kam yablugh(u) “adad(u) sukkaan(i) (a)l-baraazyil(i)

= how much (he/it) reaches (the) number (of) (the) inhabitants (of) Brazil?

Translation: how much is the population of Brazil?

If the noun following kam is part of a gentive construction, it will not be in the accusative

case—but in the regular nominative case.

مك ددع نيرضحلا

kam “adad(u) (a)l-HaaDiryin(a)

= how much (the) number (of) the present (people) (is)?

Translation: how many people are present?

The noun following kam can be omitted.

مك ديرت

kam turyid(u)

= how much/many (you)(m., s.) want?

Translation: how much/many do you want?

مك لاق كل أهن ديري

kam qaal(a) lak(a) ‘annh(u) yuryid(u)

= how much/many (he) said to you that him wants?

Translation: how much/many did he tell you he wanted?

مك ألؤه

kam haa’ulaa’(i)

= how many these (are)?

Translation: how many are these?


When asking about price, kam مك will be preceded by the preposition bi- -ب “in/by/with” – مكب

Asking About Price

ب + مك = مكب

bi + kam = bi-kam

by + how much = by how much (money)

The noun following bi-kam مكب is often omitted.

Question (Full Form)

مكب مهرد اذه ءاذحلا

bi-kam dirhama(n) haathaa (a)l-Hithaa’(u)

= by how many a dirham (I may buy) this the shoe?

Translation: how many dirhams do these shoes cost?

The dirham is an old Arab currency unit—it is still used in

several Arab countries today.

Question (Reduced Form)

مكب اذه ءاذحلا

bi-kam haathaa (a)l-Hithaa’(u)

= by how much (money) (I may buy) this the shoe?

Translation: how much are these shoes cost?

Answer

نيرشعب امهرد

bi-“ishryin(a) dirhama(n)

= by twenty a dirham

Translation: the shoes cost twenty dirhams

kam Stating Numerousness

kam can be used in a style that is used to state numerousness instead of interrogation or

asking a question.

مك نم باتك كدنع

kam min kitaab(in) “indak(a)

= how many of a book (is) (in) (the) place (of) you (m., s.)

= so many of a book (is) (in) (the) place (of) you (m., s.)

Translation: you have so many books!


Nouns after the preposition min نم “from/of” must be in the ablative case.

Numerousness Stating Style

مك نم

kam min

how many/much of = so many of

The min after kam in this style can often be omitted.

مك باتك كدنع

kam kitaab(in) “indak(a)

= so many (of) a book (is) (in) (the) place (of) you (m., s.)

Translation: you have so many books!

Emphatic la- -ل can also be used here.

مكل نم باتك كدنع

la-kam min kitaab(in) “indak(a)

= certainly so many of a book (is) (in) (the) place (of) you (m., s.)

Translation: you really have so many books!

مكل اتكب كدنع

la-kam kitaab(in) “indak(a)

= certainly so many (of) a book (is) (in) (the) place (of) you (m., s.)

Translation: you really have so many books!

مكل ةرم كترذح

la-kam marra(tin) Haththartuk(a)

= certainly so many (of) a time (I) warned you (m., s.)

Translation: I warned you so many times!

7. ‘annaa ىنأ

This is an obsolete, classical interrogative word that may mean “how,” “when” or “where.”

ىنأ نوكي يل مالغ

‘annaa yakwun(u) lyi ghulaam(un)

= how will be for me a boy?!

Translation: how am I going to have a son?!


8. Which

The pronoun ‘ayy(u) يأ “which (of)” is the only interrogative word that undergoes case

inflection. The rest are all “built” words – which means that they do not have case inflection. This

pronoun only means “which?” when it is in the construct state or when it is a first part of a

genitive construction.

Which (of) … ?

Nominative ‘ayy(u) يأ

Accusative/Dative ‘ayy(a) يأ

Genitive/Ablative ‘ayy(i) يأ

The standard structure to begin a question with ‘ayy(u) يأ is:

‘ayy(u) (of)-a unit-of-the units-verb

which (of)-a unit-of-the units-verb

يأ ةروص نم روصلا لمجأ

‘ayy(u) Swurat(in) min(a) (a)S-Suwar(i) ‘ajmal(u)

= which (of) a picture of the pictures (is) prettier?

Translation: which one of the pictures is prettier than the rest? or

which one of the pictures is the prettiest?

However, as it isn usual in Arabic, this structure is rarely kept whole and usually parts will be

omitted.

(1) which (of)-the units-verb

(2) which (of)-a unit-verb

يأ روصلا لمجأ

‘ayy(u) (a)S-Suwar(i) ‘ajmal(u)

= which (of) the pictures (is) prettier?

Translation: which picture is prettier than the rest? or

which picture is the prettiest?

يأ ةروص لمجأ

‘ayy(u) Swurat(in) ‘ajmal(u)

= which (of) a pictures (is) prettier?

Translation: which picture is prettier than the rest? or

which picture is the prettiest?


يأ نيتروصلا لمجأ

‘ayy(u) (a)S-Swuratayn(i) ‘ajmal(u)

= which (of) the two pictures (is) prettier?

Translation: which picture is prettier?

يأ تاغلا تدحتت

‘ayy(a) (a)l-lughaat(i) tataHaddath(u)

= which (of) the languages (you)(m., s.) speak?

Translation: which/what language do you speak? or

which/what language are you speaking?

يأ تاغلا تدحتت

‘ayy(a) lughat(in) tataHaddath(u)

= which (of) a language (you)(m., s.) speak?

Translation: which/what language do you speak? or

which/what language are you speaking?

In the last two examples, ‘ayy(a) is in the accusative case because it is an object of the verb.

نم يأ ندملا تنأ

min ‘ayy(i) (a)l-mudun(i) ‘ant(a)

= from which (of) the cities (are) you?

Translation: which city are you from?

نم يأ ةنيدم تنأ

min ‘ayy(i) madyian(tin) ‘ant(a)

= from which (of) a city (are) you?

Translation: which city are you from?

In the last two examples, ‘ayy(i) is in the ablative case because it is preceded by a particle-

preposition or an ablative particle.

When ‘ayy(u) يأ is followed by pronouns they are object pronouns – and thus they will be

attached.

مكيأ ذخأ اذه

‘ayyukum ‘akhath(a) haathaa

= which (of) you (m., p.) took this?

Translation: which one of you took this?


The whole form of this sentence would be:

which (of)-a one-of-you-took-this

يأ دحاو مكنم ذخأ اذه

‘ayy(u) waaHid(in) minkum ‘akhath(a) haathaa

= which (of) a one of you (m., p.) took this?

Translation: which one of you took this?

مهيأ تيأر

‘ayyhum ra’ayt(a)

= which (of) you (m., p.) (you)(.m, s.) saw?

Translation: which of them did you see? or which of them

have you seen?

ىلإ نكيأ اهلسرأ

‘illaa ‘ayyikunn(a) ‘ursiluhaa

= to which (of) you (f., p.) (I) will send her/it?

Translation: to which of you will I send her/it? or to

whom of you should I send her/it?

Attachment of ‘ayy(u) يأ to different object pronouns.

Attachment of ‘ayy(u) يأ to Object Pronouns

Which (of) you (dual) ‘ayyukumaa امكيأ

Which (of) them (dual) ‘ayyuhumaa امهيأ

Which (of) us ‘ayyunaa انيأ

Which (of) you (m., p.) ‘ayyukum مكيأ

Which (of) you (f., p.) ‘ayyukunn(a) نكيأ

Which (of) them (m., p.) ‘ayyuhum مهيأ

Which (of) them (f., p.) ‘ayyuhunn(a) نهيأ


‘ayy(u) يأ Meaning “Any”

The meaning of ‘ayy(u) يأ can change to “any” in questions and in negative statements.

Question

له تيأر يأ ةطب

hal ra’ayt(a) ‘ayy(a) baTTat(in)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) saw which/any (of) a duck?

Translation: did you see which duck? or have you seen which

duck? or did you see any duck? or have you seen any duck?

Answer

ال مل رأ يأ ةطب

laa lam ’ara ‘ayy(a) baTTat(in)

No, not (I) saw any (of) a duck

Translation: dno, I didn’t see which duck? or I haven’t seen

which duck? or no, I didn’t see any duck? or no, I haven’t seen

any duck?

Any’s

Anybody ‘ayy(u) shahs(in) يأ صخش

Anyone ‘ayy(u) waahiD(in) يأ ضحاو

‘ayy(u) ‘aHad(in) يأ دحأ

Anything ‘ayy(u) shay’(in) يأ ئش

Anytime

‘ayy(u) waqt(in) يأ تقو

‘ayy(u) zamaan(in) يأ امزن

‘ayy(u) zaman(in) يأ نمز

‘ayy(u) Hyin(in) يأ نيح

‘ayy(u) ‘awaan(in) يأ ناوأ

‘ayy(u) saa”a(tin) يأ ةعاس

Anyway ‘ayy(u) Taryiqa(tin) يأ ةقيرط

‘ayy(u) wasyila(tin) يأ ةليسو

Anywhere ‘ayy(u) makaan(in) يأ ناكم


‘ayy(un) يأ

When ‘ayy(u) يأ is not in the construct state or not the first part of a genitive construction, it

will not only have noonation, but it will also lose its interrogative function – and will always

mean “any” instead of “which (of).”

Another variant of this phrase, which means just the same.

اذإ تحمس …

‘ithaa samaHt(a) …

= if (you)(m., s.) allowed …

However, “any” alone does not provide a full meaning. This word will usually be followed by

the preposition min نم “from/of” and a plural word or a pronoun referring to plural to complete its

meaning.

‘ayy(un)-min-the units

any-of-the units

مل تأي يأ نم طبلا

lam ‘yati ‘ayy(un) min(a) (a)l-baTT(i)

= did not come any of the ducks

Translation: none of the ducks came or none of the

ducks have come

مل رأ يأ مهنم

lam ‘ara ‘ayy(un) minhum

= did not (I) see any of them

Translation: I didn’t see any of them or I haven’t seen

any of them

نل ودجت يأ اهنم

lan tajidwu ‘ayy(un) minhaa

= will not (you)(m., p.) find any of her/it

Translation: you won’t find any of it/them


‘ayy(u) يأ as Intensifier

‘ayy(u) يأ can be used in an intensive style.

دايإ دئاق يأ دئاق

‘iyaad(un) qaa’id(un) ‘ayy(un) qaa’id(in)

= Iyad (is) a leader which )of) a leader!

Translation: Iyad is a great leader! or Iyad is one hell of a

leader!

وجلا راح يأ راح

al-jaww(u) Haarr(un) ‘ayy(u) Haar(in)

= the weather (is) a hot (one) which (of) a hot (one)

Translation: it is scorching hot!

Polite Request

The polite way to ask for something in English and other European languages would be by

using the subjunctive mood of verbs – such as “would you do this?” or “could you do that?” In

Arabic, there are several formulas for requests – and several of them use the subjunctive mood of

verbs as well. One of the most common phrases for a request in Arabic is:

ول تحمس …

law samaHt(a) …


This formula is not a question. It uses the subjunctive mood of the verb “allow” – though in

the form of a perfectuive or past verb rather than a subjunctive imperfective or present verb.

Perfective verbs are often used as subjunctive verbs in Arabic. This phrase is followed by a

normal command, using the imperative mood of verbs.

ول تحمس ينلوان قبطلا

law samaHt(a) naawilnyi (a)T-Tabaq(a)

= if (you)(m., s.) allowed, hand me the dish

Translation: please, hand me the dish

ينلوان قبطلا ول تحمس

naawilnyi (a)T-Tabaq(a) law samaHt(a)

= hand me the dish if (you)(m., s.) allowed

Translation: hand me the dish, please


Another variant of this phrase, which means just the same.

اذإ تحمس …

‘ithaa samaHt(a) …


اذإ تحمس ينلوان لاقبط

‘ithaa samaHt(a) naawilnyi (a)T-Tabaq(a)

= if (you)(m., s.) allowed, hand me the dish

Translation: please, hand me the dish

ينلوان قبطلا اذإ تحمس

naawilnyi (a)T-Tabaq(a) ‘ithaa samaHt(a)

= hand me the dish if (you)(m., s.) allowed

Translation: hand me the dish, please

A third less common variant, which is used like the previous one.

نإ تحمس …

‘in samaHt(a) …


If You Are Allowed

Masc., Sing. law samaHt(a) ول تحمس

Fem., Sing. law samaHt(i) ول تحمس

Dual law samaHtumma ول امتحمس

Masc., Plur. law samaHtum ول متحمس

Fem., Plur. law samaHtunn(a) ول نتحمس

The word law ول can be replaced with ‘ithaa اذإ or ‘in نإ.

The phrase law samaHt(a) ول تحمس – usually translated to “please” or “excuse me” – can be

used in other ways than being followed by a direct command.

ام كمسإ ول تحمس

maa (‘i)smuk(i) law samaHt(i)

= what (the) name (of) you (f., s.) (is) if (you)(f., s.) allowed?

Translation: what’s your name, please?


ول تحمس مكب اذه ءاذحلا

law samaHt(a) bi-kam haathaa (a)l-Hithaa’(u)

= if (you)(m., s.) allowed, by how much this the shoe (is)?

Translation: excuse me, how much are these shoes?

Another phrase similar to law samaHt(a) لو تحمس that is very commin is:

نم كلضف …

min faDlik(a) …

= from/of (the) favor (of) you (m., s.) …

This phrase does not use any subjunctive verbs. It is followed often by a direct command –

like the previous one. It is also usually translated to “please” or “excuse me.”

نم كلضف ينطعأ ملقلا

min faDlik(a) ‘a”Tinyi (a)l-qalam(a)

= please, (you)(m., s.) give me the pen

Translation: please, give me the pen

ينطعأ ملقلا نم كلضف

‘a”Tinyi (a)l-qalam(a) min faDlik(a)

= please, (you)(m., s.) give me the pen

Translation: give me the pen, please

اؤده نم مكلضف

hudwu’a(n) min faDlikum

= (I ask for) a quietness, please (m., p.)

Translation: quiet, please

Of Your Favor

Masc., Sing. min faDlik(a) نم كلضف

Fem., Sing. min faDlik(i) نم كلضف

Dual min faDlikumaa نم امكلضف

Masc., Plur. min faDlikum نم مكلضف

Fem., Plur. min faDlikunna نم نكلضف


A third way for a request us by using the following word:

ءاجر …

rajaa’a(n) …

= (I beg) a begging …

This is more urgent than the previous two. It also means “please” or “excuse me” and it is

used just like the formulas mentioned above; however, it has only this conjugation.

ءاجر يندعس

rajaa’a(n) saa”idnyi

= please (you)(m., s.) help me

Translation: please help me

يندعس ءاجر

saa”idnyi rajaa’a(n)

= (you)(m., s.) help me, please

Translation: help me, please

A common polite formula for a request in Arabic is the following.

له نم نكمملا نأ …

hal min(a) (a)l-mumkin(i) ‘an …

= is it that (he/it) (is) of the possible that … ?

Translation: is it possible that .. ?

The particle ‘an نأ “that” is called in Arabic “infinitival ‘an” because it is used to form

“infinitival phrases” or infinitives – just similar to how the particle “to” is used to form infinitives

in English. An imperfective verb following ‘an must be in the subjunctive mood.

له نم نكمملا نأ يندعست

hal min(a) (a)l-mumkin(i) ‘an tusaa”idanyi

= is it possible that (you)(m., s.) help me?

Translation: would/could you help me?

أ نم نكمملا نأ يندعست

‘a-min(a) (a)l-mumkin(i) ‘an tusaa”idyinyi

= is it possible that (you)(f., s.) help me?

Translation: would/could you help me?


The difference in this variant is that the interrorgative particle ‘a- -أ is used instead of hal له –

which changes nothing.

أ حمست …

‘a-tasmaH(u) ‘an …

= is it that (you)(m., s.) allow that … ?

= is it that (you)(m., s.) will allow that … ?

أ تحمس نأ ذخأ باتكلا

‘a-tasmaH(u) ‘an ‘aakhuth(a) (a)l-kitaab(a)

= is it that (you)(m., s.) will allow that (I) take the book?

Translation: may I take the book?

له حمست كلئسأ الاوس

hal tasmaHyin(a) ‘an ‘as’alak(i) su’aala(n)

= is it that (you)(f., s.) will allow that (I) ask you a question

Translation: may I take ask you a question?

Will You Allow That … ?

Masc., Sing. ‘a-tasmaH(u) ‘an أ حمست نأ

Fem., Sing. ‘a-tasmaHyin(a) ‘an أ نيحمست نأ

Dual ‘a-tasmaHaan(i) ‘an أ ناحمست نأ

Masc., Plur. ‘a-tasmaHwun(a) ‘an أ نوحمست نأ

Fem., Plur. ‘a-tasmaHn(u) ‘an أ نحمست نأ

Urging Particles

Another way for a polite request in formal Arabic is by means of the “urging” particles.

Particles of “urging” or “inducement” are a set of particles used to “urge” somebody to do

something.

Urging Partciles

= will/would have?

= can/could have?

hal-laa اله

‘a-laa الأ

‘allaa الأ

law-laa الول

law-maa امول

Excluding the first one – hal-laa اله – all of theswe compound particles are

archaic and not used in modern Arabic.


The particle haa-laa اله is often used for a request – although it can also mean “reproach,”

depending on the situation.

اله ينتدعاس

hal-laa saa”adtanyi

= would have (you)(m., s.) helped me?

Translation: would/could you help me? or you

could have helped me

اله يندعاس

hal-laa tusaa”idunyi

= will (you)(m., s.) help me?

Translation: will/can you help me?

When haa-laa اله is followed by an imperfective verb, it means only “urging” or request –

and maybe command.

الأ ينتنعأ

‘a-laa ‘a”antanyi

= would have (you)(m., s.) helped me?

Translation: would/could you help me? or you could have helped me

امول انيتأت ةكئالملاب نإ تنك نم نيقداصلا

law-maa ta’tyinaa bi(a)l-malaa’ika(ti) ‘in kunt(a) min(a) (a)S-Saadiqyin(a)

= will (you)(m., s.) come (to) us with the angels if (you) were from/of the honest

(people)?

Translation: would/could you bring us the angels if you were honerst? or you could

have brought us the angels if you were honest

Common Ways for a Request in Arabic

Please/excuse me

law samaHt(a) … … ول تحمس

min faDlik(a) … … نم كلضف

rajaa’a(n) … … ءاجر

Is it possible that … ? hal min(a) (a)l-mumkin(i) ‘an … ? … له نم مملانك نآ

Will you allow that … ? ‘a-tasmaH(u) ‘an … … أ حمست نأ

= will/would have … ?

= can/could have … ? haa-laa … … اله


Infinitival/Indefinite maa ام

The word maa ام can mean several things in Arabic.

It can be an interrogative pronoun meaning “what?”

It can be a relative pronoun meaning “what…?”

It can be a negative word meaning “not”

The remaining major function of maa ام is that it can be a word denoting indefiniteness or a

word functioning very much as infinitival ‘an نأ which means “that” as in “I know that you like

it.” This kind of maa is translated most of the time to the English word “ever.”

Ever

“Ever” can be combined to several pronouns in English to confer a sense of indefiniteness of

them, such as “whatever,” “whenever,” “whoever,” etc. In Arabic, this is the job of maa ام . This

word is often used to confer a sense of indefiniteness on other words.

امنيأ = نيأ + ام

‘ayn(a) + maa = ‘aynamaa

where + that = where that = wherever

امهم = ام + ام

maa + maa = mah-maa

where + that = what that = whatever

Sometimes maa ام will be conjoined to the other word – like in the two examples – and

sometimes it will not. Following is a list of interrogative pronouns with infinitival/ indefinite maa

.ام

Interrogative Pronoun + maa ام

Whatever mah-maa امهم

Whenever mataa-maa ام ام

‘ayyaana maa امنايأ

Wherever ‘ayna-maa امنيأ

However kayfa-maa امفيك

Whichever ‘ayyu-maa اميأ


امهم لواحت لشفم

mah-haa tuHaawil tafshal

= whatever (you)(m., s.) try (you)(m., s.) fail

Translation: whatever you try, you will fail

Note: This is a conditional style and the imperfective verbs here

must be in the jussive mood.

اماتم تيتأ يندجت

mataa-maa ‘atayt(a) tajidnyi

= whenever (you)(m., s.) came (you)(m., s.) find me

Translation: when you come, you will find me

The first verb is a perfective verb because it is meant as a subjunctive verb.

امنيأ طقسي رطملا رضخت ضرعلا

‘ayna-maa tasquT(i) (a)l-maTar(u) takhDarr(i) (a)l-‘arD(u)

= wherever (he) fall the rain (she) green the earth

Translation: wherever the rain falls, the earth greens up

يبهذإ امفيك نيأشت

‘ithhabyi kayfa-maa tashaa’yin(a)

= (you)(f., s.) go however (you)(f., s.) wish

Translation: go however you like

The word “whoever/whomever” is not mentioned in the table. The indefinite pronouns

“whoever” and “whomever” are commonly used in English, but they are never used in Arabic.

The usually way of expressing these words in Arabic is by using the word ‘ayyu-maa يأ ام

“whichever.” For example, in Arabic “whoever knows this will be killed” would be spoken

“whichever of a man/woman knows this will be killed.” The word “whichever” has to be

followed by another noun to complement it.

اميأ لجر يندعاسي لني باوثلا

‘ayyu-maa rajul(in) yusaa”idnyi yanal(i) (a)th-thawaab(a)

= whichever (of) a man helps me (he) gets the reward

Translation: whoever helps me will be rewarded

رثعأ يل ىلع اميأ ةقش عيطتست

‘a”thur lyi “alaa ‘ayyi-maa shaqqat(in) tastaTyi”(u)

= (you)(m., s.) trip for me on/over whichever (of) an apartment (you)(m., s.) can

Translation: find me whichever apartment you can

Note: The phrase ‘a”thur lyi رثعأ يل “tripped over” figuratively means “found.”


Infinitival maa ام can be combined to many words other than the interrogative pronouns

mentioned above.

Whenever

Hyina-maa امنيح

(at the) time (of) that

waqta-maa امتقو

(at the) time (of) that

Until raytha-maa

امثير(the) slowing (of) that

Before that … qabla-maa …

املبقbefore that …

After that … ba”da-maa …

امدعبafter that …

Wherever Haythu-maa

امتيح(at the) place (of) that

When/Where “inda-maa

امدنع(at the) time/place (of) that

Like mithla-maa

املثمlike that

Every time that … kulla-maa …

املكevery that …

Maybe rubba-maa

امبرthere is a lot/a little (of) that

Especially laa siyya-maa

ال اميسnot (a thing) like that

In order to/so that … kay-maa …

اميكin order to that …

Like ka-maa

امكlike that

Some of these words may also be joined to the other types of maa ام – and some words may

be followed by the same infinitival maa ام without being joined to form a single word. Infinitival

maa ام can also be combined to several perfectuive verbs to produce adverbs.


Some

maa ام is the Arabic equivalent for the word “some” in such words as “somebody.” However,

in this case it will not mean “that” but it will be just a mere indicator of indefiniteness.

Some’s

Somebody shakhS(un) maa

صخش امa person unspecific

Someone ‘aHad(un) maa

دحأ امa one unspecific

Someday yawm(a) maa

موي امa day unspecific

Someway

Somehow

Somewise

bi-Taryiqa(tin) maa ةقيرطب ام

in a way inspecific

bi-wasyila(tin) maa ةليسوب ام

in a way unspecific

Something shay’(un) maa

ءيش امa thing unspecific

Sometime fyi waqt(in) maa

يف تقو امin a time unspecific

Somewhat

naw”a(n) maa اعون ام

a kind unspecific

‘ilaa Hadd(in) maa ىلإ دح ام

to a limit unspecific

Somewhere fyi makaan(in) maa

يف ناكم امin a place unspecific

When “sometime” is an adjective meaning “former,” it will be in Arabic saabiq(un)

.قباس

“Sometimes” is usually understood as “some of the times,” so the word maa ام cannot

be used in translating this word – because it is only used with singular nouns, not

plural nouns. When translating “sometimes,” the actual word for “some” will be used

instead of the indefinite maa ام – or more commonly the word “times” alone will be

declined in the accusative case.


Sometimes

(at) times ‘aHyaana(n) انايحأ

in some (of) the times fyi ba”D(i) (a)l-‘aHyaan(i) يف ضعب انايحألا

in some (of) the times fyi ba”D(i) (a)l-‘awqaat(i) يف ضعب تاقوألا

هيلاسأ الاؤس ام

‘is’alyih(i) su’aala(n) maa

= (you)(f., s.) ask him a question unspecific

Translation: ask him some question

Meanings for maa ام

Meaning Example

Interrogative

Pronoun what … ? what is your name?

Relative Pronoun what … what you did was outrageous

… what … I know what you did

Negative Word not you can not do that

Indefinite

ever whatever you do, I’ll find out about it

some (with

countable

singulars)

somebody left him glasses here

he was reading some book


XI. SURVIVAL PHRASES

Formal Arabic

Apart from the written language, survival phrases in formal Arabic are not really used

anywhere in real life – except on television, in theaters, etc.

I. Basics

yes

na”am معن

‘ajal لجأ

‘yi يإ

no

laa ال

kallaa الك

okay Hasana(n)

حانسfine

please

(to a male)

min faDlik(a) نم كلضف

of your favor

law samaH(a) ول تحمس

if you allowed

‘ithaa samaHt(a) اذإ تحمس

if you allowed

law ‘athint(a) ول تنذإ

if you allowed

‘ithaa ‘athint(a) اذإ تنذإ

if you allowed

please

(to a female)

min faDliki نم كلضف

of your favor

law samaHi ول تحمس

if you allowed

‘ithaa samaHti اذإ تحمس

if you allowed

law ‘athinti ول تنذإ

if you allowed

‘ithaa ‘athinti اذإ تنذإ

if you allowed


thank you

(to a male)

shukran اركش

thanks

shukran lak(a) اركش كل

thanks to you

‘ashkuruk(a) كركشأ

I thank you

thank you

(to a female)

shukran اركش

thanks

shukran laki اركش كل

thanks to you

‘ashkuruki كركشأ

I thank you

you’re welcome

(responding to

“thank you”)

“afwan اوفع

(I beg) pardoning

“alaa (a)r-raHb(i) wa a(a)s-sa”a(ti)

on wideness and (you have come) ىلع بحرلا و ةعسلا

abundance

laa shukr(a) “alaa wa ‘ajib(in) ال ركش ىلع و بجأ

no thanks for a duty

excuse me

ma”thira(tan) ةرذعم

(I beg) excusing

“afwan اوفع

(I beg) pardoning

excuse me

(male)

‘anaa ‘aasif(un) انأ فسأ

I (am) sorry

excuse me

(female)

‘anaa ‘aaifa(tun) انأ ةفسأ

I (am) sorry

sorry

(male)

‘aasif(un) فسأ

sorry

sorry

(female)

‘aaifa(tun) ةفسأ

sorry

no problem laa mushkila(ta)

ال ةلكشمno problem


hello as-salaam(u) “alaykum

مالسلا مكيلعthe peace on you

hello

(response)

wa ‘alaykum(u) (a)s-salaam(u) و مكيلع مالسلا

and on you the peace

welcome

marHaban) ابحرم

(you have come to) wideness

‘ahlan الهأ

(you have come to) a family

‘ahlan wa sahlan الهأ و الهس

(you have come to) a family and a

plain land

good

morning

SabaaH(u) (a)l-khayr(i) حابص ريخلا

(the) morning of well being

In Classical Arabic

good morning

(to a male)

“im SabaaHa(n) مع احابص

have a pleasant morning

“imt(a) Sabaaha(n) تمع احابص


good morning

(to a female)

“imyi SabaaHa(n) يمع احابص


“imti Sabaaha(n) تمع احابص


good afternoon not used

good evening masaa’(u) (a)l-khayr(i)

ءاسم ريخلا(the) evening of well being

good evening

(to a male)

“im masaa’a(n) مع ءاسم

have a pleasant evening

“imt(a) masaa’a(n) تمع ءاسم


good evening

(to a female)

“imyi massa’a(n) يمع ءاسم


“imti masaa’a(n) تمع ءاسم



good night

(to a male)

tuSbiH(u) “alaa khayr(in) حبصت ىلع ريخ

you be in morning with well being

layla(tan) haani’a(tan) ةليل ةئناه

(I wish you) a pleasant night

good night

(to a female)

tuSbiHyin(a) “alaa khayr(in) نيحبصت ىلع ريخ

you be in morning with well being

layla(tan) haani’a(tan) ةليل ةئناه

(I wish you) a pleasant night

goodbye

wadaa”an اعادو

(I beg) excusing

ma”(a) (a)s-salmaama(ti) عم ةمالسلا

(I beg) pardoning

see you later

(to a male)

‘ilaa (a)l-liqaa’(i) ىلإ ءاقللا

to the meeting

‘araak(a) laaHiqan كارأ اقحال

see you later

see you later

(to a female)

‘ilaa (a)l-liqaa’(i) ىلإ ءاقللا

to the meeting

‘araaki laaHiqan كارأ اقحال

see you later

II. Meeting and Greeting

How are you?

to a male

فيك كلاح

kayf(a) Haaluk(a)

= how (is) (the) state (of) you?

to a female

فيك كلاح

kayf(a) Haaluki

= how (is) (the) state (of) you?


I am fine, thanks

انأ ريخب اركش

‘anaa bi-khayr(in) shukra(n)

= I (am) in well-being, thanks

I am very glad to meet you

male to male

انأ ديعس ادج لبكئاق

‘anaa sa”yid(un) jidda(n) bi-liqaa’ik(a)

= I (am) happy much for (the) meeting (of) you

female to female

انأ ةديعس ادج كئاقلب

‘anaa sa”yida(tun) jidda(n) bi-liqaa’iki

= I (am) happy much for (the) meeting (of) you

Do you speak English?

to a male

له ثدحتت ةيزيلغنالا

hal tataHaddath(u) (a)l-‘inghlyiziyya(ta)

= is it that (you) speak English?

to a female

له نيثدحتت ةيزيلغنالا

hal tataHaddathyin(a) (a)l-‘inghlyiziyya(ta)

= is it that (you) speak English?

Does anyone here speak English?

له دجوي انه نم ثدحتي ةيزيلغنالا

hal ywujad(u) hunaa man yataHaddath(u) (a)l-

‘inghlyiziyya(ta)

= is it that (he) exists here who speaks English?

I only speak a little Arabic

انأ ثدحتأ اليلق نم ةيبرعلا طقف

‘anaa ‘ataHaddath(u) qalyilan min(a) (a)l-

“arabiyya(ti) faqaT

= I speak a little of Arabic only


What is your name?

to a male

ام كمسإ

maa (‘i)smuk(a)

= what (is) (the) name (of) you?

to a female

ام كمسإ

maa (‘i)smuki

= what (is) (the) name (of) you?

My name is John

يمسإ نوج

‘ismyi jwun(un)

= (the) name (of) me (is) John

I don’t understand

مل مهفأ

lam ‘afham

= did not (I) understand

What did you say?

to a male

اذام تلق

maathaa qult(a)

= what (you) said?

to a female

اذام تلق

maathaa qulti

= what (you) said?

Can you speak more slowly?

to a male

له كنكمي نأ ثدحتت لكشب اطبأ

hal yumkinuk(a) ‘an tataHaddath(a) bi-shakl(in) ‘abta’(a)

= is it that (he/it) is possible for you that (you) speak in a slower manner?


to a female

له كنكمي نأ يثدحتت لكشب اطبأ

hal yumkinuki ‘an tataHaddathyi bi-shakl(in) ‘abta’(a)

= is it that (she) is possible for you that (you) speak in a slower manner?

I understand perfectly

to a male

انأ كمهفأ امامت

‘anaa ‘afhanuk(a) tamaama(n)

= I understand perfectly

to a female

انأ كمهفأ امامت

‘anaa ‘afhanuki tamaama(n)

= I understand perfectly

III. Others

That’s enough haathaa takfyi

اذه تيفكthis suffices

What is this? maa haatha

ام اذهwhat (is) this?

How much is this? bi-kam haathaa

مكب اذهby how much (is) this?

Where is … ? ‘ayn(a)

نيأ …Where is … ?


Appendix A

Glossary of Arabic Verbs


Arabic – English

Arabic Script Form Transliteration Meaning

ا

I ‘ataa come, arrive ىتأ

II ‘aththara influence, affect رثأ

X ‘istaajara rent, hire رجاتسإ

I ‘akhatha gake, get ذخأ

V ta’akhkhara be late رخأت

I ‘athana permit, allow نذأ

I ‘akala eat لكأ

II ‘allafa author أفل

I ‘amara order رمأ

I ‘amala hope لمأ

ب

I baa”a sell عاب

I baHatha search , seek ثحب

I baHatha “an look for, explore ثحب نع

IV ‘abHara sail رحبأ

I bada’a begin, start أدب

II baddala replace, change لدب

II barrara justify, acquit ررب

III baaraka bless كراب

VIII ‘ibtasama smile مستبإ

I baSaqa spit قصب

III baaghata surprise تغاب

I baqiya remain, stay يقب

I bakaa cry, weep ىكب

II ballagha report غلب

IV ‘ablagha make, attain غلبأ

I banaa build ىنب

VI tabaahaa be proud ىهابت



ت

I taba”a follow عبت

I taraka leave, let be كرت

ث

IV ‘athaara raise an issue راثأ

IV ‘athrata prove ترثأ

I thanaa bend ىنث

ج

I jaa’a come ءاج

IV ‘ajaaba answer, reply باجأ

II jaddada renew ددج

I jariha wound, injure, hurt حرج

I jalasa sit down سلج

I jamada freeze, harden دمج

I jama”a collect عمج

VIII ‘ijtama”a meet, assemble عمتجإ

V tajanaba avoid بنجت

VI tajaahala ignore لهاجت

VI tajaawaza exceed زواجت

ح

VIII ‘iHtaaja have need جاتحإ

I Haaka knit كاح

IV ‘aHabba like, love بحأ

I Hajaza prevent, reserve زجح

I Hadatha happen, take place, occur ثدح

V taHaddatha talk, talk about, talk with ثدحت

II Haddada define ددح

II Haththara warn رذح



I Harasa guard سرح

II Haraqa burn قرح

II Harrama forbid مرح

I Hasaba calculate بسح

II Hassana improve نسح

I HaSala (`alaa) obtain, get لصح (ىلع)

IV ‘iHaDara bring, get رضحإ

I HaDana hug, embrace نضح

V taHaTTama crash مطحت

I Hafara dig رفح

I HafiZa memorize ظفح

III HaafaZa “alaa preserve, maintain ظفاح ىلع

VIII ‘iHtafaZa keep up ظفتحإ

II Haqqaqa achieve, investigate ققح

X ‘istaHaqqa deserve قحتسإ

I Hakama rule, adjudicate مكح

I Halla solve لح

VIII ‘iHtalla occupy لتحإ

I Halafa swear فلح

I Halaqa shave قلح

I Halama dream ملح

X ‘istaHama bathe إمحتس

I Hamaa protect ىمح

I Hamala bear, carry لمح

VIII ‘iHtamala carry لمتحإ

VII ‘inHanaa bend ىنحنإ

III Haawala try لواح

خ

VIII ‘ikhtaba’a hide ءابتخإ

I khaaTa sew طاخ

I khaafa fear فاخ

IV ‘akhbara tell, inform ربخأ



VIII ‘ikhtabara test ربتخإ

I khabaza bake زبخ

VIII ‘ikhtaara choose راتخإ

I khadama serve مدخ

X ‘istakhadama employ مدختسإ

I kharaja exit جرخ

V takharraja graduate جرخت

I khasara lose رسخ

I khaDara come, attend رضخ

IV ‘akhTaa (make a) mistake ءىطخأ

II khaTTaTa map out خطط

VIII ‘ikhtafaa disappear from sight ىفتخإ

IV ‘akhfaqa fail قفخأ

I khalasa steal سلخ

V takhallaSa min get rid of صلخت نم

I Khala”a take off علخ

VIII ‘ikhtalfa differ فلتخإ

II khammana assume, guess نمخ

V takhayyala imagine ليخت

د

IV ‘adara manage, direct رادأ

I dakhala enter لخد

II dakhkhana smoke نخد

I dariba be trained برد

II darraba train برد

I darasa study سرد

II darrasa teach سرد

I da”aa invite اعد

I dafa”a push back عفد

VII ‘indafa”a rush off عفدنإ

I dalla guide لد

I dalaqa spill قلد



II dammara destroy رمد

ذ

IV ‘athaa`a broadcast عاذأ

I thadaHa slay حبذ

I thakara mention, remember ركذ

II thakkara remind ركذ

V tathakkara remember ركذت

V tathammara complain رمذت

I thahaba go بهذ

V tathawwaqa taste تقوذ

ر

IV ‘araada want دارأ

I ra’aa see ىار

II rabbaa breed ابر

I rabiHa win حبر

I rabaTa attach, bind طبر

I rabaka confuse كبر

II rattaba arrange بتر

V tarajaHa swing حجرت

X ‘istaraja”a recover عجرتسإ

II raHHaba welcome بحر

X ‘istarakhaa relax ىخرتسإ

V taraddada be thrown back ددرت

IV ‘arsala send out لسرأ

VI taraasala correspond with لسارت

I rasama draw مسر

I rafaDa decline, refuse ضفر

I raqaba observe, watch بقر

III raaqaba supervise, watch بقار

I raqaSa dance صقر



I rakaba ride بكر

,VIII ‘irtakaba commit a mistake بكترإ

commit a crime

II rakkaza concentrate زكر

I rakaDa run ضكر

I raka”a kneel down عكر

I ramaa throw ىمر

I ranna ring نر

III raahana bet نهار

ز

I zaara visit راز

IV ‘azaala remove لازأ

I zaHafa crawl, creep فحز

izdaada increase‘ دادزإ

I zaraà plant عرز

IV ‘az”aja disturb, harass, rouse جعزأ

VII ‘inzalaqa slide قلزنإ

V tazawwaja marry, wed جوزت

س

I sa’ala ask لأس

VI tasaàla inquire لأست

V tasabbaba be caused ببست

I sabaHa swim حبس

IV ‘asra”a speed up عرسأ

VI tasaara”a hurry عراست

I saraqa steal قرس

III saa”ada help, assist دعاس

IV ‘isàda make happy دعسأ

III saafara travel رفاس

I saqaTa fail طقس



I sakana live, reside نكس

II sallama “alaa greet ملس ىلع

IV ‘aslama convert to Islam ملسأ

VIII ‘istalama receive ملتسإ

X ‘istasalama surrender ملستسإ

I samaHa allow حمس

III saamaHa forgive حماس

I sama”a hear, listen عمس

VIII ‘istama”a “ilaa listen to عمتسإ ىلإ

I sahara spend the night رهس

V tasawwaqa buy and sell in the market قوست

III saawaa Be worth ىواس

ش

IV ‘ashaara ‘ilaa indicate راشأ ىلإ

II shajja”a encourage عجش

VIII ‘ishtaraa buy ىرتشإ

I sharaba drink برش

I sharaHa explain حرش

III shaaraka share, participate كراش

I sha”ara feel, sense رعش

VII ‘inshaghala busy oneself لغشنإ

I shakka doubt كش

I shakaa complain اكش

I shakara thank ركش

I shakala form, shape لكش

I shamila include لمش

VIII ‘ishtaaqa “ilaa long for قاتشإ ىلإ

III shaahada see, watch دهاش

ص

I Saama fast ماص

I Sabba cast بص



III Saadaqa treat as a friend قداص

IV ‘aSbaha become حبصأ

II SaHHaHa correct ححص

I SaHaa wake up احص

I Sarakha scream, shout خرص

I Sarafa spend فرص

II Sarrafa exchange (currency) فرص

V taSarrafa behave فرصت

I Sa”ada go up دعص

II Saffaqa clap قفص

II SallaHa fix حلص

IV ‘aSallaHa repair حلصأ

II Salluwu pray ولص

I Sana”a make عنص

V taSawara imagine روصت

ض

I DaHika laugh كحض

I Daraba hit, strike برض

I DaghaTa “alaa pressure طغض ىلع

IV ‘aDaa”a light ءاضأ

IV ‘aDaafa add فاضأ

ط

I Tabakha cook خبط

I TaHana grind نحط

III Taarada chase دراط

I Talaba request بلط

III Taalaba demand بلاط

II TawwaHa throw حوط

IV ‘aTaaha drop حاطأ

I Tawaa fold ىوط



I Taara fly راط

ظ

I Zahara appear رهظ

ع

I “abara cross ربع

II “abbara “an express ربع نع

VIII ‘i”tabara consider ربتعإ

VIII “itathara apologize رذتعإ

VIII “itadara apologize ردتعإ

I “araDa show ضرع

III “aaraDa disagree ضراع

I “arafa know فرع

VIII “itarafa admit, confess فرتعإ

I “aSara squeeze رصع

I “aDDa bite ضع

I “aTasa sneeze سطع

IV ‘a”Taa give ىطعأ

III “aaqaba punish بقاع

VIII “itaqadaa believe firmly دقتعإ

VIII “itaqala arrest لقتعإ

II “allaqa hang قلع

I “alima learn ملع

II “allama teach, educate ملع

V ta”allama learn something ملعت

IV ‘a”lana advertise, announce نلعأ

I “amila work, do لمع

VI ta”amala trade لماعت

X ‘ista”amala use لمعتسإ

III “aanaa suffer ىناع

III “aanaqa hug قناع



I “aada return داع

IV ‘a”aada repeat داعأ

I ‘a”aara lend راعأ

X ‘ista”aara borrow (not money) راعتسإ

I “aasha live شاع

غ

II ghaththaa feed ىذغ

I gharaqa sink قرغ

I ghasala wash لسغ

II ghashsha cheat شغ

I ghaDaba min / “alaa be angry with بضغ نم / ىلع

IV “aghDaba upset بضغأ

II ghaTTaa cover ىطغ

V taghallaba “alaa overcome بلغت ىلع

IV ‘aghlaqa be closed, be shut قلغأ

II ghallaa boil ىلغ

I ghanniya sing ينغ

I ghaaSa dive صاغ

I ghaaba be absent باغ

I ghaara protect jealously راغ

II ghayyiira change something ريغ

ف

I fataHa open حتف

III faaja’a surprise أجاف

VII ‘enfajara burst, explode رجفنإ

I farra flee رف

I fashila fail لشف

II faDDala prefer لضف

I faqada lose دقف

II fakkara think ركف



I fahama understand مهف

ق

I qabila accept لبق

II qabbala kiss لبق

III qaabala meet لباق

X `istaqbala welcome قتسإلب

I qatala murder لتق

II qattala kill لتق

VI taqaatala fight with one another لتاقت

II qaddama send off مدق

II qarrara decide ررق

X ‘istaqarra settle down رقتسإ

I qara’a read أرق

VIII ‘iqtaraba get close برتقإ

VIII ‘aqtaraHa suggest حرتقإ

III qaarana compare نراق

I qasama split مسق

II qassama divide مسق

I qasaa act cruelly, be harsh اسق

I qaSada mean دصق

I qafaza jump زفق

I qalla decrease لق

V taqallaSa shrink صلقت

I qaliqa become uneasy قلق

I qaada drive, lead داق

I qaala say لاق

III qaawama withstand مواق

ك

I kataba write بتك

I kathaba lie بذك



II kararra repeat ررك

IV ‘akrama honor مركأ

I karaha hate, dislike هرك

I kasaba earn بسك

I kasara break رسك

I kashafa expose, detect فشك

VII ‘inkashafa be exposed فشكنإ

VIII ‘iktashafa discover فشتكإ

III kaafaHa struggle حفاك

V takalama speak ملكت

V takalama “an talk about ملكت نع

V takalama ma”a talk with ملكت عم

IV ‘akmala be complete, be finish ed لمكأ

I kaana be ناك

ل

I labisa wear, dress سبل

III laaHaZa notice ظحال

I lasa”a sting (verbally) عسل

I la”iba play بعل

I laffa wind فل

VIII ‘iltaqaa meet ىقتلإ

I lamasa touch سمل

I lama”a shine عمل

II lawwana paint نول

IV ‘ilawaa twist ىولإ

م

X “istamta”a enjoy عتمتسإ

X ‘istamarra continue رمتسإ

I maraDa become sick ضرم

I mazaHa joke حزم



II mazzaqa tear قزم

I masaHa erase حسم

IV ‘amsaka seize كسمأ

V tamassaka cling كسمت

I mashaa walk ىشم

V tamashshaa walk, stroll, walk around ىشمت

I maDagha chew عضم

V tamakkana enable نكمت

I malaa fill الم

I mana”a prevent عنم

VIII ‘imtana”a refrain عنتمإ

V tamannaa want, wish ىنمت

ن

I najaHa succeed حجن

VIII ‘intakhaba select بختنإ

I nadama regret مدن

I nazafa be drained فزن

I nazala go down لزن

III naasaba fit بسان

I nasakha copy خسن

I nasiya forget يسن

I nashara spread out رشن

I NaSaHa advise حصن

I naZara look رظن

VIII ‘intaZara wait رظتنإ

II naZZafa clean فظن

I nafakha blow خفن

VIII ‘intafakha swell خفتنإ

II naffatha carry out, execute ذفن

V tanaffasa breathe سفنت

VI tanaafasa compete سفانت

IV ‘anfaqa spend قفنأ



VIII ‘intaqada criticize دقتنإ

IV ‘anqatha rescue ذقنأ

III naaqasha discuss, argue شقان

VI tanaaqasha debate شقانت

I naqala move, transfer, deliver لقن

VIII ‘intaqala move about لقتنإ

VIII ‘intaqala ‘ilaa move to لقتنإ ىلإ

I nakaa hurt ىكن

I namaa grow ىمن

I nahaDa rise ضهن

IV ‘anhaa end ىهنأ

VI tanaawala discuss, eat a meal لوانت

I naama sleep مان

I nawaa intend ىون

ه

I hajara abandon رجه

III haajara emigrate رجاه

III haajama attack مجاه

X ‘istahadafa target فدهتسإ

I hadama demolish, tear down مده

I haraba escape بره

I hazza shake زه

VIII ‘ihtamma take care of متهإ

I hamasa whisper سمه

و

I wathaba leap بثو

I wathaqa trust قثو

I wajada find دجو

III waajaha face هجاو

V tawassala beg لسوت



I waSafa describe فصو

I waSala arrive, reach لصو

III waaSala continue لصاو

VIII ‘ittaSala call by telephone لصتإ

I waDa”a place, put down عضو

I wa”ada promise دعو

III waafaqa be acceptable, agree with قفاو

II waqqa”a sign عقو

V tawaqqa”a expect عقوت

I waqafa stand still, stand up فقو

V tawaqafa pause, stop فقوت

V tawaqafa “an quit فقوت نأ

ي

X ‘istayaqZa wake up ظقيتسإ


English – Arabic

English Arabic Script Form Transliteration

A

abandon رجه I hajara

(be) absent باغ I ghaaba

accept لبق I qabila

(be) acceptable قفاو III waafaqa

achieve ققح II Haqqaqa

add فاضأ IV ‘aDaafa

adjudicate مكح I Hakama

admit فرتعإ VIII ‘itarafa

advertise نلعأ IV ‘a”lana

advise حصن I NaSaHa

affect رتأ II ‘attara

Agree with قفاو III waafaqa

allow نذأ I ‘athana

I samaHa حمس

be angry with بضغ نم / ىلع I ghaDaba min / “alaa

announce نلعأ IV ‘a”lana

answer باجأ IV ‘ajaaba

apologize ردتعإ VIII ‘itadara

VIII ‘itathara رذتعإ

appear رهظ I Zahara

acquit ررب II barrara

argue شقان III naaqasha

arrange بتر II rattaba

arrest لقتعإ VIII ‘itaqala

arrive لصو I waSala

I ‘ataa ىتأ

ask لأس I Sa’ala

assemble عمتجإ VIII ‘ijtama”a

assist دعاس III saa”ada

assume نمخ II khammana



attach طبر I rabaTa

attain غلبأ IV ‘ablagha

attack مجاه III haajama

attend رضخ I khaDara

author فلأ II ‘allafa

avoid بنجت V tajanaba

B

bake زبخ I khabaza

bathe محتسإ X ‘istaHama

be ناك I kaana

bear لمح I Hamala

become حبصأ IV ‘aSbaha

beg لسوت V tawassala

begin أدب I bada”aa

behave فرصت V taSarrafa

believe firmly دقتعإ VIII ‘itaqadaa

bend ىنث I thanaa

VII ‘inhanaa ىنحنإ

bet نهار III raahana

bind طبر I rabaTa

bite ضع I `aDDa

bless كراب III baaraka

blow خفن I nafakha

boil ىلغ II ghallaa

borrow راعتسإ X ‘ista”aara

borrow (not money) راعتسإ X ‘ista”aara

break رسك I kasara

breathe سفنت V tanaffasa

breed ىبر II rabbaa

bring رضحإ IV ‘iHaDara

broadcast عاذأ IV ‘athaa`a

build ىنب I banaa



burn قرح II Haraqa

burst رجفنإ VII ‘enfajara

busy oneself لغشنإ VII ‘inshaghala

buy ىرتشإ VIII ‘ishtaraa

buy and sell in the

market V tasawwaqa قوست

C

calculate بسح I Hasaba

call by telephone لصتإ VIII ‘ittaSala

(take) care of متهإ VIII ‘ihtamma

carry لمح I Hamala

VIII ‘iHtamala لمتحإ

carry out ذفن II naffatha

cast بص I Sabba

(be) caused ببست V tasabbaba

change لدب II baddala

change something ريغ II ghayyiira

chase دراط III Taarada

cheat شغ II ghashsha

chew عضم I maDagha

choose راتخإ VIII ‘ikhtaara

clap قفص II Saffaqa

clean فظن II naZZafa

cling كسمت V tamassaka

(be) close قلغأ IV ‘aghlaqa

(get) close برتقإ VIII ‘iqtaraba

come ىتأ I ‘ataa

I jaa’a ءاج

I khaDara رضخ

command رمأ I ‘amara

commit a crime بكترإ VIII ‘irtakaba

commit a mistake بكترإ VIII ‘irtakaba



compare نراق III qaarana

complain رمذت V tathammara

I shakaa اكش

(be) complete لمكأ IV ‘akmala

compete سفانت VI tanaafasa

concentrate زكر II rakkaza

confess فرتعإ VIII ‘itarafa

confuse كبر I rabaka

consider ربتعإ VIII ‘i”tabara

continue رمتسإ X ‘istamarra

III waaSala لصاو

convert to Islam ملسأ IV ‘aslama

cook خبط I Tabakha

copy خسن I nasakha

correct ححص II SaHHaHa

correspond with لسارت VI taraasala

cover ىطغ II ghaTTaa

crash مطحت V taHaTTama

crawl فحز I zaHafa

creep فحز I zaHafa

criticize دقتنإ VIII ‘intaqada

cross ربع I `abara

(act) cruelly اسق I qasaa

cry ىكب I bakaa

D

dance صقر I raqaSa

debate شقانت VI tanaaqasha

decide ررق II qarrara

decline ضفر I rafaDa

decrease لق I qalla

define ددح II Haddada

deliver لقن I naqala



demand بلاط III Taalaba

demolish مده I hadama

describe فصو I waSafa

deserve قحتسإ X ‘istaHaqqa

destroy رمد II dammara

detect فشك I kashafa

differ فلتخإ VIII ‘ikhtalqa

dig رفح I Hafara

direct رادأ IV ‘adara

disagree ضراع III “aaraDa

disappear from sight ىفتخإ VIII ‘ikhtafaa

discover فشتكإ VIII ‘iktashafa

discuss شقان III naaqasha

VI tanaawala لوانت

dislike هرك I karaha

disturb جعزأ IV ‘az”aja

dive صاغ I ghaaSa

divide مسق II qassama

do لمع I “amila

doubt كش I shakka

(be) drained فزن I nazafa

draw مسر I rasama

dream ملح I Halama

dress سبل I labisa

drink برش I sharaba

drive داق I qaada

drop حاطأ IV ‘aTaaha

E

earn بسك I kasaba

eat لكأ I ‘akala

eat a meal لوانت VI tanaawala

educate ملع II “allama



embrace نضح I HaDana

employ مدختسإ X ‘istakhadama

en able نكمت V tamakkana

encourage عجش II shajja”a

end ىهنأ IV ‘anhaa

enjoy عتمتسإ X “istamta”a

enter لخد I dakhala

sweep حسم I masaHa

escape بره I haraba

exceed زواجت VI tajaawaza

exchange (currency) فرص II Sarrafa

execute ذفن II naffazha

exit جرخ I kharaja

expect عقوت V tawaqqa”a

explain حرش I sharaHa

explode رجفنإ VII ‘enfajara

expose فشك I kashafa

(be) exposed فشكنإ VII ‘inkashafa

explore ثحب نع I baHatha “an

express ربع نع II “abbara “an

F

face هجاو III waajaha

fail قفخأ IV ‘akhfaqa

I saqaTa طقس

I fashila لشف

fast ماص I Saama

fear فاخ I khaafa

feed ىذغ II ghaththaa

feel رعش I sha”ara

fight one another لتاقت VI taqaatala

fill الم I malaa

find دجو I wajada



(be) finished لمكأ IV ‘akmala

fit بسان III naasaba

fix حلص II SallaHa

flee راط I Taara

fold ىوط I Tawaa

follow عبت I taba”a

forbid مرح I Harrama

forget يسن I nasiya

forgive حماس III saamaHa

form لكش I shakala

freeze دمج I jamada

(treat as a) friend قداص III Saadaqa

G

get (ىلع) لصح I HaSala (“alaa)

IV ‘iHaDara رضحإ

I ‘akhatha ذخأ

give ىطعأ IV ‘a”Taa

go بهذ I thahaba

go down لزن I nazala

go up دعص I Sa”ada

graduate جرخت V takharraja

greet ملس ىلع II sallama “alaa

I hayaa ىيه

grind نحط I TaHana

grow ىمن I namaa

guard سرح I Harasa

guess نمخ II khammana

guide لد I dalla



H

hang قلع II “allaqa

happen ثدح I Hadatha

(make) happy دعسأ IV ‘is”ada

harass جعزأ IV ‘az”aja

harden دمج I jamada

(be) harsh قاس I qasaa

hate هرك I karaha

hear عمس I sama”a

help دعاس III saa”ada

hide ابتخإ VIII ‘ikhtabaa

hire رجاتسإ V ‘istaajara

hit برض I Daraba

honor مركأ IV ‘akrama

hope لمأ I ‘amala

hug نضح I HaDana

III “aanaqa قناع

hurry عراست VI tasaara”a

hurt حرج I jariha

I nakaa ىكن

I

ignore لهاجت VI tajaahala

imagine ليخت V takhayyala

V taSawara روصت

immigrate رجاه III haajara

improve نسح II Hassana

include لمش I shamila

increase دادزإ ‘izdaada

indicate راشأ ىلإ IV ‘ashaara “ilaa

influence رتأ II ‘attara

inform ربخأ IV ‘akhbara



injure حرج I jariha

inquire لأست VI tasa`ala

intend ىون I nawaa

investigate ققح II Haqqaqa

invite اعد I da”aa

J

joke حزم I mazaHa

jump زفق I qafaza

justify ررب II barrara

K

keep up ظفتحإ VIII ‘iHtafaZa

kill لتق II qattala

kiss لبق II qabbala

kneel down عكر I raka”a

knit كاح I Haaka

know فرع I “arafa

L

(be) late رخأت VI ta’akhkhara

laugh كحض I DaHika

lead داق I qaada

leap بثو I wathaba

learn ملع I “alima

learn something ملعت V Ta”allama

leave كرت I taraka

lend راعأ I ‘a”aara

let be كرت I taraka

lie بذك I kathaba

light ءاضأ IV ‘aDaa`a

like بحأ IV ‘aHabba



listen عمس I sama”

listen to عمتسإ ىلإ VIII ‘istama”a ‘ilaa

live نكس I sakana

I “aasha شاع

long for قاتشإ ىلإ VIII ‘ishtaaqa ‘ilaa

look رظن I naZara

look for ثحب نع I baHatha “an

lose رسخ I khasara

I faqada دقف

love بحأ IV ‘aHabba

M

maintain ظفاح تلع III HaafaZa “alaa

make غلبأ IV ‘ablagha

I sana”a عنص

manage رادأ IV ‘adara

map out ططخ II khaTTaTa

marry جوزت V tazawwaja

mean دصق I qaSada

meet عمتجإ VIII ‘ijtama”a

III qaabala لباق

VIII ‘iltaqaa ىقتلإ

memorize ظفح I HafiZa

mention ركذ I thakara

(make a) mistake اطخأ IV ‘akhTaa

move لقن I naqala

move about لقتنإ VIII ‘intaqala

move to لقتنإ ىلإ VIII ‘intaqala ‘ilaa

murder لتق I qatala

N

(have) need جاتحإ VIII ‘iHtaaja



notice ظحال III laaHaZa

O

observe بقر I raqaba

obtain (ىلع) لصح I HaSala (“alaa)

occupy لتحإ VIII ‘iHtalla

occur ثدح I Hadatha

open حتف I fataHa

order رمأ I ‘amara

overcome بلغت ىلع V taghallaba “alaa

P

paint نول II lawwana

participate كراش III shaaraka

pause فقوت V tawaqafa

permit نذأ I ‘azhana

place عضو I waDa”a

plant عرز I zara”a

play بعل I la”iba

pray ولص II Salluwu

prefer لضف II faDDala

preserve ظفاح ىلع III HaafaZa “alaa

pressure طغض ىلع I DaghaTa “alaa

prevent ىلغ II ghallaa

I mana”a عنم

promise دعو I wa”ada

protect ىمح I Hamaa

protect jealously ريغ I ghayara

(be) proud ىهابت VI tabaahaa

prove ترثأ IV ‘athrata

punish بقاع III “aaqaba

push back عفد I dafa”a

put down عضو I waDa”a



Q

quit فقوت نأ V tawaqafa ‘an

R

raise an issue راثأ IV ‘athaara

reach لصو I waSala

read أرق I qara’a

(get) ready دعتسإ X ‘ista”adda

receive ملتسإ VIII ‘istalama

recover عجرتسإ X ‘istaraja”a

refrain عنتمإ VIII ‘imtana”a

regret مدن I nadama

relax ىخرتسإ X ‘istarakhaa

remain يقب I baqiya

remember ركذ I thakara

V tathakkara ركذت

remind ركذ II thakkara

remove لازأ IV ‘azaala

renew ددج II jaddada

rent رجاتسإ X ‘istaajara

repair حلصأ IV ‘aSallaHa

repeat داعأ IV ‘a”aada

II kararra ررك

replace لدب II baddala

reply باجأ IV ‘ajaaba

report غلبأ II ballagha

request بلط I Talaba

rescue ذقنأ IV ‘anqazha

reserve زجح I Hajaza

reside نكس I sakana

return داع I “aada

(get) rid of لختص نم V takhallaSa min



ride بكر I rakaba

ring نر I ranna

rise ضهن I nahaDa

rouse جعزأ IV ‘az”aja

rule مكح I Hakama

run ضكر I rakaVa

rush off عفدنإ VII ‘indafa”a

S

sail رحبأ IV ‘abHara

say لاق I qaala

scream خرص I Sarakha

search ثحب I baHatha

see ىار I ra’aa

III shaahada دهاش

seek ثحب I baHatha

seize كسمأ IV ‘amsaka

select بختنإ VII ‘intakhaba

sell عاب I baa”a

send off مدق II qaddama

send out لسرأ IV ‘arsala

sense رعش I sha”ara

serve مدخ I khadama

settle down رقتسإ X ‘istaqarra

sew طاخ I khaaTa

shake زه I hazza

shape لكش I shakala

share كراش III shaaraka

shave قلح I Halaqa

shine عمل I lama”a

shoot فلطأ رانلا ىلع IV ‘aTlaq al-naar”alaa

shout خرص I Sarakha

show ضرع I “araDa



shrink صلقت V taqallaSa

(be) shut قلغأ IV ‘aghlaqa

(become) sick ضرم I maraDa

sign عقو II waqqa”a

sing ينغ I ghaniya

sink قرغ I gharaqa

sit down سلج I jalasa

slay حبذ I thadaHa

sleep مان I naama

slide قلزنإ VII ‘inzalaqa

smile مستبإ VIII ‘ibtasama

smoke نخد II dakhkhana

sneeze سطع I “aTasa

solve لح I Halla

speak ملكت V takalama

speed up عرسأ IV ‘asra”a

spend قفنأ IV ‘anfaqa

spill قلد I dalaqa

spend فرص I Sarafa

spend the night رهس I sahara

spit قصب I baSaqa

split مسق I qasama

spread out رشن I nashara

squeeze رصع I `aSara

stand still فقو I waqafa

stand up to فقو I waqafa

start أدب I bada’a

stay يقب I baqiya

steal سلخ I khalasa

I saraqa قرس

sting (verbally) عسل I lasa”a

stop فقوت V tawaqafa

strike برض I Daraba



stroll ىشمت V tamashshaa

struggle حفاك III kaafaHa

study سرد I darasa

succeed حجن I najaHa

suffer ىناع III “aanaa

suggest حرتقإ VIII ‘aqtaraHa

supervise بقار III raaqaba

surprise تغاب III baaghata

III faaja’a أجاف

surrender ملستسإ X ‘istasalama

swear فلح I Halafa

swell خفتنإ VIII ‘intafakha

swim حبس I sabaHa

swing حجرت tarajaHa

T

talk ثدحت V taHaddatha

talk about ثدحت V taHaddatha

V takalama “an ملكت نع

talk with ثدحت V taHaddatha

V takalama ma”a ملكت عم

take ذخأ I ‘akhatha

take off علخ I khala”a

target فدهتسإ X ‘istahadafa

taste قوذت V tathawwaqa

teach سرد II darrasa

II “allama ملع

tear قزم II mazzaqa

tear down مده I hadama

tell ربخأ IV ‘akhbara

test ربتخإ VIII ‘ikhtabara

thank ركش I shakara

think ركف II fakkara



throw ىمر I ramaa

II TawwaHa حوط

(be) thrown back ددرت V taraddada

touch سمل I lamasa

trade لماعت VI ta”amala

train برد II darraba

be trained برد I dariba

transfer لقن I naqala

travel رفاس III saafara

trust قثو I wathaqa

try لواح III Haawala

twist

IV ‘ilawaa ىولإ

U

understand مهف I fahama

(become) uneasy قلق I qaliqa

upset بضغأ IV ‘aghDaba

use لمعتسإ X ‘ista”amala

V

visit راز I zaara

W

wait رظتنإ VIII ‘intaZara

wake up احص I SaHaa

X ‘istayaqZa ظقيتسإ

walk ىشم I mashaa

walk around ىشمت V tamashshaa

want رأدا IV ‘araada

V tamannaa ىنمت

warn رذح II Hazhzhara

wash لسغ I ghasala



watch بقر I raqaba

III raaqaba بقار

III shaahada دهاش

wear سبل I labisa

wed جوزت V tazawwaja

weep ىكب I bakaa

welcome بحر II raHHaba

X `istaqbala لبقتسإ

whisper سمه I hamasa

win حبر I rabiHa

wind فل I laffa

wish ىنمت V tamannaa

withstand مواق III qaawama

work لمع I “amila

(be) worth ىواس III saawaa

wound حرج I jariha

write بتك I kataba

X

Y

Z


References

Bateson, M.C. (2003). Arabic Language Handbook. Baltimore, MD: Georgetown

University Press.

Brustad, K.E. (2000). The Syntax of Spoken Arabic: A Comparative Study of Moroccan,

Egyptian, Syrian, and Kuwaiti Dialects. Baltimore, MD: Georgetown University

Press.

Cowan, J.M. (Ed.). (1976). Arabic-English Dictionary: The Hans Wehr Dictionary of

Modern Written Arabic. Ithaca, NY: Spoken Language Service.

Elgibali, A. & Badawi, S.M. (1996). Understanding Arabic: Essays in Contemporary

Arabic Linguistics in Honor of El-Said M. Badawi. Cairo: American University in

Cairo Press.

Haywood & Nahmad. (2000). A New Arabic Grammar of the Written Language.

Hampshire, UK: Lund Humphries Publishers Ltd.

Holes, C. (2004). Modern Arabic: Structures, Functions, and Varieties. Baltimore, MD:

Georgetown University Press.

Mumisa, M. (2003). Introducing Arabic. Birmingham, UK: Goodword Books.

Thelwall, R. & Sa’adeddin, M.A. (2003). Arabic: Handbook of the International

Phonetic Association. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.

Versteegh, K. (1997). The Arabic Language. New York: Cambridge University

Press.

complete arabic grammar 2nd ed

Documents